3EM23956ALAATQZZA02 - V1 - 9500 MPR-A R4.1.0 Maintenance and Trouble Clearing

Main Documentation
Maintenance and Trouble Clearing
Alcatel-Lucent 9500
MICROWAVE PACKET RADIO for ANSI | RELEASE 4.1.0
Indoor: MSS-8/MSS-4/MSS-1/MPT-HL
Outdoor: ODU300/MPT-HC/MPT-XP/9558HC
Maintenance and Trouble Clearing

3EM23956ALAA Edition 02
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
This document contains proprietary information of Alcatel-Lucent and is not to be disclosed
or used except in accordance with applicable agreements.
Copyright 2012-2013 © Alcatel-Lucent. All rights reserved.
Alcatel-Lucent assumes no responsibility for the accuracy of the information presented, which is subject to change
without notice.
Alcatel, Lucent, Alcatel-Lucent and the Alcatel-Lucent logo are trademarks of Alcatel-Lucent. All other trademarks
are the property of their respective owners.
Copyright 2012-2013 Alcatel-Lucent.
All rights reserved.
Disclaimers
Alcatel-Lucent products are intended for commercial uses. Without the appropriate network design engineering,
they must not be sold, licensed or otherwise distributed for use in any hazardous environments requiring fail-safe
performance, such as in the operation of nuclear facilities, aircraft navigation or communication systems, air traffic
control, direct life-support machines, or weapons systems, in which the failure of products could lead directly to
death, personal injury, or severe physical or environmental damage. The customer hereby agrees that the use, sale,
license or other distribution of the products for any such application without the prior written consent of Alcatel-
Lucent, shall be at the customer's sole risk. The customer hereby agrees to defend and hold Alcatel-Lucent harmless
from any claims for loss, cost, damage, expense or liability that may arise out of or in connection with the use, sale,
license or other distribution of the products in such applications.
This document may contain information regarding the use and installation of non-Alcatel-Lucent products. Please
note that this information is provided as a courtesy to assist you. While Alcatel-Lucent tries to ensure that this
information accurately reflects information provided by the supplier, please refer to the materials provided with any
non-Alcatel-Lucent product and contact the supplier for confirmation. Alcatel-Lucent assumes no responsibility or
liability for incorrect or incomplete information provided about non-Alcatel-Lucent products.
However, this does not constitute a representation or warranty. The warranties provided for Alcatel-Lucent products,
if any, are set forth in contractual documentation entered into by Alcatel-Lucent and its customers.
This document was originally written in English. If there is any conflict or inconsistency between the English
version and any other version of a document, the English version shall prevail.
THIS PRODUCT COMPLIES WITH D.H.H.S. RADIATION PERFORMANCE STANDARDS 21
CFR, 1040.10, FOR A CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT.
DANGER
Invisible laser radiation is present when the optic connector is open. AVOID DIRECT
EXPOSURE TO BEAM.
WARNING
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant
to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful
interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates,
uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the
instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment
in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case users will be required to correct the
interference at their own expense.
NOTICE
This manual applies to 9500 MPR-A R4.1.0 software. Release notes describing revisions to this software
may impact operations described in this manual.
This transfer of commodities, technology, or software, if from the United States, is an export in accordance
with the U.S. Export Administration Regulations. Diversion contrary to U.S. law is prohibited. The export or
re-export (further transfer) of such commodities, technology, software or products made from such
technology is prohibited without proper authorization(s) from the U.S. Department of Commerce or other
appropriate U.S. government agency(s).
All rights reserved. No part of this manual may be reproduced, translated, stored in a retrieval system, or
transmitted or distributed by any means, electronic or mechanical, by photocopying, recording, or otherwise,
without the written permission of Alcatel-Lucent. Preparing derivative works or providing instruction based
on the material is prohibited unless agreed to in writing by Alcatel-Lucent.
The product specification and/or performance levels contained in this document are for information
purposes only and are subject to change without notice. They do not represent any obligation on the part of
Alcatel-Lucent. Such obligations will only be committed to in a written sales agreement signed by
Alcatel-Lucent.
© Alcatel-Lucent 2012-2013 - All Rights Reserved

Printed in U.S.A.
© Alcatel-Lucent 2012-13 - All Rights Reserved
Printed in U.S.A.
ALCATEL-LUCENT PRACTICE 3EM23956AL
Standard Issue 02, February 2013
Table of Contents
FCC part 15 subpart B
1. 9500 MPR-A unlicensed radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1

FCC Class B compliance statement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
FCC Class B requirements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Introduction
2. Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
Writing conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
Admonishments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
Related documentation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
Document types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
3. Maintenance philosophy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7

Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
Before going to site checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
Troubleshooting basics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
Path problems on a commissioned link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12
Path problems on a new link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13
Troubleshooting configuration problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14
Troubleshooting ethernet problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15
4. Safety awareness. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17

Safety EMC-EMF-ESD norms and equipment labeling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17
Safety rules. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17
General rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17
Labels indicating danger, forbiddance, command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18
5. Electrostatic-sensitive devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-31

Electrostatic-sensitivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-31
Handling circuit packs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-32
6. Product support information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-33

Telephone support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-33
Product documentation and training. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-33
Technical support center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-35
Repair and return services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-36
Spare parts and replacement cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-36
Service center. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-37
Installation and maintenance services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-38
© Alcatel-Lucent 2012-2013 - All Rights Reserved i

3EM23956AL
Issue 02, February 2013
Index Task Lists (IXLs)
IXL-100 Task index list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
IXL-101 Alarm and abnormal condition clearing procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
IXL-102 Support procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-41
IXL-103 Equipment replacement procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-43
IXL-104 Supporting information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-45
Routine Task Lists (RTLs)
RTL-100 Preventive maintenance procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
Trouble Analysis Procedures (TAPs)
TAP-100 Facility alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
TAP-101 Abnormal conditions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23
TAP-102 Power alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31
TAP-103 Equipment alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-39
TAP-104 Radio alarms (MPT-HC, MPT-HL, MPT-XP, MOD300, ODU300, 9558HC) . . . . . . . . 4-57
TAP-105 Ethernet alarms (Core-E, MPTACC, P8ETH, MSS-1 Shelf Core) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-75
TAP-106 License/software mismatch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-77
TAP-107 Internal loss of communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-81
TAP-108 Threshold crossing alarms (MOD300, MPT-HC, MPT-HL, MPT-XP,

9558HC, P32E1DS1, MSS-1 shelf P32E1DS1). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-97
TAP-109 Synchronization alarms (Core-E, MOD300, MPT-HC, MPT-HL, MPT-XP,

P32E1DS1, SDHACC, 9558HC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-103
TAP-110 ATPC loop conditions (MOD300, MPT-HC, MPT-HL, MPT-XP, 9558HC). . . . . . . . . 4-113
TAP-111 Cable LOS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-119
TAP-112 Loss of alignment (MOD300, MPT-HC, MPT-HL, MPT-XP, 9558HC) . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-125
TAP-113 Loss of frame (MOD300, MPT-HC, MPT-HL, MPT-XP, 9558HC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-131
ii Table of Contents
3EM23956AL
TAP-114 RPS path fail (MPT-HC, MPT-HL, MPT-XP, 9558HC). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-143
TAP-115 Rx fail (MOD300) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-147
TAP-116 Housekeeping alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-153
TAP-117 LAG alarms (Core-E, MPT-HC, MPT-HL, MPT-XP, ODU300, 9558HC,

MSS-1 shelf Core) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-155
TAP-118 Ethernet connectivity fault management alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-157
TAP-119 Clock failure (MPT-HC, MPT-HL, MPT-XP, 9558HC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-161
Detailed Level Procedures (DLPs)
DLP-100 Mechanical card removal and installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
DLP-101 MPT-HL transceiver air filter replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
DLP-102 SFP replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
DLP-103 Core switching module (Core-E) replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
DLP-104 Core switching module (Core-E) flash card replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
DLP-105 Ethernet access switch (P8ETH) replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21
DLP-106 MSS-4/8 shelf FAN replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27
DLP-107 MOD300 (radio modem) replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-29
DLP-108 MPT-HL transceiver replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-33
DLP-109 ODU300 replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-37
DLP-110 P2E3DS3 (2-Port DS3) replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-41
DLP-111 P32E1DS1 (32-Port DS1) replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-45
DLP-112 Clean fiber-optic connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-49
DLP-113 System power down and power up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-55
DLP-114 MPTACC (MPT Access) replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-59
DLP-115 MPT ODU replacement (MPT-HC, MPT-XP, 9558HC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-65
Table of Contents iii

3EM23956AL
DLP-116 Auxiliary (AUX) replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-71
DLP-117 Protection upgrade and downgrade procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-73
DLP-118 Upgrade and downgrade radio profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-83
DLP-119 Upgrade unlicensed MPT-HL radio to lower 6 GHz radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-87
DLP-120 +24/-48 volt converter replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-91
DLP-121 Power injector replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-95
DLP-122 RPS/XPIC module replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-99
DLP-123 Upgrade MPT ODU to MPT ODU L1 LAG port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-105
DLP-124 Upgrade MPT-HL to MPT-HL L1 LAG port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-109
DLP-125 MPT Power Unit replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-115
DLP-126 SDHACC (2-Port OC-3) Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-119
DLP-127 Software package rollback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-123
DLP-128 MSS-1 shelf replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-129
iv Table of Contents
3EM23956AL
List of Figures
Figure 4-1. Anti static protection device kit..................................................................................... 1-27
Figure 5-1. Electrostatic-sensitive sign ........................................................................................... 1-31
Figure 112-1. Fiber-optic connector inspection .................................................................................. 5-51
Figure 112-2. Fiber-optic connector types, illustrations ...................................................................... 5-52
Figure 112-3. Fiber-optic connector types, photographs .................................................................... 5-53
Figure 120-1. +24/-48 Volt converter cabling diagram ....................................................................... 5-93
Figure 124-1. MPT-HL to L1 LAG information message .................................................................. 5-113
Figure 124-2. MPT-HL to L1 LAG warning message ....................................................................... 5-113
Figure 127-2. Software bank with upgrade software version Committed status .............................. 5-125
Figure 127-3. Software bank with Initial software version Standby status ....................................... 5-125
Figure 127-4. Software Management Action - Forced Activation ..................................................... 5-126
Figure 127-5. Software bank with initial software version Committed status ................................... 5-127
Figure 127-6. Software bank with upgrade software version Standby status................................... 5-127
List of Figures v
3EM23956AL
vi List of Figures
3EM23956AL
List of Tables
Table 100-A. Task Index List ............................................................................................................... 2-1
Table 101-A. Equipment friendly name syntax definitions ................................................................... 2-5
Table 101-B. Friendly name syntax definitions.................................................................................... 2-6
Table 101-C. Alarm monitor alarm types ............................................................................................. 2-8
Table 101-D. Abnormal condition ...................................................................................................... 2-29
Table 101-E. Core-E Card LED indications ....................................................................................... 2-34
Table 101-F. MSS-1 shelf LED indications........................................................................................ 2-35
Table 101-G. Transport Card LED indications ................................................................................... 2-36
Table 101-H. Ethernet LED indications.............................................................................................. 2-36
Table 101-I. MPT-HL transceiver LED alarm indications ................................................................. 2-37
Table 101-J. TMN network troubleshooting ...................................................................................... 2-38
Table 102-A. Support procedures...................................................................................................... 2-41
Table 103-A. Equipment replacement procedures ............................................................................ 2-43
Table 104-A. Supporting information ................................................................................................. 2-45
Table 100-A. Preventive maintenance procedures.............................................................................. 3-1
Table 100-A. Facility alarms ................................................................................................................ 4-2
Table 101-A. Abnormal conditions..................................................................................................... 4-24
Table 102-A. Power Alarms............................................................................................................... 4-32
Table 103-A. Equipment alarms ........................................................................................................ 4-40
Table 104-A. Radio alarms ................................................................................................................ 4-58
Table 105-A. Ethernet alarms............................................................................................................ 4-75
List of Tables vii

3EM23956AL
Table 106-A. License/software mismatch alarms .............................................................................. 4-77
Table 107-A. Internal communication problem alarms ...................................................................... 4-82
Table 108-A. Threshold crossing alarms ........................................................................................... 4-98
Table 109-A. Sync alarms ............................................................................................................... 4-104
Table 110-A. ATPC loop conditions................................................................................................. 4-113
Table 111-A. Clear radio alarms ...................................................................................................... 4-119
Table 112-A. Loss of alignment alarms ........................................................................................... 4-125
Table 113-A. Loss of frame radio alarms......................................................................................... 4-131
Table 114-A. RPS path fail alarms .................................................................................................. 4-143
Table 115-A. Rx fail alarms ............................................................................................................. 4-147
Table 116-A. Housekeeping alarms ................................................................................................ 4-153
Table 117-A. LAG alarms ................................................................................................................ 4-155
Table 118-A. ECFM alarms ............................................................................................................. 4-158
Table 119-A. Clock failure alarm ..................................................................................................... 4-161
Table 122-A. MPT ODU 1+1 module details ..................................................................................... 5-99
Table 124-A. MPT-HL L1 LAG bandwidth per service type ............................................................. 5-110
Table 127-A. Releases supporting software package rollback ........................................................ 5-123
viii List of Tables

3EM23956AL
FCC part 15 subpart B
1. 9500 MPR-A unlicensed radio
1.1 The JF6-9558H/6933B-9500MPT (MPT-HL) unlicensed radio provides

fast deployment of service with microwave radio. No license and small
antennas (no FCC and Industry Canada requirements) allow immediate
turn-up. After the license is received, the unlicensed MPT-HL radio can be
easily converted to the lower 6 GHz licensed band.
1.2 The JF6-9558HC/6933B-9558HC (9558HC) unlicensed radio provides

fast deployment of service with microwave radio. No license and small
antennas (no FCC and Industry Canada requirements) allow immediate
turn-up. The 9558HC unlicensed radio can not be upgraded to licensed
operation.
1.3 The JF6-9558H/6933B-9500MPT and JF6-9558HC/6933B-9558HC

unlicensed radio operates in the 5725-5850 Information, Scientific, and
Medical (ISM) band in accordance with FCC Part 15.247 and IC RSS-210. This
unlicensed radio, although operating in the same band as a spread spectrum
radio, operates using narrower bandwidths than spread spectrum.
1.4 The 9558HC 5.8 Unlicensed band (JF6-9558HC/6933B-9558HC) has

been certified by the FCC and Industry Canada as of August 7, 2012.
FCC Class B compliance statement
1.5 The JF6-9558H/6933B-9500MPT and JF6-9558HC/6933B-9558HC

unlicensed radio have been tested and found to comply with the limits for a
Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules and IC RSS-210.
These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful
interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment.
This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and,
if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause
harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in
a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user
will be required to correct the interference at his own expense.
FCC part 15 subpart B 1-1

3EM23956AL
FCC Class B requirements
1.6 This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules and IC RSS-210.
Operation is subject to the following three conditions: (1) this device may not
cause harmful interference. (2) This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. (3) This
device must be professionally installed.
1.7 Cet appareil radio est conforme à IC RSS-210. Son fonctionnement

respecte les trois conditions suivantes: 1) cette radio ne cause pas
d’interférences néfastes, 2) cette radio peut recevoir des interférences, ainsi
que des interférences qui peuvent causer des opérations non désirées, et 3)
cette radio doit être installée par des Professionnels.
CAUTION Possibility of service interruption. Changes or modifications not expressly

approved by Alcatel-Lucent could void the authority to operate the
JF6-9558H/6933B-9500MPT and JF6-9558HC/6933B-9558HC (unlicensed)
radio.
CAUTION Possibility of service interruption. Installation, Turn-Up, Maintenance, and

Operation Instruction supplied with the JF6-9558H/6933B-9500MPT and
JF6-9558HC/6933B-9558HC (unlicensed) radio require strict adherence for
continued part 15 of the FCC Rules and IC RSS-210 compliance.
Regulatory compliance warning: Physical changes or modifications to the

JF6-9558H/6933B-9500MPT and JF6-9558HC/6933B-9558HC (unlicensed)
radio are strictly prohibited.
1-2 FCC part 15 subpart B

3EM23956AL
Introduction
2. Overview
2.1 This manual provides step-by-step procedures to enable the user to

perform a task. Each procedure contains important introductory information
that is essential to understanding and completing the task properly.
Procedures must be started at step 1, and steps must be performed in the order
given. Failure to do so may cause unforeseen hazardous conditions.
Writing conventions
2.2 Boldface characters indicate commands or parameters the user must

enter or keys the user must press. Enter input parameters exactly as shown in
the examples.
Admonishments
2.3 To avoid hazardous conditions, observe the following admonishments:
DANGER Possibility of personal injury.
CAUTION Possibility of service interruption.
WARNING Possibility of equipment damage.
Related documentation
2.4 For additional system information, refer to the following related

documents:
• 9500 MPR-A Electronic Documentation CD-ROM

(PN 3EM23951ALAA)
• 9500 MPR-A Product Information manual (PN 3EM23952AL)
• 9500 MPR-A Installation Practices manual (PN 3EM23953AL)
• 9500 MPR-A Operation and Administration manual

(PN 3EM23954AL)
Introduction 1-3
3EM23956AL
• 9500 MPR-A Turn-Up manual (PN 3EM23955AL)
• 9500 MPR-A Engineering Support Documentation (PN 3EM23957AL)
• 9500 MPR MPT-GC User Manual PN 3DB19205AA)
• 9500 MPR MPR-e User Manual (PN 3DB19901EB)
• 9500 MPR MSS-1c User Manual (PN 3DB19901DB)
Document types
2.5 The documentation contains all instructions needed to perform a task.

This manual consists of the following types of documents:
• Task Index List (IXL)
• Routine Task List (RTL)
• Trouble Analysis Procedure (TAP)
• Detailed Level Procedure (DLP)
Task index list (IXL)
2.6 IXLs group procedures by function. Each IXL lists procedures

alphabetically by name and refers the user to the appropriate procedure
number.
Routine task list (RTL)
2.7 The RTL is a list of preventive maintenance procedures which

recommends a schedule (monthly, semiannual, or annual) for the performance
of each procedure.
Trouble analysis procedure (TAP)
2.8 TAPs contain sequential steps required to perform trouble clearing.

Trouble clearing involves clearing and repairing malfunctions in the system.
Trouble clearing may be done to answer a customer complaint or to respond to
an office alarm, a trouble report, or an abnormal display. Steps can refer to
other procedures.
1-4 Introduction
3EM23956AL
Detailed level procedure (DLP)
2.9 DLPs contain detailed steps and supporting information required to

complete tasks. When a DLP is referenced from another part of the manual,
perform the DLP, then return to the point where the DLP was referenced.
Introduction 1-5
3EM23956AL
1-6 Introduction
3EM23956AL
3. Maintenance philosophy
3.1 Maintenance of the system consists of repair and preventive

maintenance. Repair covers isolation of faults, troubleshooting to the circuit
card level, and subsequent replacement of the faulty circuit card. Circuit card
repair is not covered. Preventive maintenance covers periodic routine tasks
that are performed to ensure continued proper operation of the system.
3.2 The system incorporates both software- and firmware-based

diagnostics to continuously monitor system integrity. Also available are
diagnostics that can be manually invoked. Problems detected by diagnostics
are reported as alarm/event messages displayed at a user terminal and/or
lighted alarm indicators on the equipment. These messages and lights are the
primary trouble analysis tools for fault isolation.
3.3 The instruction “contact next level of technical support for assistance”
appears throughout this manual. The intent of this statement is to escalate the
problems that are beyond the scope of this Task Oriented Practice (TOP) to a
higher level of expertise. Users who have local interim levels and/or procedures
should implement those in response to this instruction. See the Introduction for
customer access (HELP) contacts.
Troubleshooting
3.4 Troubleshooting procedures generally assume the following

conditions:
• An alarm indication was received through the Alarm Monitor, Craft

Terminal or a lighted alarm indicator.
• Maintenance personnel are familiar with system operation and use of

the Alarm Monitor and Craft Terminal.
• Maintenance personnel have system administration privileges or a

system administrator is available.
• Replacement components (spares) are available and fully functional.
3.5 The following guidelines and information should be observed during

troubleshooting:
• Trouble clearing begins with an analysis of alarm indications. The

correct TAP is referenced in the IXL.
Introduction 1-7
3EM23956AL
• Clear upstream problems first. This may also clear downstream

problems.
• As a rule, no main circuit card should be physically removed unless

traffic was manually switched to protection by entering the
appropriate Craft Terminal command. Exceptions to this are
addressed in specific DLPs.
• As a rule, no protection circuit card should be physically removed

unless a manual lockout switch issued by entering the appropriate
Craft Terminal command. Exceptions to this are addressed in specific
DLPs.
• As a rule, in unprotected radio configurations physically removing a

circuit card will cause a loss of traffic. Exceptions to this are addressed
in specific DLPs.
• To avoid unnecessary service interruption, exercise care when

removing circuit cards, performing commands, and doing other
maintenance tasks.
• The procedures in this manual are used to aid in clearing alarms for
which protection is available. If alarms exist on both a card and its
mate card, or if alarms exist on a card and its mate card is not
available for protection, always contact the next level of technical
support for assistance with clearing the alarms.
• Always follow electrostatic-sensitive device procedures when handling

circuit cards.
• After circuit card replacement, allow time for alarms to clear. As a

general rule, allow a minimum of 120 seconds to clear. Some alarms
may take longer to clear. Allow time for the alarm to clear before
assuming the replacement did not clear the trouble.
• When replacing a circuit card does not clear the trouble, remove the
replacement circuit card and return the original circuit card to service.
• When TAPs fail to clear the fault, an obscure or multiple fault is

assumed to exist.
Before going to site checklist
3.6 Where possible, before going to site obtain the following information:
• Does the fault require immediate attention?
• Determine who is the best-placed person to attend the fault.
1-8 Introduction
3EM23956AL
• Confirm the nature and severity of the reported fault, its location,
9500 MPR-A type, frequency band, high/low end ODU or MPT-HL
Transceiver, capacity modulation and configuration (non protected,
protected, diversity). Ask:
– Is just one 9500 MPR-A link affected, or a number of links in the

same geographical area?
– Is the path down completely or is traffic passing but with a BER

alarm?
– Is only one or a number of tributaries affected?
– Could the fault be in the equipment connected to 9500 MPR-A,

rather than in 9500 MPR-A? Are there alarms on other, connected
equipment?
– Is it a hard or intermittent fault?
– Do alarms confirm which end of an alarmed link is faulty?
• Could the weather (rain, ice, high wind, temperature) be a factor in the
reported fault?
If the fault suggests a rain fade or other weather related fade

condition and it matches the prevailing weather conditions, do
not take any action until the weather abates.
• Does link history suggest any fault trends?
– Does the fault history for the link indicate a likely cause?
– Is the 9500 MPR-A link newly installed?
– Has there been any recent work done on the link?
Introduction 1-9
3EM23956AL
• Ensure that you have with you:
– Appropriate spares. Where an equipment failure is suspected,

these should include replacement Cards/plug-ins, MPT-HL
Transceiver and ODU. If an ODU is suspected then local/national
climbing safety requirements must be adhered to.
– A laptop PC loaded with Craft Terminal, and an Ethernet cable.

If an Ethernet connection is to be used, you need the 9500 MPR-A
Node/Terminal IP address and also the addresses for any remote
sites to be accessed.
– If login security has been enabled, you need the ‘engineer’

password for the local and also any remote sites to be accessed.
– Any special test equipment that may be needed, such as a BER

tester.
– Toolkit.
– Key(s) for access to the site.
Troubleshooting basics
3.7 This section provides general guidance on 9500 MPR-A

troubleshooting:
3.8 Check front-panel LED indications. These provide summary alarm

indications, which can help narrow down the location and type of failure. See
IXL-101 for more information.
– Where a Status LED on a plug-in is off (unlit), but power to the

MSS is confirmed by LEDs on other plug-ins, check the seating of
the affected plug-in.
3.9 Check Main Screen. When logging into 9500 MPR-A with Craft
Terminal, the opening screen is the Main Screen. Use the information provided
to check for severity and problem type. See Table 101-C for probable cause and
recommended action.
3.10 Check the basics first.
• For example, if multiple alarms are present, and these include power
supply voltage or hardware alarms, always check their cause before
looking at resultant down-stream path failure or path warning (signal)
alarms.
1-10 Introduction
3EM23956AL
• Similarly, if a path-related failure is indicated (no hardware or

software alarms), investigate the path. Go to the Craft Terminal
History screen (15 minute view) to check supporting data, such as low
RSL and incidence of intermittent pre-failure BER alarms, which if
present are evidence of a path-related failure. See Troubleshooting
path problems in this chapter for more information.
3.11 Check if symptoms match the alarm. Alarms reflect the alarm
state, but in exceptional circumstances an alarm may be raised because of a
failure to communicate correctly with the alarm source, or a failure in alarm
management processing. Always check to see if symptoms match the alarm,
using LED indications and the Craft Terminal.
3.12 Check if recent work may be a cause. Recent work at the site may
be a cause or contributing factor. Check for a configuration change, software
upgrade, power recycling (reboot), or other site work:
• Many hardware alarms are only initiated as a loss-of-communications

alarm during a reboot, software upgrade, or reconfiguration. By not
being able to communicate with the Core, their settings cannot be
loaded. The fault may be at the hardware device (most likely),
communications to it, or the Core.
• Hardware/software compatibility alarms will be raised when a new

plug-in is installed that needs a later version of 9500 MPR-A software.
• Hardware incompatible alarms will be raised when a plug-in is

installed in a slot that has been configured for a different plug-in.
3.13 MSS before an ODU. If there is doubt about whether a fault is in the
MSS or ODU, always troubleshoot the MSS first.
3.14 Hot-pluggable. MSS cards are hot-pluggable. There is no need to

power-down before replacing, but traffic will be lost unless the plug-in is
protected.
3.15 Plug-in restoration time. Ensure adequate time is allowed for

services to resume when a plug-in is replaced.
Troubleshooting path problems
3.16 A path-related problem, with the exceptions of interference, reflection,

or multipath, is characterized by traffic being similarly affected in both
directions. Generally, if you are experiencing only a one-way problem, it is not
a path problem.
Introduction 1-11
3EM23956AL
A path extends from ODU or MPT-HL antenna port to ODU or

MPT-HL antenna port.
3.17 Normally a path problem is signalled by a reduced RSL, and

depending on its severity, a high BER.
3.18 Only in worst case situations, such as an antenna knocked out of

alignment, will a path fail completely, and stay that way.
3.19 For weather-related problems, such as rain or ducting, the path

problem will disappear as the weather returns to normal.
Path problems on a commissioned link
3.20 A path problem on an existing link, one that has been operating
satisfactorily may be caused by:
• Weather-related path degradation
• Changed antenna alignment or antenna feed problem
• New path obstruction
• Interference from other signal sources
Weather-related path degradation
3.21 If BER alarms are fleeting/not permanent and RSL returns to its
normal, commissioned level after the alarm is cleared, rain, diffraction, or
multipath fading is indicated. Rain fade is the likely cause of fade for links 13
GHz and higher. Diffraction and multipath/ducting for links 11 GHz and lower.
If these alarms are persistent, there could be a problem with the link design or
original installation.
1-12 Introduction
3EM23956AL
Changed antenna alignment or antenna feed problem
3.22 If RSLs do not return to commissioned levels after a period of

exceptionally strong winds, suspect antenna alignment. Also, check the
antenna for physical damage, such as may occur with ice-fall. For a remote-
mounted ODU or MPT-HL, check its antenna feeder.
New path obstruction
3.23 Where all other parameters check as normal, and the path has
potential for it to be obstructed by construction works, view/survey the path for
possible new obstructions.
Interference from other signal sources
3.24 Interference usually affects traffic in just one direction. Unlike other
path problems, RSL is not affected. If suspected, check for new link
installations at, or in the same geographical area, as the affected site.
Ultimately, a spectrum analyzer may have to be used to confirm interference,
which is not an easy task given the need to connect directly to the antenna port,
after removing the ODU or MPT-HL.
Path problems on a new link
3.25 For a new link, potential problems can extend to also include:
• Incorrect antenna alignment
• Mismatching antenna polarizations
• Incorrect path calculations
• Reflections
Incorrect antenna alignment
3.26 One or both antennas incorrectly aligned. Refer to 9500 MPR-A

Turn-Up manual (PN 3EM23955AL) Antenna Polarization Verification
(DLP-105) Antenna Feedhorn Verification - XPD Procedure.
Mismatching antenna polarizations
3.27 Given a typical polarization discrimination of 30 dB, for most links it

is not possible to capture a signal to begin the antenna alignment process.
Introduction 1-13
3EM23956AL
Incorrect path calculations
3.28 If the RSLs are too low or too high, antenna alignment is correct, and
Tx power settings are correct, check the path calculations used to determine
the link performance. A good calculation match is +/- 2dB. Disagreements in
excess of 3 dB should be investigated.
Reflections
3.29 Reflection (path cancellation) problems may not have been picked up
at the path planning stage, particularly if the survey was a simple line-of-sight.
If suspected, resurvey the path.
Troubleshooting configuration problems
3.30 Configuration problems should only occur during the setup of a new
link, or reconfiguration of an existing link. The more common problems may be
broadly categorized as:
• Compatibility Problems
• Incorrect circuit connections
• Incorrect ID naming and commissioning
• Incorrect/incompatible trib settings
Compatibility problems
3.31 The two alarms that may activate are Configuration Not Supported
and SW/HW Incompatible:
3.32 Configuration Not Supported: The plug-in installed is not enabled

or is incorrect for the configuration.
Incorrect circuit connections
3.33 No alarms are activated for incorrect circuit connections. An incorrect

assignment means the expected end-to-end circuit connectivity will not
happen. Re-check circuit assignments for all nodes carrying the lost circuit(s).
3.34 Take extra care when configuring ring circuits.
1-14 Introduction
3EM23956AL
3.35 Where the problem is not obvious, use the tributary loopback BER test
to track a single circuit through a 9500 MPR-A network, beginning at the node
closest to the node applying the BER test.
Incorrect ID naming and commissioning
3.36 All traffic-carrying circuits must have a unique flow ID for the cross-
connect capability to operate.
Incorrect/incompatible trib settings
3.37 Trib line interface settings incorrect, or line levels incompatible. While
no alarm activates for an incorrect setting, its effect may result in line levels
being too low (LOS alarm), or too high, resulting in a high BER.
Troubleshooting ethernet problems
3.38 This section gives general guidance on troubleshooting problems

related to the four Ethernet ports on the Core-E Card and the eight Ethernet
ports on the P8ETH card.
3.39 The most common Ethernet problems are network and connectivity
related and therefore always check the following first:
• Verify link partner capability, provisioning, and connection
• Verify radio provisioning matches link partner
• Verify cabling between radio and link partner
3.40 The LEDs on the Core-E and P8ETH Card front panel for each
Ethernet connector are a good indicator of correct connectivity and activity on
the Ethernet port. See Table 101-H for LEDs that are locally at the alarmed
site.
3.41 In order for the green Link LED to light:
1. Cable must be connected to Ethernet port
2. Ethernet port must be enabled (provisioned Enabled on Core Settings

Screen)
3. Speed and mode (on Core Settings Screen) must be provisioned the
same as the link partner.
Introduction 1-15
3EM23956AL
3.42 The yellow LED opposite the green on the connector indicates activity
only. The flashing yellow LED is not an indicator of signal type or quality.
Troubleshooting TMN problems
3.43 This section gives general guidance on troubleshooting TMN problems

related to Ethernet port 4 on the Core-E Card. Ethernet port 4 on the Core-E
Card can be used to transport SNMP IP data. Troubleshoot port 4 connectivity
alarms the same as Ethernet ports 1-3. See sections 3.38 to 3.42.
3.44 The most common TMN problems are network related and first alert
is normally observed by improper operation at the SNMP master. Always check
the following first:
• Verify master is properly registered in NE to receive traps.
• Verify SNMP version matches system requirements
• Verify correct community string and privileges
• Verify proper network routing.
See Table 101-J for information about TMN network troubleshooting.
1-16 Introduction
3EM23956AL
4. Safety awareness
Safety EMC-EMF-ESD norms and equipment labeling
4.1 This section describes the equipment labeling and the norms
mandatory or suggested that must be considered to avoid injuries on persons
and/or damage to the equipment.
• Safety rules
• Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC norms)
• Equipment protection against electrostatic discharges
• Cautions to avoid equipment damage
Safety rules
General rules
4.2 Before performing any installation, turn-on, tests or operation and

maintenance operations, read carefully the related sections of this Manual,
specifically:
• Hardware Installation
• Commissioning
• Maintenance and Upgrade
Observe safety rules
4.3 When equipment is operating, do not access the equipment parts

which are protected with Cover Plate Shields removable with tools.
4.4 If you must access the equipment parts when it is operating, this is
allowed exclusively to service personnel, where for Service Personnel or
Technical assistance is meant:
• “Personnel which has adequate Technical Knowledge and experience

necessary to be aware of the danger that he might find in carrying out
an operation and of the necessary measurements to reduce danger to
minimum for him and for others”.
Introduction 1-17
3EM23956AL
• The Service Personnel can only replace the faulty units with spare
parts.
• The Service Personnel is not allowed to repair: hence the access to the
parts not specified is not permitted.
• The keys and/or the tools used to open doors, hinged covers to remove
parts which give access to compartments in which are present high
dangerous voltages must belong exclusively to the service personnel.
4.5 For the eventual cleaning of the external parts of the equipment,
absolutely do not use any inflammable substance or substances which in some
way may alter the markings, inscriptions etc.
4.6 It is recommended to use a slightly wet cleaning cloth.
4.7 The Safety Rules stated in the handbook describe the operations
and/or precautions to observe to safeguard service personnel during the
working phases and to guarantee equipment safety, i.e., not exposing persons,
animals, things to the risk of being injured/damaged.
4.8 Whenever the safety protection features have been impaired, REMOVE
POWER.
4.9 To cut off power proceed to switch off the power supply units as well as
cut off power station upstream (rack or station distribution frame).
The safety rules described in this handbook are distinguished by the following
symbol and statement:
Labels indicating danger, forbiddance, command
4.10 Follow the instructions printed on the labels affixed to the units and
assemblies.
• Dangerous electrical voltages
• Risks of explosions
• Moving mechanical parts
• Equipment connection to earth
• Heat-radiating mechanical parts
• Microwave radiations (EMF norms)
• Laser precautions
1-18 Introduction
3EM23956AL
4.11 Pay attention to the information stated in the following, and proceed
as instructed.
The symbols presented in following paragraphs are all the

possible symbols that could be present on Alcatel-Lucent
equipment, but are not all necessarily present on the equipment
this handbook refers to.
Dangerous electrical voltages
Labeling:
4.12 The following warning label is affixed next to dangerous voltages

(>42.4 Vp; >60 VDC).
4.13 If it is a Class 1 equipment connected to mains, then the label

associated to it will state that the equipment will have to be grounded before
connecting it to the power supply voltage, e.g.:
Introduction 1-19
3EM23956AL
Safety instructions:
DANGER! Possibility of personal injury:
4.14 Carefully observe the specific procedures for installation / turn-up and
commissioning / maintenance of equipment parts where D.C. power is present,
described in the relevant installation / turn-up and commissioning /
maintenance documents and the following general rules:
• Personal injury can be caused by -48VDC. Avoid touching powered

terminals with any exposed part of your body.
• Short circuiting, low-voltage, low-impedance, DC circuits can cause

severe arcing that can result in burns and/or eye damage. Remove
rings, watches, and other metal jewelry before working with primary
circuits. Exercise caution to avoid shorting power input terminals.
Risks of explosions
Labeling:
4.15 This risk is present when batteries are used, and it is signaled by the
following label:
4.16 Therefore, slits or apertures are made to let air circulate freely and
allow dangerous gasses to down flow (battery-emitted hydrogen). A 417-IEC-
5641 Norm. compliant label is affixed next to it indicating that the openings
must not be covered up.
1-20 Introduction
3EM23956AL
Moving mechanical parts
Labeling:
4.17 The following warning label is affixed next to fans or other moving
mechanical parts:
4.18 Before carrying out any maintenance operation see that all the moving
mechanical parts have been stopped.
Equipment connection to earth
Labeling:
4.19 Terminals for equipment connection to earth, to be done according to

international safety standards, are pointed out by the suitable symbol:
Introduction 1-21
3EM23956AL
4.20 The position of earth connection terminals is specified in the

Hardware Installation section.
Heat-radiating mechanical parts
Labeling:
4.21 The presence of heat-radiating mechanical parts is indicated by the

following warning label in compliancy with IEC 417 Norm, Fig.5041:
DANGER! Possibility of personal injury:
4.22 Carefully observe the specific procedures for installation / turn-up and
commissioning / maintenance of equipment parts where heat-radiating
mechanical parts are present, described in the relevant installation / turn-up
and commissioning / maintenance documents and the following general rule:
4.23 Personal injury can be caused by heat. Avoid touching powered

terminals with any exposed part of your body.
1-22 Introduction
3EM23956AL
Microwave radiations (EMF norms)
4.24 Equipment emitting RF power (Reminder from site preparation

procedure):
4.25 The site must be compliant with ICNIRP guidelines or local regulation
if more restrictive.
4.26 The following rules should be strictly applied by Customer:
• Non authorized persons should not enter the compliance boundaries,

if any, for the general public.
• Compliance RF boundaries, if any, related to Electro Magnetic Field

exposure must be marked.
• Workers should be allowed to switch-off the power if they have to

operate inside compliance boundaries.
• Assure good cable connection.
• Install the antenna as high as possible from floor or area with public
access (if possible the cylinder delimitating the compliance
boundaries, if any, or the cylinder corresponding to the transmission
area directly in front of antenna with the same diameter as the
antenna, more than 2 meters high).
• Install the antenna as far as possible from other existing equipment

emitting RF power.
4.27 Always remember that someone standing in front of the 9500 MPR-A
antenna may cause traffic shutdown.
4.28 Place the relevant stickers:
EMF emission warning sign
Introduction 1-23
3EM23956AL
4.29 On the site when applicable (when people can cross the compliance
boundaries and/or the transmission area of the antenna, i.e. roof top
installation)
• Warning label “Do not stand on the antenna axis”
4.30 On the mast (front side)
• EMF emission warning sign (Yellow and black) to be placed at bottom

of antenna, visible by someone moving in front of the antenna (roof top
installation)
4.31 On the antenna (rear side)
• EMF emission warning sign, placed on the antenna.
Compliance boundaries for 9500 MPR-A transceivers with 1ft (30 cm) antenna:
System Modulation Worst Configuration A (m) B (m)

Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC norms)
4.32 The equipment's EMC norms depend on the type of installation being
carried out (cable termination, grounding etc.,) and on the operating conditions
(equipment, setting options of the electrical/electronic units, presence of
dummy covers, etc.).
4.33 Before carrying out any installation, turn-on, tests & operation and
maintenance operations, read carefully the related sections of this Manual, in
particular:
• Hardware Installation
• Maintenance and Upgrade
1-24 Introduction
3EM23956AL
4.34 The norms set down to guarantee EMC compatibility, are

distinguished inside this Manual by the symbol and term:
EMC Norms
1. EMC General Norms - Installation
• All connections (towards the external source of the equipment) made

with shielded cables use only cables and connectors suggested in this
Manual or in the relevant Plant Documentation, or those specified in
the Customer's “Installation Norms” (or similar documents)
• Shielded cables must be suitably terminated
• Install filters outside the equipment as required
• Ground connect the equipment utilizing a conductor with proper

diameter and impedance
• Mount shields (if utilized), previously positioned during the

installation phase, but not before having cleaned and degrease it.
• Before inserting the shielded unit proceed to clean and degrease all
peripheral surfaces (contact springs and connection points, etc.)
• Screw fasten the units to the subrack.
• To correctly install EMC compatible equipment follow the instructions

given.
2. EMC General Norms - Turn-on, Tests & Operation
• Preset the electrical units as required to guarantee EMC compatibility
• Check that the equipment is operating with all the shields properly
positioned (dummy covers, ESD connector protections, etc.)
• To properly use EMC compatible equipment observe the information

given
3. EMC General Norms - Maintenance
• Before inserting the shielded unit, which will replace the faulty or
modified unit, proceed to clean and degrease all peripheral surfaces
(contact springs and connection points, etc.)
• Clean the dummy covers of the spare units as well.
Introduction 1-25
3EM23956AL
• Screw fasten the units to the subrack.
Equipment protection against electrostatic discharges
4.35 Before removing the ESD protections from the monitors, connectors
etc., observe the precautionary measures stated. Make sure that the ESD
protections have been replaced and after having terminated the maintenance
and monitoring operations.
4.36 Most electronic devices are sensitive to electrostatic discharges, to this

concern the following warning labels have been affixed:
4.37 Observe the precautionary measures stated when having to touch the
electronic parts during the installation/maintenance phases.
4.38 Workers are supplied with anti static protection devices consisting of
an elasticized band worn around the wrist and a coiled cord connected to the
elasticized band and to the stud on the subrack. See Figure 4-1.
Cautions to avoid equipment damage
Anti static protection device kit
4.39 Whenever is necessary to handle spare parts and cards out of their
own box, this kit, as shown in Figure 4-1, must be always warn and its
termination must be connected to a grounded structure, to avoid the possible
damage of the electronic devices for electrostatic discharges.
1-26 Introduction
3EM23956AL
Figure 4-1. Anti static protection device kit
Screw fixing
4.40 In normal operation conditions, all screws (for unit box closing, cable
fixing, etc.) must be always tightened to avoid item detachment and to ensure
the equipment EMI-EMC performance.
• The screw tightening torque must be:
– 2.8 kg x cm (0.28 Newton x m) ±10%
– 2.4317 in lb. (0.2026 ft lb.) ±10%
• Exceeding this value may result in screw breaking.
MSS-ODU300 cable disconnection / connection
4.41 To avoid equipment damage, always unplug the MOD300 card first
before disconnecting the MSS-ODU300 cable (at MSS or ODU300 side).
Fan, equipment rack, and equipment cabinet precautions
4.42 When installing the equipment observe the following:
DANGER Possibility of personal injury. Keep your fingers away from the rotating fan
blades. Pull the fan-tray card by the thumbscrews only and wait for the fan
blades to stop spinning before you attempt to remove the fan-tray card
completely from the chassis.
DANGER Possibility of personal injury. The Alcatel-Lucent 9500 MPR-A requires at

least two people to support, align, and attach the MSS-8 shelf or MPT-HL
shelf to an equipment rack. To prevent equipment damage or personal injury,
make sure you have enough help.
Introduction 1-27
3EM23956AL

least three people to lift and carry an equipment rack populated with
9500 MPR-A equipment. To prevent equipment damage or personal injury,
make sure you have enough help or the appropriate lifting and transporting
equipment.

least two people to align and secure an equipment rack populated with
9500 MPR-A equipment. To prevent equipment damage or personal injury,
make sure you have enough help.
DANGER Possibility of personal injury. To prevent personal injury and equipment

damage due to unbalanced loading of the equipment rack or cabinet, make
sure the equipment rack or cabinet is properly secured to the floor, ceiling,
or other rigid structure before mounting the Alcatel-Lucent 9500 MPR-A in it.
For approved methods of securing the equipment rack, read the equipment-
rack installation instructions or contact the equipment-rack manufacturer.
Electrical precautions
4.43 Take appropriate safety precautions when performing procedures on

electrical equipment. Hazardous electrical potentials are present when system
power is on.
4.44 Some procedures in this manual require working with small

conductive objects, such as screwdrivers, fuses, washers, screws, and nuts.
When working on a chassis at the top of an equipment rack, a dropped object
that falls into a lower chassis can cause physical damage and electrical short
circuits. To prevent this, place a piece of paper or other cover over the lower
chassis to catch fallen objects. Remove the paper or other cover when work is
complete.
DANGER Possibility of personal injury. Install the Alcatel-Lucent 9500 MPR-A in a

restricted-access area only. Entrance to a restricted-access area is intended
for qualified or trained personnel and access to it is controlled by a locked
barrier.
DANGER Possibility of personal injury. The chassis does not contain main overcurrent
protection devices. The user must provide circuit breakers or fuses and
disconnects between the power source and the Alcatel-Lucent 9500 MPR-A.
Each power feed from a source (-48 V dc and Return) requires a 25-amp dc-
rated fast-trip circuit breaker or fuse and disconnect. Circuit breakers or
fuses must meet applicable local and national electrical safety codes and be
approved for the intended application.
1-28 Introduction
3EM23956AL
DANGER Possibility of personal injury. Make sure you connect the node to a -48 V dc
source that is electrically isolated from the ac source and is reliably
connected to earth ground.
DANGER Possibility of personal injury. For personal safety, make sure you connect
and secure the installation site’s frame-ground (earth ground) wire to the
frame-ground terminal on the 9500 MPR-A before you connect any other
wires to the node.
DANGER Possibility of personal injury. A dc-power source provides high energy,

which can cause serious injury or equipment damage. Only Alcatel-Lucent
qualified personnel should connect the dc power to the Alcatel-Lucent
9500 MPR-A. To prevent serious injury or equipment damage, make sure the
power source cables are de-energized before you handle or connect them to
the node.
Laser precautions
4.45 Verify that laser labels on equipment state that the system conforms
to all applicable standards of 21 CFR 1040.10. If there are no danger labels, call
the Alcatel-Lucent Technical Support Center (TSC).
4.46 The invisible infrared radiation emitted by the fiber-optic transmitter

can cause eye damage. Observe local office procedures and the following
dangers:
DANGER Possibility of personal injury. The use of controls and/or adjustments, or the
performance of procedures other than those specified herein may result in
hazardous infrared radiation exposure.
DANGER Possibility of personal injury. Laser infrared radiation is not in the visible
spectrum; therefore, it is not visible to the naked eye or with laser safety
glasses. Although it cannot be seen, laser radiation may be present.
DANGER Possibility of personal injury. Never look directly into an unterminated

fiber-optic connector unless it is absolutely known that no optical power is
being emitted by the connector.
DANGER Possibility of personal injury. Never look into a broken optical fiber cable
unless it is absolutely known that no laser radiation is present.
DANGER Possibility of personal injury. Never look at an optical fiber splice, cable, or
connector unless it is absolutely known that no laser radiation is present in
the fiber. Laser radiation can come from a fiber-optic transmitter, an Optical
Time Domain Reflectometer (OTDR), or other optical test equipment.
Introduction 1-29
3EM23956AL
DANGER Possibility of personal injury. Never look directly into an unterminated

optical connector or cable with a magnifier/microscope unless it is
absolutely known that no laser radiation is being emitted from the connector
or cable. A magnifier or microscope greatly increases the laser radiation
hazard to the eyes.
DANGER Possibility of personal injury. This system normally operates as a Class I

Laser Product (no hazard). However, during servicing operations, when
optical connectors are being connected, disconnected, or handled without
dust covers, it is possible to be exposed to Class IIIb laser radiation, which
can cause eye damage.
DANGER Possibility of personal injury. Everyone within a 10-foot radius of an

unterminated optical fiber or connector that is connected to a powered
transmitter must wear laser safety goggles or eye shields.
4.47 Laser safety goggles or eye shields are not required if the following
work rules are strictly followed:
1. Always remove electrical power from fiber-optic transmitters before

disconnecting fiber-optic connectors in the path between the
transmitter and the receiver.
2. Never connect an unterminated optical cable to a fiber-optic

transmitter. Always connect fiber-optic cables to fiber-optic receivers,
test sets, or some other termination first.
1-30 Introduction
3EM23956AL
5. Electrostatic-sensitive devices
Electrostatic-sensitivity
5.1 An Electrostatic-Sensitive Device (ESD) can withstand voltage spikes

of only 10 to 100 volts and can be damaged or effectively destroyed by a
discharge that might go unnoticed by a technician. Some devices have built-in
protection. However, because this protection is effective only against the lower
levels of electrostatic charges, a false sense of security often prevails.
WARNING Possibility of equipment damage. Common plastic, white foam,

cellophane, and masking adhesive tapes must not come in contact with
ESDs or their packaging.
5.2 Common plastics (synthetic insulating materials), clothing, and paper

or cardboard are the most common sources of static charges.
5.3 Observe special precautions when the ESD sign is displayed. See
Figure 5-1.
Figure 5-1. Electrostatic-sensitive sign
671-0592-1
061405
5.4 The following items are examples of ESDs:
• MOS (Metal Oxide Semiconductor) capacitors, transistors, Integrated

Circuits (ICs)
• CMOS (Complementary Metal Oxide Semiconductor) transistors, ICs
• JFET (Junction Field Effect Transistors)
• IGFET (Insulated Gate Field Effect Transistors)
Introduction 1-31
3EM23956AL
Handling circuit packs
5.5 Although the risk of damage to an ESD is reduced considerably after

it is assembled into a circuit designed to protect sensitive components, take the
following precautions to reduce static charges to harmless levels:
• Handle all circuit packs as ESDs unless they are known not to contain
electrostatic-sensitive parts.
WARNING Possibility of equipment damage. Heel straps are effective only while
standing on conductive or electrostatic-dissipative surfaces.
• Wear ground straps, wrist (PN 1AD012470001) before and while

touching or handling circuit packs containing ESDs.
• Cover surfaces with resistance to ground in excess of 100 megohms,

such as ordinary tile, with properly grounded static dissipative
runners.
• Workbenches must be earth-grounded, and work surfaces must be

covered with an antistatic or static dissipative material bonded to the
bench (bolt). A field service kit (PN 1AD068980001) or equivalent can
be used if an adequate workbench is not available.
• ESDs are delivered with protective packing (containers or conductive

foam). The devices should remain in their original containers until
needed. Store (even temporarily), pack, and ship circuit packs in
antistatic bags or containers.
• Containers with ESDs must contact the antistatic work surface, and
the wrist strap must be connected before parts are removed from
packaging. Devices must be handled by their bodies.
• Do not handle printed circuit board or components unnecessarily. Use

plastic handle.
• Do not use synthetic bristled brushes or acid brushes to clean circuit

packs.
• Handle failed circuit packs with same precautions as good circuit

packs.
5.6 ESDs are protected when properly packaged in conductive or

antistatic packaging. Acceptable packaging is marked as either conductive or
antistatic.
1-32 Introduction
3EM23956AL
6. Product support information
Telephone support
Customer service telephone support
6.1 For telephone support for the customer services mentioned in this
Product Support Information, call the Alcatel-Lucent North America Service
Center at 1-(888) 252-2832 for details, 8:00 a.m. to 5:00 p.m., Central Time,
Monday through Friday. Ask the operator for the appropriate service to be
connected to a qualified representative or engineer.
6.2 After-hours emergency telephone support is also available by calling

the Alcatel-Lucent North America Service Center at 1-(888) 252-2832. An
emergency is defined as an out-of-service, traffic-affecting problem or a
nonoperating alarm system on traffic-bearing systems.
Product documentation and training
Product documentation
6.3 Product documentation is available on CD-ROM. The documentation

can also be accessed through Alcatel-Lucent’s OnLine Customer Support
(OLCS) web site at:
https://support.alcatel-lucent.com/portal/olcsHome.do
Product documentation updates appear on Alcatel-Lucent’s OnLine Customer

Support web site before they are available in any other format.
6.4 At Alcatel-Lucent’s OnLine Customer Support web site, follow the on-
screen instructions to register for access and obtain a login ID. In addition to
accessing product documentation, the Alcatel-Lucent’s OnLine Customer
Support web site allows the user to view the following:
• Application notes
• Configuration notes
• Data collections
• Frequently Asked Questions (FAQs)
Introduction 1-33
3EM23956AL
• General information books
• General Release Documents (GRDs)
• Installation documents
• Methods of Procedure (MOPs)
• Product Change Notifications (PCNs)
• Product Information Bulletins (PIBs)
• Product manual updates
• Software patch and software load documents
• Software Update Documents (SUDs)
• Technical bulletins
• Training documents
• Urgent Product Warnings (UPWs)
Training
6.5 Equipment training is available to all customers. Crafts and

maintenance personnel who are trained by Alcatel-Lucent's Training
department can expect more effective assistance if they need to call the
Technical Assistance Center. Regularly scheduled courses are available at the
training facilities in Plano, Texas. If a customer cannot attend a standard
course, the Training department can arrange a course for a specific
requirement and conduct it at the customer's facility. For further information,
call customer service telephone support and ask for a training coordinator or
write to one of the following addresses:
IN USA: IN CANADA:
Alcatel-Lucent USA Alcatel-Lucent Canada
3400 W. Plano Pkwy. Network Services Division
Plano, Texas 75075 P.O. Box 13600
ATTN: Training M/S 1206-553 Ottawa, Ontario K2K 2E6
6.6 The annual Product Training Catalog can be ordered by calling the
training coordinator, or it can be viewed on-line at:
http://www1.alcatel-lucent.com/us/product_training/catalog
1-34 Introduction
3EM23956AL
Technical support center
6.7 The Technical Support Center (TSC) staff is always ready to provide
high-quality technical assistance. Customers can expect effective telephone
assistance when their crafts and maintenance personnel have been trained by
Alcatel-Lucent's Training department and are equipped with adequate test
equipment, spares, and documentation at the site.
6.8 For technical assistance, call Alcatel-Lucent North America Service

Center at 1-(888) 252-2832.
After-hours emergency telephone support
6.9 Emergency support is available after-hours for emergencies by calling

1-(888) 252-2832.
6.10 An emergency is defined as an out-of-service, traffic-affecting problem

or a nonoperating alarm system on traffic-bearing systems.
6.11 Nonemergency is defined as installation turn-ups, application

questions, traffic cutover, routine maintenance, or other non-service-affecting
maintenance. All non-service-affecting, after-hours telephone services are
billable to the customer.
6.12 Please provide the operator with the following information:
• Company name
• Caller name
• A telephone number where caller can be reached
• A brief description of the problem, including the product involved
After-hours non emergency telephone support
6.13 After-hours telephone support to address new installations, system

expansions, system operations, system application, or other
non-service-affecting issues is available by contacting Alcatel-Lucent at
1-(888) 252-2832.
Introduction 1-35
3EM23956AL
On-site technical support
6.14 On-site technical support is available when an issue cannot be

resolved remotely. This determination is usually made by Alcatel-Lucent TSC
during the problem investigation process. These services may or may not be
billable to a customer. This depends on several factors such as what type of
Service Level Agreement a customer has with Alcatel-Lucent, the age of the
product, etc.
Repair and return services
6.15 As part of a comprehensive technical support program, Alcatel-Lucent

provides factory repair services for equipment. This service is available both
during and after the warranty period through Alcatel-Lucent's Return and
Repair department.
Spare parts and replacement cards
6.16 For spare parts, spare cards, card exchange, and in-warranty
replacement on a routine or emergency basis, call customer service telephone
support.
6.17 Provide the following information:
• Customer Contact Name
• Customer Company Name
• Customer telephone number
• Customer E-mail Address
• A brief description of the problem, including product line, part

number, and quantity of parts needed
6.18 For emergency assistance after normal business hours, call customer
service telephone support, ask the operator for Emergency Parts Assistance,
and provide the operator with the required information. The operator will
contact an appropriate individual to respond.
1-36 Introduction
3EM23956AL
Return for credit or warranty exchange procedure
6.19 Returned equipment must have a Parts Request (PR) number. Obtain
an PR number by calling the Alcatel-Lucent Welcome Center at
1-866-582-3688.
6.20 No equipment should be returned without an PR number. The

following information is required:
• Description and quantity of equipment to be returned
• Reason for return
• Order number the equipment was purchased against and approximate

date of purchase
Service center
6.21 The Service Center tests, repairs, and modifies all cards (both in and
out of warranty). Cards received for repair or modification are returned
promptly.
Return for repair procedure
6.22 Refer to paragraph 6.19 for information on obtaining an PR number.

Notification to the Service Center and issuance of an PR number by
Alcatel-Lucent personnel must be made prior to shipment of parts. The
following information must be furnished with the request for return
authorization:
• Purchase order number or requisition number
• Description and quantity of equipment to be returned
• Reason for return:
– Modification required
– Defective equipment to be repaired
• Warranty status (in or out of warranty) and warranty date stamped on

unit
• Specific nature of problem
• Name and telephone number of person who identified problem
Introduction 1-37
3EM23956AL
• Special instruction/information
Shipping instructions for repair, credit, or

warranty exchange
6.23 Return equipment or parts prepaid to the address provided when the
PR number was issued. The PR number must be prominently marked on the
shipping label, the packing list, and any correspondence regarding the order.
• Include company name, address, and name of person to contact in case

of a question.
• Include specific reason for return. (This aids prompt processing.)
• Include the same requisition number or purchase order number that

was furnished with request for return authorization.
• Include type number and part number of unit.
• State whether equipment is in or out of warranty.
• Furnish shipping address for return of unit, if applicable, or other

pertinent details.
• Mail purchase order, if applicable, to address shown under Return for

Repair Procedure, Attention: Service Center.
Installation and maintenance services
Engineering and installation service
6.24 Whether installation for specific equipment or a full turnkey network

facility is needed, Installation Service can help. Alcatel-Lucent has experience
in central office, outside plant, and customer premises applications, and
specializes in flexible scheduling and high-quality service. Qualified staff are
in place nationwide, so an installation can be started and completed promptly.
Contract maintenance service
6.25 Field service from Alcatel-Lucent US and Canada offices are available.
Alcatel-Lucent field service is well-suited for private networks of any size.
1-38 Introduction
3EM23956AL
6.26 Factory-trained service technicians are qualified on similar systems

before they are allowed to maintain customer equipment. They have direct
access to additional technical support around the clock and to all necessary
tools and test equipment.
Introduction 1-39
3EM23956AL
1-40 Introduction
IXL-100 3EM23956AL
IXL-100
Index Task Lists (IXLs)
Task index list

Table 100-A lists the type of procedure or information needed to perform maintenance and trouble
clearing on the system.
Table 100-A. Task Index List

Type of procedure/information See
Alarm and abnormal condition clearing procedures IXL-101
Support procedures IXL-102
Equipment replacement procedures IXL-103
Supporting information IXL-104
Preventive maintenance procedures RTL-100
Task index list 2-1

3EM23956AL
IXL-100
2-2 Task index list

IXL-101 3EM23956AL
IXL-101
Alarm and abnormal condition clearing procedures
See Table 101-C to identify alarms reported by the Alarm Manager and the corresponding procedure,
which describes how to clear the alarm.
See Table 101-D to identify Abnormal Condition types and the corresponding procedure, which
describes how to clear the Abnormal Condition type. The EQUIPMENT column list the entities to
which an Abnormal Condition type can apply.
See Table 101-E to identify Core-E card LED alarm indications and the corresponding procedure,
which describes how to clear the condition type.
See Table 101-F to identify MSS-1 shelf CORE LED alarm indications and the corresponding
procedure, which describes how to clear the condition type.
See Table 101-G to identify Transport card status LED alarm indications and the corresponding
See Table 101-H to identify Ethernet LED alarm indications and the corresponding procedure, which
describes how to clear the condition type.
See Table 101-I to identify MPT-HL Transceiver LED alarm indications and the corresponding
See Table 101-J to identify TMN Network Trouble conditions and troubleshooting techniques, which
describes how to clear the condition type.
This manual supports alarm naming conventions for the Alarm Monitor.
To retrieve alarms using the Alarm Monitor, execute the following sequence from the main menu
bar:
Diagnosis>Alarms>NE Alarms
To retrieve Abnormal Conditions using the Craft Terminal, execute the following sequence from the
main menu bar:
Diagnosis>Abnormal Condition List
Alarm manager / craft terminal
Equipment / facility column
The EQUIPMENT/FACILITY column in Table 101-C lists the entities to which an alarm type can
apply. Depending on the entities affected, some alarm types have more than one corresponding
procedure.
Alarm and abnormal condition clearing procedures 2-3

3EM23956AL
IXL-101
In the EQUIPMENT/FACILITY column, equipment entities are listed using the following
definitions:
• AUX: Auxiliary card
• Core-E: Core Switching Module card
• FAN: MSS-4/8 Fan card
• MOD300: Radio Modem card
• MPTACC: MPT Access card
• MSS: MSS-1/4/8 shelf
• MPT-HC: MPT-HC/MPT-XP/9558HC (MPT ODU) outdoor unit
• MPT-HL: MPT-HL Transceiver card
• SFP: Small Form Factor Pluggable equipped on listed equipment type
• P2E3DS3: 2-Port DS3 card
• P8ETH: 8-Port Ethernet Access Switch
• P32E1DS1: 32-Port DS1 card
• SDHACC: 2-Port OC-3 card
In the EQUIPMENT/FACILITY column, facility entities are listed using the following definitions:
• Core-E: Ethernet facility supported by the Core-E card
• DS3: DS3 facility supported by P2E3DS3 card
• DS1: DS1 facility supported by P32E1DS1 card
• MOD300: IF facility supported by MOD300 card
• MPT-HC: RF facility supported by MPT-HC/MPT-XP/9558HC (MPT ODU)

outdoor unit
• MPT-HL: RF facility supported by MPT-HL Transceiver card
• OC-3: OC-3 facility supported by SDHACC card
• P8ETH: Ethernet facility supported by the P8ETH card
Friendly name / entity column
The FRIENDLY NAME/ENTITY column identifies the location of the alarming entity.
2-4 Alarm and abnormal condition clearing procedures

IXL-101 3EM23956AL
Equipment friendly names are constructed using the following structure:
r<rack number>s<subrack number>b<board number>d<daughter>
The syntax for equipment Friendly Names / Entities is described in Table 101-A.
Table 101-A. Equipment friendly name syntax definitions

Location Syntax Values Description
Rack r r01 Rack number
Subrack s s1 Subrack number for MSS-1, MSS-4, and MSS-8 shelves
s[3-8][1-4] Subrack number for (MPT ODU) connected to MPTACC
card (MPTACC slot number and Ethernet port number
associated with MPT ODU)
s[3-8][5-8] Subrack number for (MPT ODU) connected to P8ETH card
(P8ETH slot number and Ethernet port number associated
with MPT ODU)
s1[1-6] Subrack number for MPT ODU connected to Core-E card
or MSS/CORE (Core-E slot number and Ethernet port
number associated with MPT ODU)
s[3-8][5-8] Subrack number for MPT-HL transceiver connected to
P8ETH card (P8ETH slot number and Ethernet port
number associated with MPT-HL Transceiver)
s[3-8] Subrack number for ODU300 connected to MOD300 card
(MOD300 slot number associated with ODU300)
Board b board#[1-9] Board/slot number of equipment in alarm
b#[1-9]
Slot#[1-9]
Daughter d daughter#[05-06] Daughter SFP port number of equipment in alarm
associated with Core-E card or MSS/CORE
daughter#[03-04] Daughter SFP port number of equipment in alarm
associated with MPTACC card
associated with P8ETH card
associated with SDHACC card
Radio facility friendly names are constructed using the following structure:
f<facility name>rd<radio direction>b<board number>p<port number>c<channel number>
DS1, DS3, and Ethernet facility friendly names are constructed using the following structure:
f<facility name>b<board number>p<port number>

3EM23956AL
IXL-101
The syntax for facility Friendly Names / Entities is described in Table 101-B.
Table 101-B. Friendly name syntax definitions

Location Syntax Values Description
Facility f DS-1-in, out DS1 facility and direction
Name DS-3-in, out DS3 facility and direction
EleSdh-in OC-3 facility and direction (supported by electrical SFP)
OptSdh-in OC-3 facility and direction (supported by optical SFP)
MAU Ethernet signal
Radio Radio facility
Radio rd Dir#[3-8].[1-4] Radio direction of MPT ODU radio channel in alarm
Direction connected to MPTACC card (MPTACC slot number and
port number)
Dir#[1-2].[5-8] Radio direction of MPT ODU radio channel in alarm
connected to Core-E card or MSS/CORE (Core-E slot
number and port number)
Dir#[3-8].[1-4] Radio direction of MPT-HL radio channel in alarm
connected to P8ETH card (P8ETH slot number and port
number)
Dir#[3-8] Radio direction of ODU300 radio channel in alarm
connected to MOD300 card (MOD300 slot number)
Board b board#[1-9] board/slot number of MSS-8 (1-9), MSS-4 (1-5) equipment
b#[1-9] in alarm
Slot#[1-9]
MSS/CORE board/slot number of MSS-1 equipment in alarm
MSS/DS1
Port p Port#[1-16] DS1 port number of facility in alarm on MSS-1 shelf
Number Port#[1-32] DS1 port number of facility in alarm on P32E1DS1
Port#[1-2] DS3 port number of facility in alarm
Port#[1-2] OC-3 port number of facility in alarm
Port#[1-6] Ethernet port number of facility in alarm associated with
Core-E card or MSS/CORE
Port#[1-8] Ethernet port number of facility in alarm associated with
P8ETH card
Channel c Ch#1 Main radio channel in alarm
Number Ch#0 Spare radio channel in alarm
ERPS ERP ERP[1-2]#[1-2] Ethernet Ring Protection Switch
The following are examples to illustrate how to interpret the probable cause and friendly name
combinations:

IXL-101 3EM23956AL
Example: Probable Cause: Replaceable Unit Missing
• Friendly Name: r01s1/board#8
– Translation: Missing card at r01 (rack 01) s1 (subrack 1 (MSS-8 Shelf))

/board#8 [missing card provisioned for slot #8]
• Friendly Name: r01s1b3/daughter#05
– Translation: Missing SFP at r01 (rack 01) s1 (subrack 1 (MSS-8 Shelf)) b3

(card in slot #3 (P8ETH)) /daughter#05 [missing SFP provisioned in slot #3
(P8ETH), SFP port #5]
Example: Probable Cause: Replaceable Unit Type Mismatch
• Friendly Name: r01s1/board#7
– Translation: Card in r01 (rack 01) s1 (subrack 1 (MSS-8 Shelf)) /board#7 [card
installed in slot #7 does not match card configured in Core-E memory]
• Friendly Name: r01subrack#37
– Translation: Card in r01 (rack 01) subrack 37 [MPT-HL Transceiver 3.7,

associated with P8ETH card in slot #3, SFP port #7, does not match MPT-HL
Transceiver configured in Core-E memory]
Example: Probable Cause: Loss Of Signal
• Friendly Name: DS1-in/slot#5/Port#22
– Translation: DS1-input, slot #5, Port #22 [Loss Of incoming DS1 Signal, on
P32E1DS1 card in slot #5, port #22]
• Friendly Name: MAU/Slot#4/Port#7
– Translation: Ethernet signal, slot #4, Port #7 [Loss Of Ethernet Signal on

P8ETH card in slot #4, SFP port #7]
• Friendly Name: MAU/Port#2
– Translation: Ethernet signal, Port #2 [Loss Of Ethernet Signal on the active

Core-E card, port #2]

3EM23956AL
IXL-101
Example: Probable Cause: Loss Of Frame
• Friendly Name: DS3-in/slot#6/Port#2
– Translation: DS3-input, slot #6, Port #2 [Loss Of DS3 Frame on P2E3DS3

card in slot #6, port #2]
• Friendly Name: Radio/Dir#3.6/Slot#3/Port#6/Ch#1
– Translation: Radio signal, Direction 3.6, associated with card in slot #3, SFP
port #6, Channel #0 [Loss of Frame on MPT-HL Transceiver 3.6 associated
with P8ETH card in slot #3, SFP port #6, Channel #0 (main)]
• Friendly Name: Radio/Dir#6/Ch#1
– Translation: Radio signal, Direction 6, Channel #0 [Loss of Frame on ODU300

#6 channel #0 (spare) associated with MOD300 card in slot #6]
Table 101-C describes the alarms that are reported by the Alarm Manager and the corresponding
procedure to clear the alarm.
Table 101-C. Alarm monitor alarm types

Probable Friendly name/entity Facility/ Description See
cause equipment
AIS DS1-in/MSS/DS1/Port#[1-16] DS1 AIS detected incoming to the TAP-100
(MSS/DS1) PDH card from the
DS1-in/Slot#[3-8]/Port#[1-32] DS1 demarcation panel for the
(P32E1DS1) DS1 or DS3 facility.
DS3-in/Slot#[3-8]/Port#[1-2] DS3
AIS EleSdh-in/slot#[3-8]/Port[1-2] OC-3 AIS detected incoming to the TAP-100
SDHACC card from the
OptSdh-in/slot#[3-8]/Port[1-2] demarcation panel for the
OC-3 facility.
AIS DS1-out/MSS/DS1/Port#[1- DS1 AIS detected from the TAP-100
16] (MSS/DS1)
Core-E switch matrix for the
DS1-out/Slot#[3-8]/Port#[1- DS1 DS1 or DS3 facility,
32] (P32E1DS1) indicating an upstream
failure.
DS3-out/Slot#[3-8]/Port#[1-2] DS3
AIS EleSdh-out/slot#[3-8]/ OC-3 AIS detected from the TAP-100
Port[1-2] Core-E switch matrix for the
OptSdh-out/slot#[3-8]/ OC-3 facility, indicating an
Port[1-2] upstream failure.

IXL-101 3EM23956AL
Table 101-C. Alarm monitor alarm types (cont.)

cause equipment
ATPC loop Radio/Dir#1.[1-6]/ MPT ODU Reported for a ATPC High TAP-110
problem Slot#1/Port#[1-6]/Ch#1 connected to
Power Time-out. When
Core-E, ATPC is enabled, the local
MSS/CORE transmitter was operating
Radio/Dir#[3-8].[1-4]/ MPT ODU continuously at full power for
Slot#[3-8]/Port#[1-4]/Ch#[0-1] connected to 5 minutes, and the
MPTACC transmitter was reduced to its
minimum power setting and
Radio/Dir#[3-8].[5-8]/ MPT ODU this condition notification was
Slot#[3-8]/Port#[5-8]/Ch#1 connected to generated. This condition will
P8ETH
remain active until a
Radio/Dir#[3-8].[5-8]/ MPT-HL message is received that the
Slot#[3-8]/Port#[5-8]/Ch#[0-1] active receiver at the other
Radio/Dir#[3-8]/Ch#[0-1] MOD300 end of the link is no longer
requesting additional
transmitter power.
Bandwidth ERP#[1-2]#[1-2] Core-E An ERPS Instance has TAP-105
degrade for entered a Protection state.
protection
switch
Bandwidth over Radio/Dir#1.[1-6]/ MPT ODU While the MPT ODU/ TAP-104
flow Slot#1/Port#[1-6]/Ch#1 connected to
MPT-HL was not
Core-E, communicating with the
MSS/CORE Core-E, EAS, or
Radio/Dir#[3-8].[1-4]/ MPT ODU MSS/CORE, TDM/SDH
Slot#[3-8]/Port#[1-4]/Ch#[0-1] connected to cross-connections were
MPTACC provisioned with a total
bandwidth which exceeds
Radio/Dir#[3-8].[5-8]/ MPT ODU the net bandwidth capacity of
Slot#[3-8]/Port#[5-8]/Ch#[0-1] connected to the radio profile.
P8ETH
Radio/Dir#[3-8].[5-8]/ MPT-HL
Slot#[3-8]/Port#[5-8]/Ch#[0-1]
Battery failure r01/subrack#1 MSS-1/4/8 A battery feed failed or is TAP-102
missing.
Cable LOS r01s1/board#[3-8] MOD300 Bad cable connection at IF TAP-111
in/out connector on MOD300
card.

3EM23956AL
IXL-101

cause equipment
CLA Radio/Dir#[3-8].[1-4]/ MPT ODU The standby transmitter TAP-104
Slot#[3-8]/Port#[1-4]/Ch#[0-1] connected to has/had a silent failure which
MPTACC caused the far end to request
Radio/Dir#[3-8].[5-8]/ MPT-HL a HSB switch.
Slot#[3-8]/Port#[5-8]/Ch#[0-1]
Radio/Dir#[3-8].[1-4]/ MPT ODU
Slot#[3-8]/Port#[1-4]/Ch#[0-1]
Radio/Dir#[3-8]/Ch#[0-1] MOD300
Clock failure Radio/Dir#1.[1-6]/ MPT ODU The MPT ODU/MPT-HL is TAP-119
Slot#1/Port#[1-6]/Ch#1 connected to not able to lock the air Tx
Core-E, symbol rate to the NE clock.
MSS/CORE
Slot#[3-8]/Port#[1-4]/Ch#[0-1] connected to
MPTACC
Slot#[3-8]/Port#[5-8]/Ch#1 connected to
P8ETH
Slot#[3-8]/Port#[5-8]/Ch#[0-1]
Degrade Sync-in/Port#1 Core-E Frequency of the source TAP-109
Radio/Dir#[3-8]/Ch#[0-1] MOD300 signal is degraded. Managed
only if the interface has been
Radio/Dir#1.[1-6]/ MPT ODU configured as a primary or
Slot#1/Port#[1-6]/Ch#1 connected to
secondary synchronization
Core-E source.
MPTACC
P8ETH
Slot#[3-8]/Port#[5-8]/Ch#[0-1]
RadioLAG#[1-14] MPT ODU
connected to
P8ETH,
MPT-HL
DS1-in/Slot#[3-8]/Port#[1-32] P32E1DS1

IXL-101 3EM23956AL

cause equipment
Degrade EleSdh-in/slot#[3-8]/Port[1-2] OC-3 TAP-109
(cont.)
OptSdh-in/slot#[3-8]/Port[1-2]
Degrade RadioLAG#[1-14] ODU Signal on the Radio LAG TAP-117
interface is degraded.
Degrade EthLAG#[1-14] Core-E, A member(s) of an Ethernet TAP-117
MSS/CORE or Radio LAG group has no
RadioLAG#[1-14] MPT ODU, activity. Degrade is declared
MPT-HL, when the number of active
ODU ports in the LAG are greater
than zero and less than the
LAG size.
DemXPIC LOS r01s1b1[1-6]/daughter#04 MPT ODU Bad or missing cable/cable TAP-111
connected to connection at XPIC
Core-E, connector on MPT ODU.
MSS/CORE
r01s1/b[3-8][1-4]/daughter#04 MPT ODU
connected to
MPTACC
r01s[3-8][5-8]b1/daughter#04 MPT ODU
connected to
P8ETH
Demodulator Radio/Dir#1.[1-6]/ MPT ODU Loss of receive signal, bad TAP-104
fail Slot#1/Port#[1-6]/Ch#1 connected to receive signal, or internal
Core-E, receive circuit failure.
MSS/CORE
MPTACC
P8ETH
Slot#[3-8]/Port#[5-8]/Ch#[0-1]

3EM23956AL
IXL-101

cause equipment
Dialog failure r01/subrack#1[1-6] MPT ODU Temporary Loss of TAP-107
connected to communication with
Core-E, MPT ODU/MPT-HL
MSS/CORE
r01/subrack#[3-8][1-4] MPT ODU
connected to
MPTACC
connected to
P8ETH
r01/subrack#[3-8][5-8] MPT-HL
Early warning Radio/Dir#1.[1-6]/ MPT ODU 10E-9 BER detected TAP-104
indication Slot#1/Port#[1-6]/Ch#1 connected to
Core-E,
MSS/CORE
MPTACC
P8ETH
Slot#[3-8]/Port#[5-8]/Ch#[0-1]
Slot#[3-8]/Port#[1-4]/Ch#[0-1]
Radio/Dir#1.[1-6]/
Slot#1/Port#[1-6]/Ch#1
Eth OAM loss of MEP#MDID[1-16]#MA ID Core-E, MEP received no CCM TAP-118
continuity [1-512]#MEPID[1-8191] MSS/CORE frames from a peer MEP
during an interval equal to 3.5
times the CCM transmission
interval configured at the
MEP.
Eth OAM MEP#MDID[1-16]#MA ID Core-E, MEP received a CCM frame TAP-118
MisMerge [1-512]#MEPID[1-8191] MSS/CORE with correct MD Level but
condition incorrect MA ID.
remote defect [1-512]#MEPID[1-8191] MSS/CORE with the RDI field set.
indication

IXL-101 3EM23956AL

cause equipment
unexpected [1-512]#MEPID[1-8191] MSS/CORE with the incorrect MD Level.
level
Eth OAM MEP#MDID[1-16]#MA ID Core-E, Received MEPID value is TAP-118
unexpectedME [1-512]#MEPID[1-8191] MSS/CORE different than the expected
PID MEPID.
Eth OAM MEP#MDID[1-16]#MA ID Core-E, Received MEP Time-Out TAP-118
unexpected [1-512]#MEPID[1-8191] MSS/CORE period value is different than
period the expected MEP Time-Out
period.
Excessive r01/subrack#[3-8][5-8] MPT ODU Excessive temperature on TAP-103
environmental MPT ODU/MPT-HL
temperature Transceiver
r01/subrack#[3-8][5-8] MPT-HL Failure or Missing MPT-HL TAP-103
Transceiver Fan Unit
detected
Firmware r01s1/board#[8] AUX Download Status. A No
Download r01s1/board#[1-2] Core-E download of an FPGA or action
On Going other software unit on the required.
r01s1/board#[3-8] MOD300, addressed card.
MPTACC,
P2E3DS3,
P8ETH,
P32E1DS1,
SDHACC
r01/subrack#[3-8] ODU300
r01/subrack#1[1-6] MPT ODU
connected to
Core-E
connected to
MPTACC
connected to
P8ETH

3EM23956AL
IXL-101

cause equipment
High BER Radio/Dir#1.[1-6]/ MPT ODU Bit Error Rate threshold TAP-104
Slot#1/Port#[1-6]/Ch#1 connected to -4
(10E ) exceeded on receiver
Core-E, input circuits on MOD300/
MSS/CORE MPT ODU/MPT-HL card.
MPTACC
P8ETH
Slot#[3-8]/Port#[5-8]/Ch#[0-1]
High BER EleSdh-in/slot#[3-8]/Port[1-2] OC-3 Bit Error Rate threshold TAP-100
-5
(10E ) exceeded on receiver
OptSdh-in/slot#[3-8]/Port[1-2] input circuits on SDHACC
card from demarcation panel
for the OC-3 facility.
High BER EleSdh-out/slot#[3-8]/ OC-3 Bit Error Rate threshold TAP-100
Port[1-2] -5
(10E ) exceeded on transmit
OptSdh-out/slot#[3-8]/ output circuits on SDHACC
Port[1-2] card to the demarcation
panel for the OC-3 facility.
Housekeeping ExtPt/Input#[1-6] AUX Housekeeping alarm input is TAP-116
alarm ExtPt/Input#[1-3] MSS/AUX active.
Incompatible Radio/Dir#1.[1-6]/ MPT ODU Configured frequency is TAP-104
frequency Slot#1/Port#[1-6]/Ch#1 connected to outside of the supported
Core-E, frequency range.
MSS/CORE
MPTACC
P8ETH
Slot#[3-8]/Port#[5-8]/Ch#[0-1]
Radio/Dir#[3-8]/Ch#[0-1] ODU300

IXL-101 3EM23956AL

cause equipment
Incompatible Radio/Dir#1.[1-6]/ MPT ODU Configured modulation is not TAP-104
modulation Slot#1/Port#[1-6]/Ch#1 connected to supported by MPT ODU,
Core-E, MPT-HL, or ODU300.
MSS/CORE
MPTACC
P8ETH
Slot#[3-8]/Port#[5-8]/Ch#[0-1]
Incompatible Radio/Dir#[3-8].[1-4]/ MPT ODU Incorrectly configured or TAP-104
protection Slot#[3-8]/Port#[1-4]/Ch#[0-1] connected to missing RPS/XPIC module
MPTACC on MPT ODU.
Incompatible Radio/Dir#1.[1-6]/ MPT ODU Configured shifter value not TAP-104
shifter Slot#1/Port#[1-6]/Ch#1 connected to supported by MPT ODU,
Core-E, MPT-HL, or ODU300.
MSS/CORE
MPTACC
P8ETH
Slot#[3-8]/Port#[5-8]/Ch#[0-1]

3EM23956AL
IXL-101

cause equipment
Incompatible Radio/Dir#1.[1-6]/ MPT ODU Configured Tx power value TAP-104
power Slot#1/Port#[1-6]/Ch#1 connected to not supported by
Core-E, MPT ODU/MPT-HL.
MSS/CORE
MPTACC
P8ETH
Radio/Dir#[3-8].[1-4]/Slot#[3- MPT ODU
8]/Port#[1-4]/Ch#[0-1]
Slot#[3-8]/Port#[5-8]/Ch#[0-1]
Incompatible TX Radio/Dir#[3-8]/Ch#[0-1] ODU300 Configured Tx power value TAP-104
power not supported.
Internal r01/subrack#1[1-6] MPT ODU Loss of communications with TAP-107
communication connected to MPT ODU, MPT-HL, or
problem Core-E, ODU300.
MSS/CORE
connected to
MPTACC
connected to
P8ETH

IXL-101 3EM23956AL

cause equipment
Link identifier AirFrame/Dir#1.[1-6]/ MPT ODU Link identifier number TAP-104
mismatch Slot#1/Port#[1-6]/Ch#1 connected to
provisioned on MOD300/
Core-E, MPT ODU/MPT-HL card
MSS/CORE settings screen is different
AirFrame/Dir#[3-8].[1-4]/ MPT ODU from link identifier number
Slot#[3-8]/Port#[1-4]/Ch#[0-1] connected to provisioned at far end of hop.
MPTACC
AirFrame/Dir#[3-8].[5-8]/ MPT ODU
P8ETH
AirFrame/Dir#[3-8].[5-8]/ MPT-HL
Slot#[3-8]/Port#[5-8]/Ch#[0-1]
AirFrame/Dir#[3-8]/Ch#[0-1] MOD300
Loop problem Radio/Dir#1.[1-6]/ MPT ODU Loss of ATPC command path TAP-110
Slot#1/Port#[1-6]/Ch#1 connected to between far end transmitter
Core-E, and local receiver.
MSS/CORE
MPTACC
P8ETH
Slot#[3-8]/Port#[5-8]/Ch#[0-1]
Loss of Hitless/Dir#[3-8].[1-4] MPT ODU Delay/loss of alignment TAP-112
alignment connected to between main and protect
MPTACC RPS RF paths detected.
Hitless/Dir#[3-8].[5-8] MPT-HL
Hitless/Dir#[3-8] MOD300

3EM23956AL
IXL-101

cause equipment
Loss ethernet MAU/Slot#[1-2]/Port#[1-6] Core-E Reported if there is a loss of TAP-109
synchronization Radio/Dir#[3-8]/Ch#[0-1] MOD300 the Ethernet Synchronization
messaging Message Channel. The
channel RadioLAG#[1-14] MPT ODU, alarm is applicable to Core-E
MPT-HL
Ethernet ports and Radio
Radio/Dir#1.[1-6]/ MPT ODU interfaces (MPT ODU,
Slot#1/Port#[1-6]/Ch#1 connected to MPT-HL, or MOD300)
Core-E configured with SSM support
Radio/Dir#[3-8].[1-4]/ MPT ODU enabled and is assigned as a
Slot#[3-8]/Port#[1-4]/Ch#[0-1] connected to synchronous clock source
MPTACC input.
P8ETH
Slot#[3-8]/Port#[5-8]/Ch#[0-1]
Loss Of CircuitTDM/MSS/DS1/ MSS/DS1 Packets are not being TAP-100
CESoETH Port#[1-16] received by the DS1, DS3, or
frame CircuitTDM/Slot#[3-8]/ DS1/ OC-3 emulation circuits on
Port#[1-32] P32E1DS1 the receive circuits from the
switch matrix.
CircuitTDM/Slot#[3-8]/ DS3
Port#[1-2]
CircuitTDM/Slot#[3-8]/ OC-3
Port#[1-2]
Loss Of Frame DS1-in/MSS/DS1/Port#[1-16] DS1/ Loss of DS1, DS3, or OC-3 TAP-100
MSS/DS1 frame detected incoming to
DS1-in/Slot#[3-8]/Port#[1-32] DS1/ the PDH/SDH card from the
P32E1DS1 demarcation panel for the
DS1, DS3, or OC-3 facility.
EleSdh-in/slot#[3-8]/Port[1-2] OC-3
Loss of frame DS1-out/Slot#[3-8]/ DS1/ Loss of DS1, DS3, or OC-3 TAP-100
Port#[1-32] P32E1DS1 frame detected from the
DS3-out/Slot#[3-8]/Port#[1-2] DS3 Core-E switch matrix for the
DS1, DS3, or OC-3 facility
EleSdh-out/slot#[3-8]/ OC-3
Port[1-2]
OptSdh-out/slot#[3-8]/
Port[1-2]

IXL-101 3EM23956AL

cause equipment
Loss of frame Radio/Dir#1.[1-6]/ MPT ODU Far end TX problems, RF TAP-113
Slot#1/Port#[1-6]/Ch#1 connected to path problems, or local circuit
Core-E, failures have caused BER to
MSS/CORE increase to the point that
Radio/Dir#[3-8].[1-4]/ MPT ODU frames are being lost.
MPTACC
P8ETH
Slot#[3-8]/Port#[5-8]/Ch#[0-1]
Loss of Radio/Dir#[3-8]/Ch#1 MOD300 The radio direction is TAP-104
protection affected by a failure that radio
Radio/Dir#[3-8].[1-4]/ MPT ODU protection (RPS) can’t
Slot#[3-8]/Port#[1-4]/Ch#1 connected to recover. Only reported if RPS
MPTACC is provisioned.
Loss of signal DS1-in/MSS/DS1/Port#[1-16] DS1/ No DS1, DS3, or OC-3 input TAP-100
MSS/DS1 signal detected.
DS1-in/Slot#[3-8]/Port#[1-32] DS1/
P32E1DS1
Loss of signal MAU/Slot#[1-2]/Port#[1-6] Core-E Loss of Signal is declared TAP-105
MAU/MSS/CORE/Port#[1-6] MSS/CORE when either:
• no Ethernet input signal
MAU/Slot#[3-8]/Port#[1-4] MPTACC detected on the Ethernet
MAU/Slot#[3-8]/Port#[1-8] P8ETH port
ETHInterface#100 Core-E/TMN • a communication
MGMT Port problem with the remote
peer (i.e. a link down
ETHInterfaceonCore#4 Core-E/TMN
condition)
Port#4
Loss of signal MAU/subrack[#3-8].[1-4] MPT ODU Loss of Signal detected on an TAP-104
daughter#03 connected to MPT ODU/MPT-HL Ethernet
MPTACC Coupler Port. Only reported
MAU/subrack[#3-8].[5-8] MPT-HL when RPS is provisioned.
Port#n

3EM23956AL
IXL-101

cause equipment
Loss of signal Sync-in/Port#1 Core-E Generated when no signal is TAP-109
present on the incoming
Sync-In port.
Loss of signal EthLAG#[1-14] Core-E, ALL members of an Ethernet TAP-117
MSS/CORE or Radio LAG group have no
RadioLAG#[1-14] MPT ODU, activity. Loss of Signal is
MPT-HL, declared when the number of
ODU active ports in the LAG
equals zero.
Power supply r01/subrack#[3-8][1-4] MPTACC MPT Power Supply Failure TAP-102
failure detected, either an Open-
r01/subrack#[1][1-2] MSS/Core Circuit or Over-Current
condition on a MPTACC or
MSS-1 shelf (PFoE) power
supply port.
PPP fail PPP-IP/RF#1[1-6] MPT ODU TMN over PPP Fail TAP-104
connected to
Core-E,
MSS/CORE
PPP-IP/RF#[3-8][1-4] MPT ODU
connected to
MPTACC
PPP-IP/RF#[3-8][5-8] MPT ODU
connected to
P8ETH
PPP-IP/RF#[3-8][5-8] MPT-HL
PPP-IP/RF#[3-8] MOD300
Provisioning r01s1/board#[1-2] Core-E The wrong flash card is TAP-106
mismatch installed and the current
r01s1/board#1 MSS/CORE database is in conflict with
the license string on the card.

IXL-101 3EM23956AL

cause equipment
Replaceable r01s1/board#[8] AUX Card/SFP is missing from TAP-103
unit missing r01s1/board#[1-2] Core-E slot (Only declared, if the
card/SFP has been
r01s1/board#[5,9] FAN provisioned. Card/SFP could
r01s1/board#[3-8] MOD300, be unreachable.).
MPTACC,
P2E3DS3,
P8ETH,
P32E1DS1,
SDHACC
r01s1b[1-2]/daughter#[5-6] SFP on
Core-E
r01s1b1/daughter#[5-6] SFP on
MSS/CORE
MPTACC
P8ETH
SDHACC
r01s[3-8][1-4]b1/daughter#03 RPS SFP on
MPT ODU
connected to
MPTACC
Replaceable r01s1/board#[8] AUX Card failed. TAP-103
unit problem r01s1/board#[1-2] Core-E
r01s1/board#[5,9] FAN
r01s1/board#[3-8] MOD300,
MPTACC,
P2E3DS3,
P8ETH,
P32E1DS1,
SDHACC
connected to
Core-E,
MSS/CORE
connected to
MPTACC

3EM23956AL
IXL-101

cause equipment
Replaceable r01/subrack#[3-8][5-8] MPT ODU Card failed. TAP-103
unit problem connected to
(cont.) P8ETH
connected to
MPTACC
Core-E
MSS/CORE
MPTACC
P8ETH
SDHACC
r01s[3-8][1-4]b1/daughter#04 RPS SFP on
MPT ODU
connected to
MPTACC
r01s1[1-6]b1/daughter#04 XPIC Module
on MPT ODU
connected to
Core-E,
MSS/CORE
r01/subrack#[3-8][5-8]/ XPIC Module
daughter#04 on MPT ODU
connected to
P8ETH
r01s[3-8][1-4]b1/daughter#04 RPS or XPIC
Module on
MPT ODU
connected to
MPTACC

IXL-101 3EM23956AL

cause equipment
Replaceable r01s1/board#[8] AUX Card/ODU in slot does not TAP-103
unit type r01s1/board#[1-2] Core-E match card/ODU configured
mismatch in Core-E memory
r01s1/board#[3-8] MOD300,
MPTACC,
P2E3DS3,
P8ETH,
P32E1DS1,
SDHACC
connected to
Core-E,
MSS/CORE
connected to
MPTACC
connected to
P8ETH
Remote defect Radio/Dir#1.[1-6]/ MPT ODU Remote Defect Indication TAP-104
indication Slot#1/Port#[1-6]/Ch#1 connected to
(RDI) in a received Radio
Core-E, Direction. Alarm is reported
MSS/CORE when an RDI is received
Radio/Dir#[3-8].[1-4]/ MPT ODU on a given radio direction
Slot#[3-8]/Port#[1-4]/Ch#[0-1] connected to from the remote end of radio
MPTACC link.
P8ETH
Slot#[3-8]/Port#[5-8]/Ch#[0-1]

3EM23956AL
IXL-101

cause equipment
Remote defect EleSdh-in/slot#[3-8]/Port[1-2] OC-3 Remote Defect Indication TAP-100
indication (RDI) in a received OC-3
OptSdh-in/slot#[3-8]/Port[1-2] Direction. Alarm is reported
when an RDI is received
on a given OC-3 direction
from the remote end of OC-3
link.
RPS path fail RadioProt/Dir#[3-8][1-4] MPT ODU A communication failure is TAP-114
connected to detected between
MPTACC MPT ODUs. Only reported
for an MPT ODUs working in
1+1 configuration with Virtual
Protection.
RadioProt/Dir#[3-8][5-8] MPT-HL Communication failure is
detected between RPS
coupler port between radio
boards. Only reported if RPS
is provisioned.
Rx fail Radio/Dir#[3-8]/Ch#[0-1] ODU300 Failure in receive direction of TAP-115
ODU300 RF transceiver.
Includes no input signal.
Standby version r01/subrack#1[1-6] MPT ODU Standby software version on TAP-106
mismatch connected to MPT ODU/MPT-HL does not
Core-E, match software version on
MSS/CORE Core-E.
connected to
MPTACC
connected to
P8ETH

IXL-101 3EM23956AL

cause equipment
Synchronization Sync-in/Port#1 Core-E Synchronization Signal Fail TAP-109
signal fail Radio/Dir#[3-8]/Ch#[0-1] MOD300 is reported if the received
source signal is not suitable
Radio/Dir#1.[1-6]/ MPT ODU as a Sync Source. Managed
Slot#1/Port#[1-6]/Ch#1 connected to
only if the interface has been
Core-E, configured as a primary or
MSS/CORE secondary synchronization
Radio/Dir#[3-8].[1-4]/ MPT ODU source.
MPTACC
P8ETH
Slot#[3-8]/Port#[5-8]/Ch#[0-1]
RadioLAG#[1-14] MPT ODU,
MPT-HL
Secondary r01/subrack#1 MSS-1/4/8 B battery feed failed or is TAP-102
battery failure missing.
Threshold Hop/Dir#1[1-6]/Slot#1/ MPT ODUThreshold Crossing Alarm TAP-108
crossed Port#[1-6]/Ch#1-PM15min, connected to
(TCA) indicates alarm
Hop/Dir#1[1-6]/Slot#1/ Core-E,threshold has been
Port#[1-6]/Ch#1-PM1day, MSS/CORE
exceeded. Applies to
performance monitor
Hop/Dir#[3-8][1-4]/Slot#[3-8]/ MPT ODU parameters with an
Port#[1-4]/Ch#[0-1]-PM15min connected to
accumulation period of 24
Hop/Dir#[3-8][1-4]/Slot#[3-8]/ MPTACC hours and 15 minutes.
Port#[1-4]/Ch#[0-1]-PM1day
Link/Dir#[3-8][1-4]/Slot#[3-8]/
Port#[1-4]/Ch#9-PM15min
Link/Dir#[3-8][1-4]/Slot#[3-8]/
Port#[1-4]/Ch#9-PM1day
Hop/Dir#[3-8][5-8]/Slot#[3-8]/ MPT ODU
Port#[5-8]/Ch#1-PM15min connected to
Hop/Dir#[3-8][5-8]/Slot#[3-8]/ P8ETH

3EM23956AL
IXL-101

cause equipment
Threshold Hop/Dir#[3-8][5-8]/Slot#[3-8]/ MPT-HL Threshold Crossing Alarm TAP-108
crossed Port#[5-8]/Ch#[0-1]-PM15min (TCA) indicates alarm
(cont.) Hop/Dir#[3-8][5-8]/Slot#[3-8]/ threshold has been
Port#[5-8]/Ch#[0-1]-PM1day exceeded. Applies to
performance monitor
Link/Dir#[3-8][5-8]/Slot#[3-8]/ parameters with an
Port#[5-8]/Ch#9-PM15min accumulation period of 24
Link/Dir#[3-8][5-8]/Slot#[3-8]/ hours and 15 minutes.
Hop/Dir#[3-8]/Ch#[0-1]- MOD300
PM15min
Hop/Dir#[3-8]/Ch#[0-1]-
PM1day
Link/Dir#[3-8]/Ch#9-PM15min
Link/Dir#[3-8]/Ch#9-PM1day
DS1-in/Slot#[3-8]/Port#[1-32]- P32E1DS1
PM15min
DS1-in/Slot#[3-8]/Port#[1-32]-
PM1day
DS1-out/Slot#[3-8]/
Port#[1-32]-PM15min
DS1-in/Slot#3/Port#[1-16]- MSS/DS1
PM15min
DS1-in/Slot#3/Port#[1-16]-
PM1day
DS1-out/Slot#3/Port#[1-16]-
PM15min
PM1day
Trace identifier EleSdh-in/slot#[3-8]/Port[1-2] OC-3 Trace Identifier Mismatch TAP-100
mismatch OptSdh-in/slot#[3-8]/Port[1-2] condition indicates there is a
J0 Trace Mismatch detected
in the incoming signal from
the demarcation panel.

IXL-101 3EM23956AL

cause equipment
Unavailable Hop/Dir#1[1-6]/Slot#1/ MPT ODU A period of unavailable time TAP-108
time Port#[1-6]/Ch#1-PM15min, connected to begins when 10 consecutive
Hop/Dir#1[1-6]/Slot#1/ Core-E, SES events are detected.
Port#[1-6]/Ch#1-PM1day, MSS/CORE Alarms are associated to the
performance monitoring port.
Port#[1-4]/Ch#[0-1]-PM15min connected to
Hop/Dir#[3-8][1-4]/Slot#[3-8]/ MPTACC
Link/Dir#[3-8][1-4]/Slot#[3-8]/
Link/Dir#[3-8][1-4]/Slot#[3-8]/
Port#[5-8]/Ch#1-PM15min connected to
Hop/Dir#[3-8][5-8]/Slot#[3-8]/ P8ETH
Hop/Dir#[3-8][5-8]/Slot#[3-8]/ MPT-HL
Port#[5-8]/Ch#[0-1]-PM15min
Hop/Dir#[3-8][5-8]/Slot#[3-8]/
Link/Dir#[3-8][5-8]/Slot#[3-8]/
Link/Dir#[3-8][5-8]/Slot#[3-8]/
Hop/Dir#[3-8]/Ch#[0-1]- MOD300
PM15min
Hop/Dir#[3-8]/Ch#[0-1]-
PM1day
PM15min
PM1day
DS1-out/Slot#[3-8]/Port#[1-
32]-PM15min
DS1-out/Slot#[3-8]/Port#[1-
32]-PM1day

3EM23956AL
IXL-101

cause equipment
Unavailable DS1-in/Slot#3/Port#[1-16]- MSS/DS1 A period of unavailable time TAP-108
time PM15min begins when 10 consecutive
(cont.) DS1-in/Slot#3/Port#[1-16]- SES events are detected.
PM1day Alarms are associated to the
performance monitoring port.
PM15min
PM1day
Unconfigured r01s1/board#[8] AUX Card in MSS shelf slot 2 TAP-103
equipment r01s1/board#[2] Core-E through 8 is not provisioned
present (enabled) but is present in
r01s1/board#[5,9] FAN slot.
r01s1/board#[3-8] MOD300, SFP is not provisioned
MPTACC, (enabled) but is present in
P2E3DS3, card.
P8ETH,
P32E1DS1,
SDHACC
Core-E
MSS/CORE
MPTACC
P8ETH
SDHACC
Version r01/subrack#1[1-6] MPT ODU Software version on ODU, TAP-106
mismatch connected to MPT ODU/MPT-HL does not
Core-E match software version on
r01/subrack#[3-8][1-4] MPT ODU Core-E.
connected to
MPTACC
connected to
P8ETH

IXL-101 3EM23956AL

cause equipment
Version r01s1/board#[1-2] Core-E Software version on Core-E TAP-106
mismatch indicates either the wrong
Core-E is installed in the
shelf or the software license
string is not loaded on the
Core-E.
Table 101-D. Abnormal condition

Operation Name Type Description See
(equipment)
Core facing PDH DS1 Port#[1-16] Internal Loopback The associated entity has a TAP-101
loopback MSS/DS1 core facing PDH (DS1 or
DS1 Port#[1-32] Internal Loopback DS3) loopback activated at
SLOT#[3-8] the near end.
DS3 Port#[1-2] Internal
Digital core Direction #1.[1-6] Loopback The associated entity has a TAP-101
facing loopback (MPT ODU loopback activated at the
connected to near end.
Core-E,
MSS/CORE)
Direction #[3-8].[1-4] Loopback
(MPT ODU
connected to
MPTACC)
(MPT ODU
connected to
P8ETH)
(MPT-HL)

3EM23956AL
IXL-101

(equipment)
Forced adaptive Direction #[3-8] Radio Manual Adaptive TAP-101
modulation (MOD300) Modulation command has
Direction #1.[1-6] Radio been executed.
(MPT ODU
connected to
Core-E,
MSS/CORE)
Direction #[3-8].[1-4] Radio
(MPT ODU
connected to
MPTACC)
(MPT ODU
connected to
P8ETH)
Direction #[3-8].[5-8] - Radio
Channel #[0-1] (MPT-HL)
Forced switch Main#1 Slot#1 Equipment A Forced Equipment TAP-101
EPS Protection Protection Switch (EPS) has
(Core-E) been executed for the
Main#1 Slot#[3,5,7] Equipment protection group.
Protection
(MOD300,
P2E3DS3,
P32E1DS1,
SDHACC)
Main#1 Slot #[3-8] Equipment
Port #[1-4] Protection
(MPT ODU
connected to
P8ETH)
Main#1 Slot #[3,5,7] Equipment
(MPT-HL)

IXL-101 3EM23956AL

(equipment)
Forced switch Main#1 Slot#[3,5,7] Rx Radio A Forced Rx Protection TAP-101
RPS Protection Switch (RPS) has been
(MOD300) executed for the protection
Main#1 Slot #[3-8] Rx Radio group.
(MPT ODU
connected to
P8ETH)
Main#1 Slot #[3,5,7] Rx Radio
(MPT-HL)
Forced switch Main#1 Slot#[3,5,7] HSB A Forced Tx Protection TAP-101
TPS Protection Switch (TPS) has been
Main#1 Slot #[3-8] HSB group.
(MPT ODU
connected to
P8ETH)
Main#1 Slot #[3,5,7] HSB
(MPT-HL)
IF cable loopback Direction #[3-8] Loopback The associated entity has a TAP-101
(MOD300) loopback activated at the
near end.
Line facing circuit Direction #1.[1-6] Loopback The associated entity has a TAP-101
loopback (MPT ODU loopback activated at the
connected to near end.
Core-E,
MSS/CORE)
(MPT ODU
connected to
MPTACC)
(MPT ODU
connected to
P8ETH)

3EM23956AL
IXL-101

(equipment)
Line facing PDH DS1 Port#[1-32] External Loopback The associated entity has a TAP-101
loopback SLOT#[3-8] line facing PDH (DS1 or
DS3 Port#[1-2] External DS3) loopback activated at
the near end.
Lockout switch Spare#0 Slot#2 Equipment A Lockout Equipment TAP-101
EPS Protection Protection Switch (EPS) has
(Core-E) been executed for the
Spare#0 Slot#[4,6,8] Equipment protection group.
Protection
(MOD300,
P2E3DS3,
P32E1DS1,
SDHACC)
Spare#0 Slot#[3-8] Equipment
(MPT ODU
connected to
MPTACC)
Spare#0 Slot#[4,6,8] Equipment
(MPT-HL)
Lockout switch Spare#0 Slot#[4,6,8] Rx Radio A Lockout Rx Protection TAP-101
RPS Protection Switch (RPS) has been
Spare#0 Slot#[3-8] Rx Radio group.
(MPT ODU
connected to
MPTACC)
Spare#0 Slot#[4,6,8] Rx Radio
(MPT-HL)

IXL-101 3EM23956AL

(equipment)
Lockout switch Spare#0 Slot#[4,6,8] HSB A Lockout Tx Protection TAP-101
TPS Protection Switch (TPS) has been
Spare#0 Slot#[3-8] HSB group.
(MPT ODU
connected to
MPTACC)
Spare#0 Slot#[4,6,8] HSB
(MPT-HL)
TXMute Direction #1.[1-6] - Radio Manual or automatic mute TAP-101
Channel #1 (MPT ODU command has been
connected to executed.
Core-E,
MSS/CORE)
Channel #[0-1] (MPT ODU
connected to
MPTACC
Channel #1 (MPT ODU
connected to
P8ETH
Direction #[3-8] - Radio
Channel #1 (ODU300)

3EM23956AL
IXL-101
Table 101-E. Core-E Card LED indications

LED Indication Probable cause Corrective action
Status OFF Card Not Provisioned Provision card
Not Powered Verify MSS-4/8 shelf fuse is not blown
or missing.
Verify Power cable(s) are properly
terminated at both ends.
Verify voltage level at the PDU.
Not Equipped Verify the card is properly installed.
Green Configuration Downloading, SW Wait for configuration download or
Blinking Booting, or flash card realignment. software boot to complete.
Green Card Properly Equipped and Normal Operating condition. No
Provisioned. currently In- Action required.
Service/Active.
Yellow Card Properly Equipped and Normal operating condition for
Provisioned as EPS. Currently in Standby card.
Standby. No Action required.
Red Card Fail Replace card
Red Blinking Card Mismatch Check alarms for replaceable unit
type mismatch, see
TAP-103.
Major Red At least one alarm with Critical or Retrieve alarms using the alarm
Alarm Major severity present in the NE. monitor, see IXL-101 Table 101-C,
and troubleshoot accordingly.
Minor Red At least one alarm with Minor severity Retrieve alarms using the alarm
Alarm present in the NE. monitor, see IXL-101 Table 101-C,
Warning Yellow At least one alarm with Warning Retrieve alarms using the alarm
severity present in the NE. monitor, see IXL-101 Table 101-C,
Abnormal Yellow At least one abnormal condition Retrieve abnormal condition using
present in the NE. JSUM, see IXL-101 Table 101-D, and
troubleshoot accordingly.

IXL-101 3EM23956AL
Table 101-F. MSS-1 shelf LED indications

Status OFF MSS-1 shelf not Provisioned Provision MSS-1 shelf.
MSS-1 shelf not Powered Verify MSS-1 shelf fuse is not blown
or missing.
MSS-1 shelf not Equipped Verify the MSS-1 shelf is properly
installed.
Blinking Booting. software boot to complete.
Green MSS-1 shelf Properly Equipped and Normal Operating condition. No
Provisioned. currently In-Service. Action required.
Red MSS-1 shelf Fail Replace MSS-1 shelf
Major Red At least one alarm with Critical or Retrieve alarms using the alarm
Alarm Major severity present in the NE. monitor, see IXL-101 Table 101-C,
Minor Red At least one alarm with Minor severity Retrieve alarms using the alarm
Alarm present in the NE. monitor, see IXL-101 Table 101-C,
Warning Yellow At least one alarm with Warning Retrieve alarms using the alarm
severity present in the NE. monitor, see IXL-101 Table 101-C,
Abnormal Yellow At least one abnormal condition Retrieve abnormal condition using
present in the NE. JSUM, see IXL-101 Table 101-D, and
PFoE Yellow Port is emitting power according to the
configuration.
OFF Port is emitting power according to the
configuration.

3EM23956AL
IXL-101
Table 101-G. Transport Card LED indications

Not Powered Verify MSS-4/8 shelf fuse is not blown
or missing.
Not Equipped Verify the card is properly installed.
Blinking Booting, or flash card realignment. software boot to complete.
Provisioned. currently In- Action required.
Service/Active.
Provisioned as EPS. Currently in Standby card.
Standby. No Action required.
Red Card Fail Replace card
Red Blinking Card Mismatch Check alarms for replaceable unit
type mismatch, see
TAP-103.
Table 101-H. Ethernet LED indications

LED Indication Description Probable cause Corrective action
ETH Link Green LED Loss of Ethernet 1. Cable between link Connect/repair cable.
Not Lit communication partner and Ethernet
with link partner. port is disconnected/
broken.
2. Speed/Mode 1. Check local Ethernet
provisioning mismatch provisioning screen.
between link partner and 2. Check link partner
Ethernet port. provisioning.

IXL-101 3EM23956AL
Table 101-I. MPT-HL transceiver LED alarm indications

Not Powered Verify MPT-HL Transceiver fuse is not
blown or missing.
Verify Power cable is properly
Invalid Configuration Verify configuration provisioning and
correct as required.
Green Configuration Downloading, or SW Wait for configuration download or
Blinking Booting. (Different blink rates should software boot to complete.
be used to identify each step of the
startup process.)
Provisioned. EPS or RPS currently In- Action required.
Service/Active.
Provisioned. EPS and RPS currently Standby MPT-HL Transceiver.
in Standby. No Action required.
Green/Red Card Properly Equipped and
Blinking Provisioned. Either TX or RX
equipment or signal Fault. EPS or
RPS currently In-Service/Active.
Traffic is probable affected.
Equipment problem at either near end 1. Check alarms.
or far end: 2. Check abnormal conditions.
3. Check protection schemes.
Path related problem: 1. Check RSL levels
2. Check equipment alarms.
3. Verify no weather related issue.
PA switch at the far end is set to OFF 1. Verify PA switch position at far end
‘0’ position: and set to ON ‘1’ position.
Yellow/Red Card Properly Equipped and
Blinking Provisioned, TX or RX signal Fault,
EPS and RPS currently in Standby.
Traffic maybe affected:
Equipment problem at either near end 1. Check alarms.
or far end: 2. Check abnormal conditions.
3. Check protection schemes.
Path related problem: 1. Check RSL levels
2. Check equipment alarms.
3. Verify no weather related issue.

3EM23956AL
IXL-101
Table 101-I. MPT-HL transceiver LED alarm indications (cont.)

Status Red Card Fail Replace MPT-HL Transceiver
(cont.) Red Blinking MAP Communication Time-out: Check alarms for Internal
Communication between the MPT-HL Communication
Transceiver and the P8ETH cards is Problem, if present, see
lost. TAP-107.
Power Green LED MPT-HL Transceiver is emitting No Action required
Emission ON power as expected according to the
known configuration.
Green LED MPT-HL Transceiver is not emitting
Blinking power due to a forced squelch
condition.
Most probable causes:
1. TX mute active Release TX mute
2. PA switch is positioned Off Position PA switch to On position
Green LED MPT-HL Transceiver is not emitting
OFF power for reasons other than “forced
squelch”.
1. Transmit Protection Switch (TPS) Verify MPT-HL Transceiver should be
is currently in standby state. in standby state.
2. Software booting or FPGA Wait for software booting or FPGA
download in progress download to complete
Table 101-J. TMN network troubleshooting

Problem Possible Cause Possible Solution
Unusually slow 1. Normal network management 1. There may be too many radios
communication in radio traffic is saturating the being managed within a single
network communications channel. region. Split the radio network
2. Polling radios for PM data or management into different regions
missed alarms too rapidly and backhaul the traffic for each
3. Multiple remote software region through separate channels.
downloads in process 2. Poll the radios more slowly.
4. IP traffic other than network 3. Download to fewer radios at a
management traffic being routed time.
through radio network 4. Configure external routers to allow
only network management related
traffic through the Management
network of the radios. Dynamic
route updates (OSPF, RIP) may
attempt to reroute high speed
traffic through the TMN network if
a high speed ink fails.

IXL-101 3EM23956AL
Table 101-J. TMN network troubleshooting (cont.)

Problem Possible Cause Possible Solution
Unable to operate To perform control operations, the Register the Manager as a craft
controls using SNMP Manager must be registered as a craft device. Manager registration type can
device. be changed as needed to type ‘ct’ to
allow control operation and then be
changed back to ‘nml’ for normal
operation.
Can Read SNMP 1. Incorrect community string 1. Use the correct community string.
objects but cannot Write 2. If the TMN Interface is configured 2. Use the correct write community
to SNMP objects for SNMPv2, the write community string.
string is probably wrong.
No traps being received 1. Manager not registered in NE to 1. Register Manager with NE.
from NE receive traps 2. Check network connectivity.
2. Communication failure in network Check redundant network paths
3. Traps are blocked by firewall and routing. Traceroute (tracert) is
useful for locating path or routing
faults.
3. Check firewall provisioning to
allow trap UDP ports.
Unable to communicate 1. Possible communication path 1. Use traceroute (tracert) to help
with the NE through the failure or routing failure within the locate for communication path or
radio network (unable to radio network. routing problems.
‘ping’ the NE). 2. Incorrect IP address on the PC. 2. Verify PC IP address, subnet, and
default route.
Can ‘ping’ the TMN 1. If using SNMPv2, using the wrong 1. Verify community string,
Interface but cannot community string, username, or username, and passphrase.
communicate with the passphrase. 2. Verify Manager registration with
NE using SNMP, or can 2. Manager not registered or the NE and register or correct
only see a few SNMP properly registered with the NE. registration.
objects in the NE. The objects visible to an
unregistered manager are
generally: the 'system' MIB, a few
objects under
'tsdimSnmpNEMibObject', the
'opticsIMMgrPollingInfoTable', the
'snmpUsmMib', and
'snmpVacmMib' objects.

3EM23956AL
IXL-101

IXL-102 3EM23956AL
IXL-102
Support procedures
Table 102-A lists the support procedures that are needed to perform maintenance and trouble
clearing on the system.
For more information about operation and administration, see the 9500 MPR-A Operation and
Administration Manual (PN 3EM23954AL).
Table 102-A. Support procedures

Support procedure See
Alarm and event reports, Retrieve Operation and Administration
manual
Clean fiber-optic connectors DLP-112
Clock reference and operation mode selections Operation and Administration
manual
Log into system Operation and Administration
manual
Loopback (Core Facing) Operation and Administration
manual
Manage cross-connections Operation and Administration
manual
MIB Database Management (Backup and Restore) Operation and Administration
manual
Password change Operation and Administration
manual
Performance monitoring Operation and Administration
manual
Protection switching controls Operation and Administration
manual
Provision equipment Operation and Administration
manual
Provision or edit ports Operation and Administration
manual
Preventive maintenance procedures RTL-100
Protection upgrade and downgrade procedures DLP-117
Software package rollback DLP-127
System power down and power up DLP-113
Upgrade and downgrade radio profile DLP-118
Upgrade unlicensed MPT-HL radio to lower 6 GHz radio DLP-119
Support procedures 2-41

3EM23956AL
IXL-102
Table 102-A. Support procedures (cont.)

Upgrade MPT ODU to MPT ODU L1 LAG port DLP-123
Upgrade MPT-HL to MPT-HL L1 LAG port DLP-124
2-42 Support procedures

IXL-103 3EM23956AL
IXL-103
Equipment replacement procedures
Table 103-A lists where to find the detailed level procedure (DLP) for replacing or adding each
9500 MPR-A replaceable unit.
Table 103-A. Equipment replacement procedures

Equipment See
+24/-48 volt converter replacement DLP-120
Auxiliary (AUX) replacement DLP-116
Core switching module (Core-E) replacement DLP-103
Core switching module (Core-E) flash card replacement DLP-104
Ethernet access switch (P8ETH) replacement DLP-105
Mechanical card removal and installation DLP-100
MSS-1 shelf replacement DLP-128
MSS-4/8 shelf FAN replacement DLP-106
MPT-HL transceiver air filter replacement DLP-101
MPT-HL transceiver replacement DLP-108
ODU300 replacement DLP-109
MOD300 (radio modem) replacement DLP-107
MPTACC (MPT Access) replacement DLP-114
MPT ODU replacement (MPT-HC, MPT-XP, 9558HC) DLP-115
MPT Power Unit replacement DLP-125
P2E3DS3 (2-Port DS3) replacement DLP-110
P32E1DS1 (32-Port DS1) replacement DLP-111
Power injector replacement DLP-121
RPS/XPIC module replacement DLP-122
SDHACC (2-Port OC-3) Replacement DLP-126
SFP replacement DLP-102
Equipment replacement procedures 2-43

3EM23956AL
IXL-103
2-44 Equipment replacement procedures

IXL-104 3EM23956AL
IXL-104
Supporting information
Table 104-A lists the supporting information that is required to perform maintenance and trouble
clearing on the system. The following references are used:
• For information about operation and administration, see the 9500 MPR-A
Operation and Administration Manual (PN 3EM23954AL).
• See the 9500 MPR-A Product Information (PN 3EM23952AL) to determine card
location and type.
Table 104-A. Supporting information

Supporting information See
Alarm condition types Operation and Administration manual
Card locations Product Information Manual
Product support information Introduction
Electrostatic-sensitive devices Introduction
How to use TOP documentation Introduction
Laser precautions Introduction
Maintenance philosophy Introduction
Operations support system Operation and Administration manual
Safety awareness Introduction
Security/user authorization Operation and Administration manual
Supporting information 2-45

3EM23956AL
IXL-104
2-46 Supporting information

RTL-100 3EM23956AL
RTL-100
Routine Task Lists (RTLs)
Preventive maintenance procedures

There are no preventive maintenance procedures associated with 9500 MPR-A, R4.1.0.
Table 100-A lists the preventive maintenance procedure and the corresponding reference. The
frequency that is listed is recommended. Local conditions may require maintenance procedures be
performed more or less frequently.
Table 100-A. Preventive maintenance procedures

Activity Frequency See
MPT-HL transceiver air filter replacement Every 6 months DLP-101
Preventive maintenance procedures 3-1

3EM23956AL
RTL-100
3-2 Preventive maintenance procedures

TAP-100 3EM23956AL
TAP-100
Trouble Analysis Procedures (TAPs)
Facility alarms
Purpose
This procedure describes how to identify and clear Facility alarms.
General
An AIS (on DS1/3-in) is an alarm indication signal on one or more DS1 or DS3 input signals incoming
to the NE on the P32E1DS1, P2E3DS3 cards, or MSS-1 shelf. The problem is associated with the DS1
or DS3 input signal to the P32E1DS1, P2E3DS3 cards, or MSS-1 shelf.
An AIS (on DS1/3-out) is alarm indication signal (AIS) detected by the receive circuit from the radio
link on one or more of the DS1 or DS3 lines, indicating an upstream failure.
An AIS (on Ele/OptSDH-in) is an alarm indication signal on one or more OC-3 input signals incoming
to the NE on the SDHACC card. The problem is associated with the OC-3 input signal to the
SDHACC card.
An AIS (on Ele/OptSDH-out) is alarm indication signal (AIS) detected by the receive circuit from the
radio link on one or more of the OC-3 lines, indicating an upstream failure.
A High BER (on Ele/OptSDH-in) alarm indicates that Bit Error Rate threshold of 10E-5 has been
exceeded on receiver input circuits from the client to the SDHACC card.
A High BER (on Ele/OptSDH-out) alarm indicates that Bit Error Rate threshold of 10E-5 has been
exceeded on transmit output circuits to the client from the SDHACC card.
A Loss Of CESoETH Frame (CircuitTDM) indicates packets are not being received by the emulation
circuits from the switch matrix.
A Loss Of Frame (DS1/3-in) indicates no DS1 or DS3 frame is detected on the input from the client
to the P32E1DS1, P2E3DS3 cards, or MSS-1 shelf.
A Loss Of Frame (DS1/3-out) indicates no DS1, DS3 frame is detected on a DS1 or DS3 facility from
the switch matrix.
A Loss Of Signal (DS1/3-in) indicates no DS1 or DS3 signal detected on the input on the P32E1DS1,
P2E3DS3 cards, or MSS-1 shelf.
A Remote Defect Indication in a received OC-3 facility. Alarm is reported when an RDI is received
on a given OC-3 from the remote end of OC-3 facility.
A Trace Identifier Mismatch indicates a J0 byte value received on the OC-3 facility is different than
the provisioned expected value for the OC-3 facility.
See the 9500 MPR-A Product Information (PN 3EM23952AL) to determine card location and
address.
Facility alarms 4-1

3EM23956AL
TAP-100
See the 9500 MPR-A Operation and Administration (PN 3EM23954AL) for information about how
to execute the commands that are described in this procedure.
STEP PROCEDURE
1 Using the Alarm Monitor, retrieve all alarms.
2 Review the output. See Table 100-A for information about facility alarms.
Table 100-A. Facility alarms

Probable cause Friendly name/entity Facility type See
AIS DS1-in/MSS/DS1/Port#[1-16] DS1 (MSS/DS1) Step 3
DS1-in/Slot#[3-8]/Port#[1-32] DS1 (P32E1DS1)
AIS DS1-out/MSS/DS1/Port#[1-16] DS1 (MSS/DS1) Step 7
DS1-out/Slot#[3-8]/Port#[1-32] DS1 (P32E1DS1)
AIS EleSdh-in/slot#[3-8]/Port[1-2] OC-3 Step 10
AIS EleSdh-out/slot#[3-8]/Port[1-2] OC-3 Step 14
OptSdh-out/slot#[3-8]/Port[1-2]
High BER EleSdh-in/slot#[3-8]/Port[1-2] OC-3 Step 17
High BER EleSdh-out/slot#[3-8]/ OC-3 Step 21
Port[1-2]
OptSdh-out/slot#[3-8]/
Port[1-2]
Loss Of CESoETH frame CircuitTDM/MSS/DS1/Port#[1-16] DS1 (MSS/DS1) Step 24
CircuitTDM/Slot#[3-8]/Port#[1-32] DS1 (P32E1DS1)
CircuitTDM/Slot#[3-8]/Port#[1-2] DS3
CircuitTDM/Slot#[3-8]/Port#[1-2] OC-3
Loss Of Frame DS1-in/MSS/DS1/Port#[1-16] DS1 (MSS/DS1) Step 77
Loss of frame DS1-out/MSS/DS1/Port#[1-16] DS1 (MSS/DS1) Step 108
DS1-out/Slot#[3-8]/Port#[1-32] DS1 (P32E1DS1)
Loss of frame EleSdh-in/slot#[3-8]/Port[1-2] OC-3 Step 77
4-2 Facility alarms

TAP-100 3EM23956AL
Table 100-A. Facility alarms (cont.)

Loss of frame EleSdh-out/slot#[3-8]/Port[1-2] OC-3OC-3 Step 108
OptSdh-out/slot#[3-8]/Port[1-2]
Loss of signal DS1-in/MSS/DS1/Port#[1-16] DS1 (MSS/DS1) Step 155
Loss of signal EleSdh-in/slot#[3-8]/Port[1-2] OC-3 Step 155
Remote defect indication EleSdh-in/slot#[3-8]/Port[1-2] OC-3 Step 178
Trace identifier mismatch EleSdh-in/slot#[3-8]/Port[1-2] OC-3 Step 182
None of the above — — IXL-101
AIS
On DS1/3-in on DS1 or DS3 facility
3 Troubleshoot the source of input that is associated with the DS1 or DS3 input signal
to the P32E1DS1, P2E3DS3 cards, or MSS-1 shelf.
4 Verify the cabling that is associated with the input DS1 or DS3 signal to the
P32E1DS1, P2E3DS3 cards, or MSS-1 shelf.
5 Retrieve the alarms using the Alarm Monitor.
6 Did AIS (on DS1/3-in) alarm clear?
If yes, go to step 190.

If no, go to step 189.
AIS
On DS1/3-out on DS1 or DS3 facility
7 Troubleshoot the upstream source of the incoming DS1 or DS3.
9 Did the AIS (on DS1/3-out) alarm clear?

Facility alarms 4-3

3EM23956AL
TAP-100
AIS
On EleSdh/EleSDH-in on OC-3 facility
10 Troubleshoot the source of input that is associated with the OC-3 input signal to the
SDHACC card.
11 Verify the cabling that is associated with the input OC-3 signal to the SDHACC card.
13 Did AIS (on EleSdh/OptSdh-in) alarm clear?

AIS
On EleSdh/EleSDH-out on OC-3 facility
14 Troubleshoot the upstream source of the incoming OC-3.
16 Did the AIS (on EleSdh/OptSdh-out) alarm clear?

High BER
On EleSdh/EleSDH-in on OC-3 facility
17 Troubleshoot the source of input that is associated with the OC-3 input signal to the
SDHACC card from the demarcation panel.
18 Verify the cabling that is associated with the input OC-3 signal to the SDHACC card.
20 Did High BER (on EleSdh/OptSdh-in) alarm clear?

4-4 Facility alarms

TAP-100 3EM23956AL
High BER
On EleSdh/EleSDH-out on OC-3 facility
21 Troubleshoot the upstream source of the incoming OC-3.
23 Did the High BER (on EleSdh/OptSdh-out) alarm clear?

Loss Of CESoETH frame
on DS1, DS3, or OC-3 facility
24 Verify that there are no current path or circuit alarms associated with the facility in
alarm for the near end, the far end, and all intermediate NEs.
25 Verify that the radio path PM is not taking errors to traffic.
26 Are there path or circuit alarms, or path PM errors at near end or far end NE?
If yes, clear the path or circuit alarms, or path PM errors, then go to

step 27.
28 Did the Loss Of CESoETH Frame alarm clear?

29 Verify the circuit provisioning for near end, the far end, and all intermediate NEs:
a. Verify the Signal Mode is set the same and is correct.
b. Verify the Line Coding is set the same and is correct.
c. Verify the Flow ID is set the same and is correct.
d. Verify the Service Profile is set the same and is correct.
30 Is the Service Profile TDM2ETH?

Facility alarms 4-5

3EM23956AL
TAP-100
31 Verify the TDM2ETH provisioning for the near end, far end, and all intermediate NEs:
a. Verify the Payload Size is set the same and is correct.
b. Verify the TDM Clock Source is set the same and is correct.
c. Verify the near end ECID Tx and far end ECID Rx are set the same and are
correct.
d. Verify the far end ECID Tx and near end ECID Rx are set the same and are
correct.
32 Verify the cross-connection provisioning for the near end, far end, and all intermediate
NEs:

35 Is the facility associated with a LAG?

36 Verify that there are no active LAG alarms at all NEs in the LAG associated with the
facility in alarm.

39 Is the facility associated with an ERP (Ring)?

40 Verify that there are no active RING alarms at all NEs in the ring associated with the
facility in alarm.
4-6 Facility alarms

TAP-100 3EM23956AL

43 CAUTION: Possibility of service interruption. The following steps cause a loss of

traffic on ALL facilities supported by the card or MSS-1 shelf, associated with the
facility in alarm. Schedule appropriate maintenance window per local practices and
procedures.
Is it appropriate to proceed with Loss Of CESoETH Frame procedure?

44 Is the facility protected?

45 CAUTION: Possibility of service interruption. Reseating card in an unprotected

facility cause a loss of traffic on ALL facilities that are associated with the card
being reseated. Schedule appropriate maintenance window per local practices and
procedures.
46 For the P32E1DS1 or P2E3DS3 cards, reseat the card at near end. Physically remove
the card and reinsert.
For the MSS-1 shelf, locate the fuses protecting the A and B battery feeds to the near
end MSS-1 shelf and remove. Wait ten seconds. Then install the fuses protecting the
A and B battery feeds.

49 CAUTION: Possibility of service interruption. Replacing card in an unprotected

being replaced. Schedule appropriate maintenance window per local practices and
procedures.
Which card reported the Loss Of CESoETH Frame alarm?
If MSS-1 shelf, see DLP-128 to replace near end MSS-1 shelf.

If P32E1DS1, see DLP-111 to replace near end P32E1DS1 card.
Facility alarms 4-7

3EM23956AL
TAP-100

If SDHACC, see DLP-126 to replace near end SDHACC card.


procedures.
53 For the P32E1DS1 or P2E3DS3 cards, reseat the card at far end. Physically remove
For the MSS-1 shelf, locate the fuses protecting the A and B battery feeds to the far


procedures.
Which card reported the Loss Of CESoETH Frame alarm?
If MSS-1 shelf, see DLP-128 to replace far end MSS-1 shelf.

If P32E1DS1, see DLP-111 to replace far end P32E1DS1 card.
If SDHACC, see DLP-126 to replace far end SDHACC card.

4-8 Facility alarms

TAP-100 3EM23956AL
59 CAUTION: Possibility of service interruption. Forced/Lockout switching traffic

causes a disruption to traffic.
60 Is the DS1/DS3/OC-3 facility in alarm associated with the main or spare?
If main, perform Forced EPS Switch at near end using Craft Terminal.
If spare, perform Lockout EPS Switch at near end using Craft Terminal.
61 Reseat the card in alarm at the near end. Physically remove the card and reinsert.

64 Which card reported the Loss Of CESoETH Frame?

66 Did the Loss Of CESoETH Frame condition clear?


Is the card in alarm the main or spare?
If main, perform Forced EPS Switch at far end using Craft Terminal.
If spare, perform Lockout EPS Switch at far end using Craft Terminal.
68 Reseat the card in alarm at the far end. Physically remove the card and reinsert.

Facility alarms 4-9

3EM23956AL
TAP-100
71 Which card reported the Loss Of CESoETH Frame?

73 Did the Loss Of CESoETH Frame condition clear?

74 CAUTION: Possibility of service interruption. Releasing Forced/Lockout switch may

cause a disruption to traffic.
Release Forced/Lockout EPS Switch at far end using Craft Terminal.

Release Forced/Lockout EPS Switch at near end using Craft Terminal.
76 Go to step 190.
Loss Of Frame
On DS1/3-in on DS1 or DS3 or Ele/OptSdh-in on OC-3 facility
77 Verify that there are no active circuit alarms associated with the facility in alarm at
the near end and client end NE of the facility.
78 Are there active circuit alarms at the near end or client end of the facility?
If yes, clear circuit alarms, then go to step 79.

80 Did the Loss Of Frame alarm the clear?

4-10 Facility alarms

TAP-100 3EM23956AL
81 Verify the circuit provisioning for both the near end and client end of the facility in
alarm:
a. Verify that the Signal Mode is set the same and is correct.
b. Verify that the Line Coding is set the same and is correct.
c. Verify that the Flow ID is set the same and is correct.
d. Verify that the Service Profile is set the same and is correct.
e. Verify that the LBO setting is correct for the installation.
83 Did the Loss Of Frame alarm clear?

84 Verify that the Source Signal is error-free with a test set configured to match the
provisioning of the facility.

87 Verify the cabling:
a. Verify that the cabling from the customer interconnect to the patch panel or card
as appropriate. Confirm that the connectors are correctly seated and secured.
b. Verify that the cabling from the patch panel to the module if appropriate. Confirm
that the connectors are correctly seated and secured.

Facility alarms 4-11

3EM23956AL
TAP-100

traffic on ALL facilities that are supported by the card or MSS-1 shelf, associated
with the facility in alarm. Schedule appropriate maintenance window per local
practices and procedures.
Is it appropriate to proceed with Loss Of Frame procedure?



facility causes a loss of traffic on ALL facilities that are associated with the card
procedures.
93 For the P32E1DS1 or P2E3DS3 cards, reseat the card at near end. Physically remove

96 CAUTION: Possibility of service interruption. Replacing card or MSS-1 shelf in an

unprotected facility causes a loss of traffic on ALL facilities that are associated with
the card or MSS-1 shelf being replaced. Schedule appropriate maintenance window
per local practices and procedures.
Which card reported the Loss Of Frame alarm?


TAP-100 3EM23956AL


Is the DS1/DS3/OC-3 facility in alarm associated with the main or spare?
100 Reseat the card in alarm at near end. Physically remove card and reinsert.

103 Which card reported the Loss Of Frame?

105 Did the Loss Of Frame condition clear?


107 Go to step 190.
Loss of frame
On DS1/3-out on DS1 or DS3 or Ele/OptSdh-out on OC-3 facility
108 Check the far end facility for Loss of Frame (DS1/3-in, Ele/OptSdh-in) that is
associated with the facility in alarm.

3EM23956AL
TAP-100

111 Verify that there are no active path or circuit alarms associated with the facility in
alarm for the near end or far end NE.
112 Verify that the radio path PM is not taking errors to traffic.
113 Are the path or circuit alarms, or path PM errors existing at the near end or far end
NE?
If yes, clear path or circuit alarms or path PM errors, then go to

step 114.

116 Check the circuit provisioning for the near end and far end facility in alarm and that
they are correct, as required:
a. Verify that the Signal Mode is set the same and is correct.
b. Verify that the Line Coding is set the same and is correct.
c. Verify that the Flow ID is set the same and is correct.
d. Verify that the Service Profile is set the same and is correct.
117 Is the Service Profile TDM2ETH?


TAP-100 3EM23956AL
118 Check the TDM2ETH provisioning for the near end and far end facility in alarm and
that it is correct, as required:
a. Verify that the Payload Size is set the same and is correct.
b. Verify that the TDM Clock Source is set the same and is correct.
c. Verify that the near end ECID Tx and far end ECID Rx are set the same and are
correct.
d. Verify that the far end ECID Tx and near end ECID Rx are set the same and are
correct.

121 Check the cross-connection provisioning at near end, far end, and all intermediated
NEs that are associated with the facility in alarm are correct, as required:
a. Verify that the Flow ID is set the same and is correct.
b. Verify that the MAC address is set the same and is correct.
c. Verify that the TDM profile is set correct
d. Verify that the TDM Clock Source is set correct.

traffic on ALL facilities supported by the card or MSS-1 shelf, associated with the
facility in alarm. Schedule appropriate maintenance window per local practices and
procedures.
Is it appropriate to proceed with Loss Of Frame procedure?


3EM23956AL
TAP-100


facility cause a loss of traffic on ALL facilities that are associated with the card or
MSS-1 shelf being reseated. Schedule appropriate maintenance window per local
For the P32E1DS1 or P2E3DS3 cards, reseat the card at near end. Physically remove


procedures.
Which card reported the Loss Of Frame alarm?



TAP-100 3EM23956AL

procedures.
For the P32E1DS1 or P2E3DS3 cards, reseat the card at far end. Physically remove
For the MSS-1 shelf, locate the fuses protecting the A and B battery feeds to the far


procedures.
Which card reporting Loss Of Frame alarm?
If MSS-1 shelf, see DLP-128 to replace far end MSS-1 shelf.



Is DS1/DS3/OC-3 facility in alarm associated with main or spare?
139 Reseat card in alarm at near end. Physically remove card and reinsert.

3EM23956AL
TAP-100

142 Which card reporting Loss Of Frame?



Is card in alarm main or spare?
If main, perform Forced EPS Switch at far end using Craft Terminal.
If spare, perform Lockout EPS Switch at far end using Craft Terminal.
146 Reseat the card in alarm at the far end. Physically remove the card and reinsert.

149 Which card reporting Loss Of Frame?



TAP-100 3EM23956AL

Release Forced/Lockout EPS Switch at far end using Craft Terminal.

154 Go to step 190.
Loss of signal
DS1/3-in on DS1, DS3, or OC-3 facility
155 Troubleshoot source of input to MSS-1 shelf, P32E1DS1, P2E3DS3, or SDHACC card.
156 Verify cabling associated with the input signal to the MSS-1 shelf, P32E1DS1,
P2E3DS3, or SDHACC card.
157 Retrieve alarms using craft terminal.
158 Did the Loss Of Signal alarm clear?

159 Retrieve alarms using craft terminal. Determine if Loss Of Signal alarm is declared
against ALL facilities associated with the MSS-1 shelf, P32E1DS1, P2E3DS3, or
SDHACC card.
160 Are ALL facilities associated with the MSS-1 shelf, P32E1DS1, P2E3DS3, or SDHACC
card declaring Loss Of Signal?



3EM23956AL
TAP-100

procedures.
Reseat the card that declares the Loss Of Signal alarm. Physically remove the card
and reinsert.
164 Did declaring Loss Of Signal alarm clear?


procedures.
Which card reported the Loss Of Signal alarm?


168 CAUTION: Possibility of service interruption. Forced EPS switching traffic causes a
disruption to traffic.
Is the card in alarm the main or spare?
169 Verify that the card in alarm status is Standby.
170 Reseat the card that declared the Loss Of Signal alarm. Physically remove the card
and reinsert.

TAP-100 3EM23956AL
172 Did the declaring Loss Of Signal alarm clear?

173 Which card reported the Loss Of Signal alarm?


176 CAUTION: Possibility of service interruption. Releasing EPS switch may cause a
177 Go to step 190.
Remote defect indication
178 Retrieve the alarms for the far end of the OC-3 facility using the Alarm Monitor.
179 Determine all of the facility alarms that are declared against the far end OC-3 facility
associated with the OC-3 facility declaring the Remote Defect Indication (RDI) and
181 Did the RDI alarm clear?


3EM23956AL
TAP-100
Trace identifier mismatch
182 Using the Craft Terminal, retrieve the provisioned Trace Identifier values for the
alarmed OC-3 facility.
Note: The section trace identifier (J0) value is not generated within the 9500 MPR-A
network. The received J0 value is verified against the provisioned expected value. To
determine the provisioned J0 value the operator must query the originating OC-3
equipment.
183 Determine the origination of the OC-3 facility and retrieve the provisioned Trace
Identifier parameters.
184 Verify the desired Trace Identifier parameters of the OC-3 facility.
185 Determine which Trace Identifier parameters are incorrect.
186 Provision the Trace Identifier parameters according to the results of step 185.
188 Did the Trace Identifier Mismatch alarm clear?

189 Contact the next level of technical support for assistance.
190 STOP. This procedure is complete.

TAP-101 3EM23956AL
TAP-101
Abnormal conditions
Purpose
This procedure describes how to identify and clear a protection switch (Forced and Lockout),
loopback, Forced Adaptive Modulation, and TxMute abnormal conditions on Core-E, MOD300,
MPT-HC/MPT-XP/9558HC (MPT ODU), MPT-HL ODU300, P2E3DS3, P32E1DS1, SDHACC cards
or MSS-1 shelf.
General
A Core Facing PDH Loopback indicates that PDH (DS1 or DS3) entity has a loopback activated at
the near end.
A Digital Core Facing Loopback indicates that the entity has a loopback activated at the near end.
A Forced Adaptive Modulation indicates that a manual Forced Adaptive Modulation command has
been issued.
A Forced Switch EPS/RPS/TPS indicates that a forced switch has been executed for the protection
group.
An IF Cable Loopback indicates that the MOD300/ODU300 has a loopback activated at the near end.
A Line Facing Circuit Loopback indicates that the entity has a loopback activated at the near end.
A Line Facing PDH Loopback indicates that PDH (DS1 or DS3) entity has a line facing loopback
activated at the near end.
A Lockout Switch EPS/RPS/TPS indicates that a lockout switch has been executed for the protection
group.
TxMute indicates that a manual or automatic mute command has been executed.
address.
STEP PROCEDURE
1 Using the Craft Terminal, retrieve abnormal conditions.
2 Review the output. See Table 101-A for information about abnormal conditions.
Abnormal conditions 4-23

3EM23956AL
TAP-101
Table 101-A. Abnormal conditions

Operation Name Type (equipment) See
Core facing PDH DS1 Port#[1-16] Internal Loopback Step 3
loopback DS1 Port#[1-32] Internal SLOT#[3-8]
DS3 Port#[1-2] Internal
Digital core facing Direction #1.[1-6] Loopback Step 7
loopback (MPT ODU connected to
Core-E, MSS/CORE)
(MPT ODU connected to
MPTACC)
P8ETH)
(MPT-HL)
Forced adaptive Direction #[3-8] Radio Step 11
modulation (MOD300)
Direction #1.[1-6] Radio
Core-E, MSS/CORE)
MPTACC)
P8ETH)
Forced switch EPS Main#1 Slot#1 (Core-E) Step 15
Main#1 Slot#[3,5,7] (MOD300, P2E3DS3,
P32E1DS1, SDHAC)
Main#1 Slot #[3-8] Port #[1-4] MPT ODU connected to
MPTACC
Main#1 Slot #[3,5,7] Port #[5-8] MPT-HL
Forced switch RPS Main#1 Slot #[3-8] Port #[1-4] MPT ODU connected to Step 15
MPTACC
Main#1 Slot#[3,5,7] MOD300
4-24 Abnormal conditions

TAP-101 3EM23956AL

Forced switch TPS Main#1 Slot #[3-8] Port #[1-4] MPT ODU connected to Step 15
MPTACC
Main#1 Slot#[3,5,7] MOD300
IF cable loopback Direction #[3-8] MOD300 Step 20
Line facing circuit Direction #1.[1-6] Loopback Step 24
loopback (MPT ODU connected to
Core-E, MSS/CORE)
MPTACC)
P8ETH)
Line facing PDH DS1 Port#[1-16] External Loopback Step 28
loopback MSS/DS1]
DS1 Port#[1-32] External Loopback
DS3 Port#[1-2] External SLOT#[3-8]
Lockout switch EPS Spare#0 Slot#2 Core-E Step 32

Spare#0 Slot#[4,6,8] MOD30, P2E3DS3,
P32E1DS1, SDHACC
Spare#0 Slot#[3-8] Port #[1-4] MPT ODU connected to
MPTACC
Spare#0 Slot #[4,6,8] Port #[5-8] MPT-HL
Lockout switch RPS Spare#0 Slot#[3-8] Port #[1-4] MPT ODU connected to Step 32
MPTACC
Spare#0 Slot#[4,6,8] MOD300
Lockout switch TPS Spare#0 Slot #[3-8] Port #[1-4] MPT ODU connected to Step 32
MPTACC
Spare#0 Slot#[4,6,8] MOD300

3EM23956AL
TAP-101

TXMute Direction #1.[1-6] MPT ODU connected to Step 36
Core-E, MSS/CORE
Direction #[3-8].[1-4] - Channel #[0-1] MPT ODU connected to
MPTACC
Direction #[3-8].[5-8] - Channel #[0-1] MPT ODU connected to
P8ETH
Direction #[3-8].[5-8] - Channel #[0-1] MPT-HL
Direction #[3-8] - Channel #[0-1] ODU300
Core facing PDH loopback
3 Ready to release the Core Facing PDH Loopback?
4 Using the Craft Terminal, release the loopback.
5 Retrieve the Abnormal Condition List using the Craft Terminal.
6 Did the Core Facing PDH Loopback condition clear?

Digital core facing loopback
7 Ready to release the Digital Core Facing Loopback?
10 Did the Digital Core Facing Loopback condition clear?


TAP-101 3EM23956AL
Forced adaptive modulation
11 Ready for the Forced Adaptive Modulation to be released?

12 Using the Craft Terminal, release the Forced Adaptive Modulation.
14 Did the Forced Adaptive Modulation condition clear?

Forced switch
EPS, RPS, and TPS
15 Ready to release the Forced Switch EPS/RPS/TPS?

16 CAUTION: Possibility of service interruption. Releasing a Forced Switch causes a

17 Using the Craft Terminal, release Forced Switch EPS/RPS/TPS.
19 Did the Forced Switch EPS/RPS/TPS condition clear?

IF cable loopback
20 Ready to release the IF Cable Loopback?

3EM23956AL
TAP-101
23 Did the IF Cable Loopback condition clear?

Line facing circuit loopback
24 Ready to release the loopback?

27 Did the Line Facing Circuit Loopback condition clear?

Line facing PDH loopback
28 Ready to release the Line Facing PDH Loopback?
31 Did the Line Facing PDH Loopback condition clear?

Lockout switch
EPS, RPS, and TPS
32 Ready to release the Lockout Switch EPS/RPS/TPS?

33 Using the Craft Terminal, release the lockout switch.

TAP-101 3EM23956AL
35 Did the Lockout Switch EPS/RPS/TPS condition clear?

TXMute
36 Ready for the TxMute to be released?

37 Using the Craft Terminal, release the TxMute.
39 Did the TxMute condition clear?


3EM23956AL
TAP-101

TAP-102 3EM23956AL
TAP-102
Power alarms
Purpose
This procedure describes how to identify and clear power alarms that are associated with the
MSS-1/MSS-4/MSS-8 shelf, MPTACC card, and MSS-1 Core.
General
A Battery Failure alarm indicates that the A battery feed has failed or is missing, when battery
protection is available.
A Power Supply Failure alarm indicates one or more of the following:
• hardware failure:
– on the MPTACC card supplying power to an MPT-HC/9558HC (MPT-ODU)
– on the MSS-1 Core Ethernet ports 1 and 2, supplying power to an MPT-ODU
• bad cable, or an improperly terminated cable between:
– the MPTACC and MPT-ODU
– the MSS-1 Core and MPT-ODU
A Secondary Battery Failure alarm indicates that either the B battery feed has failed or is missing,
when battery protection is available.
The supported voltage range of the MSS-4/MSS-8 shelf is -40.8 VDC to -57.6 VDC.
The MPTACC card provides power to the MPT ODU using the PFoE supported RJ45 or QMA coaxial
connectors.
The MSS-1 Core provides power to the MPT ODU using the two PFoE supported RJ45 connectors.
address.
See the 9500 MPR-A Operation and Administration (PN 3EM23954AL) for the procedures about
how to execute the commands that are described in this procedure.
STEP PROCEDURE
2 Review the output. See Table 102-A for information about the power alarms.
Power alarms 4-31

3EM23956AL
TAP-102
Table 102-A. Power Alarms

Probable cause Friendly name/entity Equipment type See
Battery failure r01/subrack#1 MSS-1/4/8 Step 3
Power supply failure r01/subrack#[3-8][1-4] MPTACC Step 14
r01/subrack#[1][1-2] MSS/Core
Secondary battery failure r01/subrack#1 MSS-1/4/8 Step 72
Battery failure
3 Verify that there is no blown fuse providing power to the A-power feed.
4 Verify the shelf power cable connections between the MSS-1/4/8 and the PDU.
5 Verify the A-power connections between the BDFB and PDU.
6 Verify the A-power BDFB breakers are in the ON position.
8 Did the Battery Failure clear?

9 Measure the voltage of the A-power feed.
10 Is the measured voltage within the supported voltage range (MSS-4/8: -40.8 VDC to -
57.6 VDC, MSS-1: -24.0 VDC to -48.0 VDC)?

11 Troubleshoot the A-power feed voltage problem.
13 Did Battery Failure condition clear?

4-32 Power alarms

TAP-102 3EM23956AL
Power supply failure
14 Inspect the power supply cable connection for radio port in alarm:
For MPTACC, verify RJ45 connector for PFoE port or Coax connector for QMA port.
For MSS-1 CORE, verify RJ45 connector for PFoE port.
15 Is the power supply cable damaged or improperly connected?

16 Terminate, repair, or replace power supply cable as required.
18 Did the Power Supply Failure alarm clear?

19 Which card is Power Supply Failure alarm declared?
If MPTACC, go to step 20.

If MSS-1 CORE, go to step 44.
20 Determine the MPTACC configuration.
a. Does the MPTACC support one or two radio channels?
b. Are the radio channels protected?
c. Is protection available for both radio channels?
21 Verify the radio protection is available for all traffic that is supported by the MPTACC
to reseat/replace or appropriate maintenance window is scheduled per local practices
and procedures.
22 Is it appropriate to proceed with MPTACC Power Supply Failure procedure?

23 Is the MPTACC in alarm in a protected system?

Power alarms 4-33

3EM23956AL
TAP-102
24 CAUTION: Possibility of service interruption. Removing an in-service card in an

unprotected link causes loss of traffic. Removing an in-service card in a protected
link requires switching the traffic onto the protected channel.
25 CAUTION: Possibility of service interruption. In redundant MPTACC protected radio

configurations, the Main MPTACC card(s) resides in slots 3, 5, and/or 7. The spare
MPTACC cards reside in slots 4, 6, and/or 8.
26 CAUTION: Possibility of service interruption. In single MPTACC protected radio

configurations, the Main MPT ODU and the spare MPT ODU are supported by a
single MPTACC card. Reseating/Replacing an MPTACC card in this configuration
causes a loss of traffic. Schedule appropriate maintenance window prior to
MPTACC replacement per local practices and procedures.
27 Is the card in alarm main or spare?
If main, go to step 28.

If spare, go to step 33.
28 CAUTION: Possibility of service interruption. Forced EPS/HSB/RX Radio switching

traffic causes a disruption to traffic.
29 Perform the Forced EPS Switch using the Craft Terminal.
30 Perform the Forced HSB Switch using the Craft Terminal.
31 Perform the Forced Rx Radio Switch using the Craft Terminal.
32 Go to step 36.
33 Perform Lockout EPS Switch using the Craft Terminal.
34 Perform Lockout HSB Switch using the Craft Terminal.
35 Perform Lockout Rx Radio Switch using the Craft Terminal.
36 Verify card in alarm status is Standby.

unprotected link causes loss of traffic.
38 Physically reseat card in alarm and wait for the status LED to turn steady green or
amber.
4-34 Power alarms

TAP-102 3EM23956AL

41 See DLP-114 to replace MPTACC.

44 Determine the MSS-1 configuration.
a. Does the MSS-1 support one or more radio channels?
b. Are DS1 ports configured and carrying traffic?
c. Are Ethernet ports configured and carrying traffic?
45 Based on the answers to step 44, verify the appropriate maintenance window is
scheduled per local practices and procedures.
46 Is it appropriate to proceed with MSS-1 CORE Power Supply Failure procedure?

47 CAUTION: Possibility of service interruption. Power cycling an in-service MSS-1

shelf WILL cause a loss of ALL traffic associated with the MSS-1 shelf.
48 Remove both the A and B fuses supplying power to the MSS-1 shelf in alarm.
49 Wait ten seconds and install both the A and B fuses removed in step 48. Then wait for
the status LED to turn steady green.

52 See DLP-128 to replace MSS-1 shelf.
Power alarms 4-35

3EM23956AL
TAP-102

55 Inspect the power supply cable connection at MPT ODU.
56 Is power supply cable damaged or improperly connected?

57 Terminate, repair, or replace power supply cable as required.

60 Inspect the power supply cable run between the MPTACC/MSS-1 CORE and
MPT ODU.
61 Is the power supply cable damaged?

62 Repair or replace the power supply cable as required.

65 Which card is Power Supply Failure alarm declared?
If MPTACC, go to step 66.

If MSS-1 CORE, go to step 84.
66 Is MPTACC in alarm in a protected system?

4-36 Power alarms

TAP-102 3EM23956AL
67 CAUTION: Possibility of service interruption. Releasing Forced EPS/HSB/RX Radio

switch causes a disruption to traffic.
68 Release the Forced/Lockout EPS Switch using the Craft Terminal.
69 Release the Forced/Lockout HSB Switch using the Craft Terminal.
70 Release the Forced/Lockout Rx Radio Switch using the Craft Terminal.
71 Go to step 84.
Secondary battery failure
72 Verify that there is no blown fuse providing power to the B-power feed.
73 Verify the shelf power cable connections between the MSS-1/4/8 and the PDU.
74 Verify the B-power connections between the BDFB and PDU.
75 Verify that the B-power BDFB breakers are in the ON position.
77 Did the Secondary Battery Failure clear?

78 Measure the voltage of the B-power feed.
79 Is the measured voltage within the supported voltage range (-40.8 VDC to -57.6 VDC)?

80 Troubleshoot the B-power feed voltage problem.
82 Did the Secondary Battery Failure condition clear?

Power alarms 4-37

3EM23956AL
TAP-102
4-38 Power alarms

TAP-103 3EM23956AL
TAP-103
Equipment alarms
Purpose
This procedure describes how to identify and clear Equipment alarms (Replaceable Unit Problem,
Replaceable Unit Missing, Replaceable Unit Type Mismatch, Excessive Environmental
Temperature, or Unconfigured Equipment Present) on Core-E, FAN, MOD300, MPTACC,
MPT-HC/MPT-XP/9558HC (MPT ODU), MPT-HL, ODU300, P2E3DS3, P8ETH, P32E1DS1, or
SDHACC.
General
An Excessive Environmental Temperature alarm indicates that excessive temperature on MPT-HL

card has been detected, or MPT-HL fan unit has failed, or is missing.
Normal operating temperature of 5° to 40° C and short term operating temperature of -5° to 50° C
for a period not to exceed 72 hours is supported.
A Replaceable Unit Missing alarm indicates that a card/SFP is missing or unreachable from the
configured slot/port location.
A Replaceable Unit Problem alarm indicates that a card/SFP failure has been detected against the
indicated card/SFP.
A Replaceable Unit Type Mismatch alarm indicates that a card is present in a slot/port provisioned
for a different card/SFP type.
A Replaceable Unit Type Mismatch alarm indicates that an ODU300 is present on a radio channel
provisioned for a different ODU300 type.
An Unconfigured Equipment Present alarm indicates that a card/SFP is present in an unprovisioned

slot.
address.
See the 9500 MPR-A Operation and Administration (PN 3EM23954AL) for the procedures about
how to execute the commands that are described in this procedure.
STEP PROCEDURE
2 Review the output. See Table 103-A for information about equipment alarms.
Equipment alarms 4-39

3EM23956AL
TAP-103
Table 103-A. Equipment alarms

Operation Name Equipment type See
Excessive environmental r01/subrack#[3-8][5-8] MPT-HL Step 3
temperature
Replaceable unit missing r01s1/board#[8] AUX Step 14
r01s1/board#[1-2] Core-E
r01s1/board#[3-8] MOD300, MPTACC,
P2E3DS3, P8ETH,
P32E1DS1, SDHACC
r01s1b[1-2]/daughter#[5-6] SFP on Core-E
r01s1b1/daughter#[5-6] SFP on MSS/CORE
r01s1b[3-8]/daughter#[03-04] SFP on MPTACC
r01s1b[3-8]/daughter#[05-08] SFP on P8ETH
r01s1b[3-8]/daughter#[01-02] SFP on SDHACC
r01s[3-8][1-4]b1/daughter#03 RPS SFP on MPT ODU
connected to MPTACC
4-40 Equipment alarms

TAP-103 3EM23956AL
Table 103-A. Equipment alarms (cont.)

Replaceable unit problem r01s1/board#[8] AUX Step 24
r01s1/board#[1-2] Core-E
P2E3DS3, P8ETH,
P32E1DS1, SDHACC
r01/subrack#1[1-6] MPT ODU connected to
Core-E, MSS/CORE
r01/subrack#[3-8][1-4] MPT ODU connected to
MPTACC
P8ETH
r01s1b[3-8]/daughter#[01-02] SFP for SDH
r01s[3-8][1-4]b1/daughter#04 RPS SFP on MPT ODU
connected to MPTACC
r01s1[1-6]b1/daughter#04 XPIC Module on
MPT ODU connected to
Core-E, MSS/CORE
r01/subrack#[3-8][5-8]/daughter#04 XPIC Module on
P8ETH
r01s[3-8][1-4]b1/daughter#04 RPS or XPIC Module on
MPTACC

3EM23956AL
TAP-103
Table 103-A. Equipment alarms (cont.)

Replaceable unit type r01s1/board#[8] AUX Step 159
mismatch r01s1/board#[1-2] Core-E
P2E3DS3, P8ETH,
P32E1DS1, SDHACC
r01/subrack#1[1-6] MPT ODU connected to
Core-E, MSS/CORE
MPTACC
P8ETH
Replaceable unit type r01/subrack#[3-8] ODU300 Step 176
mismatch - ODU300
Unconfigured equipment r01s1/board#[8] AUX Step 186
present r01s1/board#[2] Core-E
P2E3DS3, P8ETH,
P32E1DS1, SDHACC
r01s1b[3-8]/daughter#[01-02] SFP on SDHACC
Excessive environmental temperature
3 Verify that the MPT-HL card fan is equipped and operating properly.
4 Is the MPT-HL fan equipped and operating properly?

TAP-103 3EM23956AL
5 Is the traffic affected?
6 Replace the MPT-HL. See DLP-108 to replace MPT-HL.
8 Did the Excessive Environmental Temperature alarm clear?

9 Verify that the building temperature is within acceptable temperature range (Normal
operating temperatute is 5° to 40° C. Short term operating temperature is -5° to 50° C
for a period not to exceed 72 hours).
10 Verify the condition of MPT-HL shelf air filter and replace if air filter condition
indicates that filter replacement is required. See DLP-101 to replace the MPT-HL air
filter.
11 Verify that no obstruction occurred that prevents proper air flow through the MPT-HL
card.
13 Did the Excessive Environmental Temperature alarm clear?

Replaceable unit missing
14 Visually inspect the indicated slot location.
15 Is the slot location empty?

16 Install the card/SFP type corresponding to slot provisioning.

3EM23956AL
TAP-103
18 Did the Replaceable Unit Missing alarm clear?

19 CAUTION: Possibility of service interruption. Performing the Restart NE command

may cause a disruption to traffic.
20 Perform the NE restart on the NE: Supervision/Restart NE. Communication with the
NE is lost during the NE restart and you are logged out of the system.
21 Log into the NE.
23 Did the Replaceable Unit Missing alarm clear?

Replaceable unit problem
24 What equipment type is the Replaceable Unit Problem declared against?
If Core-E, P2E3DS3, or P32E1DS1 go to step 66.

If FAN, go to step 97.
If MPTACC go to step 75.
If MOD300, MPT ODU, ODU300, or P8ETH go to step 83.
If MPT-HL, go to step 25.
If SFP, go to step 111.
If RPS SFP on MPT ODU go to step 137.
If RPS or XPIC module on MPT ODU go to step 152.
25 Verify that the MPT-HL PA switch is in the ON ‘1’ position.
26 Is the MPT-HL PA switch in the ON ‘1’ position?

27 Ready to move the MPT-HL PA switch to the ON ‘1’ position?

28 When the MPT-HL PA is in the OFF ‘0’ position, the Replaceable Unit Problem
condition is raised and Tx Mute > Local > Auto > Enable is displayed on the EAS Main
View Settings tab, go to step 197.

TAP-103 3EM23956AL
29 Position the MPT-HL PA switch to the ON ‘1’ position.
31 Did the Replaceable Unit Problem alarm clear?

32 Is the card in alarm in a protected system?

33 CAUTION: Possibility of service interruption. Performing Manual EPS/HSB/Rx

Radio switch causes a disruption to traffic.

39 Go to step 46.
40 Perform the Lockout EPS Switch using the Craft Terminal.
41 Perform the Lockout HSB Switch using the Craft Terminal.
42 Perform the Lockout Rx Radio Switch using the Craft Terminal.
44 Go to step 46.

46 See DLP-108 to replace MPT-HL.

3EM23956AL
TAP-103

49 CAUTION: Possibility of service interruption. Releasing Forced EPS/HSB/Rx Radio

53 Is the protection scheme configured as Not Revertive?

54 NOTE: To verify the replaced MPT-HL is capable of carrying traffic, the replaced MPT-HL
must be placed in the Active state.
55 CAUTION: Possibility of service interruption. Performing Manual EPS/HSB/Rx

Radio switch causes a disruption to traffic.
56 Perform the Manual EPS Switch using the Craft Terminal.
57 Perform the Manual HSB Switch using the Craft Terminal.
58 Perform the Manual Rx Radio Switch using the Craft Terminal.
59 Verify that the replaced MPT-HL status is Active.
60 Verify that the local and far end radio direction are alarm free and error-free.
61 Are the local and far end alarm free and error-free?

62 Release the Manual EPS Switch using the Craft Terminal.
63 Release the Manual HSB Switch using the Craft Terminal.
64 Release the Manual Rx Radio Switch using the Craft Terminal.

TAP-103 3EM23956AL
65 Go to step 197.



70 Verify that the card in the alarm status is Standby.
71 Go to step 97.
74 Go to step 97.
75 Determine the MPTACC configuration.
d. Is the power to the radio channels provided by the MPTACC card?
76 Verify that the radio protection is available for all traffic supported by the MPTACC
to be replaced or appropriate maintenance window is scheduled per local practices and
procedures.
77 Is it appropriate to proceed with the MPTACC Replaceable Unit Problem procedure?


3EM23956AL
TAP-103
78 Is the MPTACC in alarm in a protected system?



configurations, the Main MPTACC card(s) resides in slots 3, 5, and/or 7. The spare
MPTACC card(s) resides in slots 4, 6, and/or 8.

single MPTACC card. Replacing an MPTACC card in this configuration causes a
loss of traffic. Schedule appropriate maintenance window prior to MPTACC
replacement per local practices and procedures.
82 Is the card in alarm the main or spare?

If MPT ODU go to step 84.

If MOD300, ODU300, or P8ETH, go to step 85.
84 Is the MPT ODU in alarm supported by the Core-E card?





TAP-103 3EM23956AL
91 Go to step 95.
93 Perform the Lockout HSB Switch using the Craft Terminal.
94 Perform the Lockout Rx Radio Switch using the Craft Terminal.

97 Physically reseat the card in alarm and wait for the status LED to turn steady green
or amber.

If Core-E, see DLP-103 to replace Core-E.

If FAN, see DLP-106 to replace FAN.
If MOD300, see DLP-107 to replace MOD300.
If MPT ODU see DLP-115 to replace MPT ODU.
If ODU300, see DLP-109 to replace ODU300.
If P2E3DS3, see DLP-110 to replace P2E3DS3.
If P8ETH, see DLP-105 to replace P8ETH.
If SDHACC, see DLP-126 to replace SDHACC.

103 CAUTION: Possibility of service interruption. Releasing EPS switch may cause a

3EM23956AL
TAP-103
105 Go to step 197.
106 CAUTION: Possibility of service interruption. Releasing Forced EPS/HSB/RX Radio

110 Go to step 197.
111 Is the SFP (Ethernet/OC-3/Radio equipment) in alarm protected?


113 Is the SFP in alarm the main or spare?

115 Perform the Forced HSB Switch using the Craft Terminal (radio SFP only).
116 Perform the Forced Rx Radio Switch using the Craft Terminal (radio SFP only).
118 Go to step 125.
120 Perform the Lockout HSB Switch using the Craft Terminal (radio SFP only).
121 Perform the Lockout Rx Radio Switch using the Craft Terminal (radio SFP only).
123 Go to step 125.

TAP-103 3EM23956AL
124 CAUTION: Possibility of service interruption. Removing SFP in an unprotected

system causes a loss of traffic on ALL facilities that are associated with the SFP
removed. Schedule appropriate maintenance window per local practices and
procedures.
125 Physically reseat the SFP in alarm.

128 See DLP-102 to replace SFP in alarm.

131 Is the SFP protected?


134 Release the Forced/Lockout HSB Switch using the Craft Terminal (radio SFP only).
135 Release the Forced/Lockout Rx Radio Switch using the Craft Terminal (radio SFP
only).
136 Go to step 197.
137 Physically reseat the RPS cable at both ends that are associated with RPS SFP in
alarm.

3EM23956AL
TAP-103

140 Physically reseat the RPS SFP in alarm.

143 See DLP-102 to replace the RPS SFP in alarm.

146 Replace the RPS cable that is associated with the RPS SFP in alarm.

149 See DLP-115 to replace MPT ODU associated with RPS SFP in alarm.

152 See DLP-122 to replace RPS/XPIC module in alarm.

TAP-103 3EM23956AL

155 See DLP-115 to replace MPT ODU associated with RPS/XPIC module in alarm.

158 Go to step 197.
Replaceable unit type mismatch
159 Is the Replaceable Unit Type Mismatch alarm declared against an SFP?

160 Visually inspect the indicated slot location.
161 Is the card in indicated slot location the correct card type?

162 Replace the installed card with card type provisioned in Core-E memory.
If Core-E, see DLP-103 to replace Core-E.

If FAN, see DLP-106 to replace FAN.
If MOD300, see DLP-107 to replace MOD300.
If MPTACC, see DLP-114 to replace MPTACC.
If MPT ODU, see DLP-115 to replace MPT ODU.
If MPT-HL, see DLP-108 to replace MPT-HL.
If P8ETH, see DLP-105 to replace P8ETH.
If SDHACC, see DLP-126 to replace SDHACC.
164 Did the Replaceable Unit Type Mismatch alarm clear?


3EM23956AL
TAP-103
165 Reprovision the slot to the correct card type.

168 Using the Craft Terminal, determine the SFP type in alarm.
169 Is the SFP in alarm the correct SFP type as described in the site engineering
documentation?

170 Replace the SFP with the type corresponding to the SFP card slot provisioning. See
DLP-102 to replace an SFP.

173 Reprovision the SFP slot to the correct SFP type.

Replaceable unit type mismatch - ODU300
176 Verify that the radio channel provisioning corresponding to the ODU300 in alarm is
correct as described in the site engineering documentation.
177 Is the radio channel provisioning correct?

178 Verify that the equipped ODU300 supports radio channel provisioning.

TAP-103 3EM23956AL
179 Is the ODU300 connected to the MOD300 the correct ODU300 type?

180 Replace the ODU300 with ODU300 type supporting radio channel provisioning that is
stored in Core-E memory. See DLP-109 to replace ODU300.

183 Reprovision the radio channel as described in the site engineering documentation.

Unconfigured equipment present
186 Visually inspect the indicated slot/SFP location.
187 Is the indicated slot location equipped with a card/SFP?

188 Is the card/SFP that is equipped in the slot location expected to be there?

189 Provision the slot to the correct the card/SFP type.
191 Did the Unconfigured Equipment Present alarm clear?

192 Remove the card/SFP from the slot.

3EM23956AL
TAP-103
193 Install the blank filler panel or face plate into the slot that the card was removed.
195 Did the Unconfigured Equipment Present alarm clear?


TAP-104 3EM23956AL
TAP-104
Radio alarms (MPT-HC, MPT-HL, MPT-XP, MOD300, ODU300,
9558HC)
Purpose
This procedure describes how to identify and clear radio alarms on MPT-HC/MPT-XP/9558HC
(MPT ODU), MPT-HL, MOD300, and ODU300.
General
A Bandwidth Over Flow alarm indicates that while the MPT ODU/MPT-HL was not communicating
with the Core-E or P8ETH, TDM2TDM and/or TDM2ETH cross-connections were provisioned with
a total bandwidth which exceeds the net bandwidth capacity of the radio profile.
A CLA alarm indicates that the standby transmitter has/had a silent failure which caused the far
end to request a HSB protection switch.
A Demodulator Fail alarm indicates that a loss of receive signal, bad receive signal, or internal
receive circuit failure.
An Early Warning Indication alarm indicates that a 10E-9 Bit Error Rate detected.
A High BER alarm indicates that Bit Error Rate threshold of 10E-4 has been exceeded on receiver
input circuits.
An Incompatible Frequency alarm indicates that the configured frequency is outside the supported
frequency range.
An Incompatible Modulation alarm indicates that the configured modulation is not supported by
MPT ODU/MPT-HL in alarm.
An Incompatible Protection alarm indicates that the RPS/XPIC module is missing or equipped with
a mixture of RPS and XPIC modules on the MPT ODU protection pair in alarm.
An Incompatible Shifter alarm indicates that the configured shifter value is not supported by the
MPT ODU/MPT-HL/ODU300.
An Incompatible TX Power alarm indicates that the configured transmit power value is not
supported by the MPT ODU/MPT-HL/ODU300.
A Link Identifier Mismatch alarm indicates that the link identifier number provisioned on
MPT ODU/MPT-HL/ODU300 settings screen is different than link identifier number provisioned at
far end of the hop.
A Loss Of Protection alarm indicates that a loss the radio direction is affected by a failure that radio
protection (RPS) cannot recover. The alarm is only reported if the RPS is provisioned.
Radio alarms (MPT-HC, MPT-HL, MPT-XP, MOD300, ODU300, 9558HC) 4-57

3EM23956AL
TAP-104
A Loss Of Signal alarm indicates that a loss of Ethernet signal is detected on the MPT ODU/MPT-HL
coupler port.
A PPP Fail alarm indicates that TMN over PPP fail.
A Remote Defect Indication in a received Radio Direction. Alarm is reported when an RDI is received
on a given radio direction from the remote end of radio link.
address.
STEP PROCEDURE
2 Review the output. See Table 104-A for information about radio alarms.
Table 104-A. Radio alarms

Bandwidth over flow Radio/Dir#1.[1-6]/ MPT ODU connected Step 3
Slot#1/Port#[1-6]/Ch#1 to Core-E,
MSS/CORE
Radio/Dir#[3-8].[1-4]/ MPT ODU connected
Slot#[3-8]/Port#[1-4]/Ch#[0-1] to MPTACC
Slot#[3-8]/Port#[5-8]/Ch#1 to P8ETH
Slot#[3-8]/Port#[5-8]/Ch#[0-1]
CLA Radio/Dir#[3-8].[1-4]/ MPT ODU connected Step 7
Slot#[3-8]/Port#[5-8]/Ch#[0-1]
Slot#[3-8]/Port#[1-4]/Ch#[0-1]
4-58 Radio alarms (MPT-HC, MPT-HL, MPT-XP, MOD300, ODU300, 9558HC)

TAP-104 3EM23956AL

Demodulator fail Radio/Dir#1.[1-6]/ MPT ODU connected Step 24
MSS/CORE
Slot#[3-8]/Port#[5-8]/Ch#[0-1]
Early warning indication Radio/Dir#1.[1-6]/ MPT ODU connected Step 36
MSS/CORE
Slot#[3-8]/Port#[5-8]/Ch#[0-1] to P8ETH
Slot#[3-8]/Port#[5-8]/Ch#[0-1]
High BER Radio/Dir#1.[1-6]/ MPT ODU connected Step 38
MSS/CORE
Slot#[3-8]/Port#[5-8]/Ch#[0-1]
Incompatible frequency Radio/Dir#1.[1-6]/ MPT ODU connected Step 51
MSS/CORE
Slot#[3-8]/Port#[5-8]/Ch#[0-1]

3EM23956AL
TAP-104

Incompatible modulation Radio/Dir#1.[1-6]/ MPT ODU connected Step 61
MSS/CORE
Slot#[3-8]/Port#[5-8]/Ch#[0-1]
Incompatible protection Radio/Dir#[3-8].[1-4]/ MPT ODU connected Step 71
Incompatible shifter Radio/Dir#1.[1-6]/ MPT ODU connected Step 84
MSS/CORE
Slot#[3-8]/Port#[5-8]/Ch#[0-1]
Incompatible power Radio/Dir#1.[1-6]/ MPT ODU connected Step 94
MSS/CORE
Radio/Dir#[3-8].[1-4]/Slot#[3- MPT ODU
8]/Port#[1-4]/Ch#[0-1]
Slot#[3-8]/Port#[5-8]/Ch#[0-1]
Incompatible TX power Radio/Dir#[3-8]/Ch#[0-1] MOD300 Step 94

TAP-104 3EM23956AL

Link identifier mismatch AirFrame/Dir#1.[1-6]/ MPT ODU connected Step 104
MSS/CORE
AirFrame/Dir#[3-8].[1-4]/ MPT ODU connected
AirFrame/Dir#[3-8].[5-8]/ MPT ODU connected
AirFrame/Dir#[3-8].[5-8]/ MPT-HL
Slot#[3-8]/Port#[5-8]/Ch#[0-1]
AirFrame/Dir#[3-8]/Ch#[0-1] MOD300
Loss of protection Radio/Dir#[3-8]/Ch#1 MOD300 Step 111

Slot#[3-8]/Port#[1-4]/Ch#1 to MPTACC
Loss of signal MAU/subrack[#3-8].[1-4]daughter#03 MPT ODU connected Step 119
to MPTACC
MAU/subrack[#3-8].[5-8] Port#n MPT-HL
PPP fail PPP-IP/RF#1[1-6] MPT ODU connected Step 125
to Core-E,
MSS/CORE
PPP-IP/RF#[3-8][1-4] MPT ODU connected
to MPTACC
PPP-IP/RF#[3-8][5-8] MPT ODU connected
to P8ETH
PPP-IP/RF#[3-8][5-8] MPT-HL
PPP-IP/RF#[3-8] MOD300
Remote defect indication Radio/Dir#1.[1-6]/ MPT ODU connected Step 140
MSS/CORE
Slot#[3-8]/Port#[5-8]/Ch#[0-1]

3EM23956AL
TAP-104
Bandwidth over flow
3 NOTE: Total Bandwidth provisioned is validated at the add/drop nodes of the network
only. Pass-Through TDM2TDM and/or TDM2ETH flows supported by the NE are not
included in the total bandwidth validation and must be included in the network design
to determine the net bandwidth capacity of the radio profile required.
4 Verify the cross-connections for the radio with Bandwidth Over Flow alarm and delete
TDM2TDM and/or TDM2ETH cross-connections until the total bandwidth is equal to
or less than the net bandwidth capacity of the radio profile.
5 Retrieve the alarms Using the Alarm Monitor.
6 Did the Bandwidth Over Flow alarm clear?

CLA
7 Attempt to Clear CLA alarm using the manual switch command?
8 CAUTION: Possibility of service interruption. Performing Clear CLA command on

MPT ODU, MPT-HL, or ODU300 will cause a loss of traffic on ALL facilities
associated with the MPT ODU, MPT-HL, or ODU300 declaring CLA alarm IF the silent
failure still exist. The Clear CLA command Forces traffic onto the radio channel in
alarm and resets the CLA alarm. If the silent failure still exists, ALL traffic will be
dropped until the far end requests a HSB protection switch for the link. The traffic
outage duration will be from 30 to 60 seconds. Schedule appropriate maintenance
window per local practices and procedures.
9 Using the Craft Terminal, on the Protection Schemes tab for the local MPT ODU/
MPT-HL/ODU300, select HSB Protection for the channel declaring CLA alarm.
10 On the Commands tab, from the New Value drop down, choose Clear CLA.
11 Click on the Apply button. The Switch confirmation window appears.
12 Click on the OK button.
13 Are both receivers at the far end in alarm and traffic affected?


TAP-104 3EM23956AL
14 Wait two minutes for the CLA alarm to be declared against the MPT ODU, MPT-HL,
or ODU300.
16 Is the CLA alarm declared against the MPT ODU, MPT-HL, or ODU300?

17 Replace the MPT ODU, MPT-HL, or ODU300 CLA declared against.
See DLP-115 to replace MPT ODU.

See DLP-108 to replace MPT-HL.
See DLP-107 to replace MOD300.
18 CAUTION: Possibility of service interruption. Performing Clear CLA command on

MPT ODU, MPT-HL, or ODU300 will cause a loss of traffic on ALL facilities
associated with the MPT ODU, MPT-HL, or ODU300 declaring CLA alarm IF the silent
failure still exist. The Clear CLA command Forces traffic onto the radio channel in
alarm and resets the CLA alarm. If the silent failure still exists, ALL traffic is dropped
until the far end requests a HSB protection switch for the link. The traffic outage
duration is 30 to 60 seconds. Schedule appropriate maintenance window per local
19 Perform the Clear CLA command.
20 Are both receivers at the far end in alarm and traffic affected?

21 Wait two minutes for the CLA alarm to be declared against the MPT ODU, MPT-HL,
or ODU300.
23 Is the CLA alarm declared against the MPT ODU, MPT-HL, or ODU300?

Demodulator fail
24 Verify that there are no weather-related conditions.

3EM23956AL
TAP-104
25 Do weather-related conditions exist?
If yes, wait for the weather to clear and recheck alarms. Go to step 145.
26 Verify that the RF path is clear.
27 Is the RF path clear?

28 Verify that the RSL is above RX threshold.
29 Is the RSL above the RX threshold?

30 Check the upstream transmitter output power and troubleshoot accordingly.
32 Did the Demodulator Fail alarm clear?

33 Replace the MPT ODU, MPT-HL, or MOD300 Demodulator Fail declared against.
See DLP-115 to replace MPT ODU.

See DLP-108 to replace MPT-HL.
See DLP-107 to replace MOD300.
35 Did the Demodulator Fail alarm clear?

Early warning indication
36 No action is required at this time. Monitor the receive signal for increased degrading.
37 Go to step 145.

TAP-104 3EM23956AL
High BER
38 Verify that there are no weather-related conditions.
39 Do weather-related conditions exist?
If yes, wait for the weather to clear and recheck the alarms. Go to
step 145.

42 Verify that the RSL is above the RX threshold.

46 Did the High BER alarm clear?

47 Verify that the antenna is aligned.
48 Is the antenna aligned?

If no, align the antenna. See the 9500 MPR-A Turn-Up Manual
(PN 3EM23955AL) Antenna Polarization Verification (DLP-105)
Antenna Feedhorn Verification - XPD Procedure.
50 Did the High BER alarm clear?


3EM23956AL
TAP-104
Incompatible frequency
51 Using the Craft Terminal, retrieve the provisioned frequency value and supported
frequency of the MPT ODU, MPT-HL, or ODU300.
52 Verify the required frequency of the microwave link.
53 Is the required microwave link frequency supported by the MPT ODU, MPT-HL, or
ODU300?

54 Reprovision the frequency of the MPT ODU, MPT-HL, or ODU300 to the required
frequency of the microwave link.
56 Did the Incompatible Frequency alarm clear?

57 CAUTION: Possibility of service interruption. Replacing the MPT ODU, MPT-HL, or

ODU300 in an unprotected facility causes a loss of traffic on ALL facilities that are
associated with the MPT ODU, MPT-HL, or ODU300 being replaced. Schedule
appropriate maintenance window per local practices and procedures.
58 Replace the MPT ODU, MPT-HL, or ODU300 with the version that supports the
required frequency of the microwave link.
For MPT ODU replacement, see DLP-115.

For MPT-HL replacement, see DLP-108.
For ODU300 replacement, see DLP-109.
60 Did the Incompatible Frequency alarm clear?

Incompatible modulation
61 Using the Craft Terminal, retrieve the provisioned modulation value and supported
modulation of the MPT ODU/MPT-HL.
62 Verify the required modulation of the microwave link.

TAP-104 3EM23956AL
63 Is the required microwave link modulation supported by the MPT ODU/MPT-HL?

64 Reprovision the modulation of the MPT ODU/MPT-HL to the required modulation of

the microwave link.
66 Did the Incompatible Modulation alarm clear?

67 CAUTION: Possibility of service interruption. Replacing the MPT ODU/MPT-HL in an

the MPT ODU/MPT-HL being replaced. Schedule appropriate maintenance window
per local practices and procedures.
68 Replace the MPT ODU/MPT-HL with the version that supports the required
modulation of the microwave link.

70 Did the Incompatible Modulation alarm clear?

Incompatible protection
71 Visually inspect the main and spare MPT ODU for missing the RPS/XPIC module.
72 Is the RPS/XPIC module missing?

73 See DLP-122 to install the appropriate RPS/XPIC module.

3EM23956AL
TAP-104
75 Did the Incompatible Protection alarm clear?

76 Determine the required RPS/XPIC module type.
77 Are both MPT ODUs equipped with the correct RPS/XPIC module?

78 See DLP-122 to replace the incorrect RPS/XPIC module.

81 See DLP-122 to replace the RPS/XPIC module in alarm.

Incompatible shifter
84 Using the Craft Terminal, retrieve the provisioned shifter value and supported shifter
levels of the MPT ODU, MPT-HL, or ODU300.
85 Verify the required shifter value of the microwave link.
86 Is the required microwave link shifter level supported by the MPT ODU, MPT-HL, or
ODU300?

87 Reprovision the shifter value of the MPT ODU/MPT-HL/ODU300 to the required

shifter value of the microwave link.

TAP-104 3EM23956AL
89 Did the Incompatible Shifter alarm clear?

90 CAUTION: Possibility of service interruption. Replacing the

MPT ODU/MPT-HL/ODU300 in an unprotected facility causes a loss of traffic on ALL
facilities that are associated with the MPT ODU/MPT-HL/ODU300 being replaced.
Schedule appropriate maintenance window per local practices and procedures.
91 Replace the MPT ODU/MPT-HL/ODU30 with version that supports the required
shifter value of the microwave link.

93 Did the Incompatible Shifter alarm clear?

Incompatible power
Incompatible TX power
94 Using the Craft Terminal, retrieve the provisioned transmit power value and
supported transmit power level of the MPT ODU/MPT-HL/ODU300.
95 Verify the required transmit power level of the microwave link.
96 Is the required microwave link transmit power level supported by the

MPT ODU/MPT-HL/ODU300?

97 Reprovision the transmit power level of the MPT ODU/MPT-HL/ODU300 to the

required transmit power level of the microwave link.
99 Did the Incompatible TX Power alarm clear?


3EM23956AL
TAP-104
100 CAUTION: Possibility of service interruption. Replacing the

MPT ODU/MPT-HL/ODU300 in an unprotected facility causes a loss of traffic on ALL
facilities that are associated with the MPT ODU/MPT-HL/ODU300 being replaced.
101 Replace the MPT ODU/MPT-HL/ODU300 with the version that supports the required
transmit power level of the microwave link.

103 Did the Incompatible TX Power alarm clear?

Link identifier mismatch
104 NOTE: Link Identifier Mismatch alarm failure signatures are different for
MPT ODU/MPT-HL versus ODU300. For MPT ODU/MPT-HL Link Identifier
Mismatch alarm is declared and all link traffic is blocked. For ODU300 Link Identifier
Mismatch alarm is declared but all link traffic is passed downstream.
105 Using the Craft Terminal, retrieve the provisioned Link Identifier values for the near
end and far end of the hop for the alarmed MPT ODU/MPT-HL/ODU300.
106 Verify the required Link Identifier value of the microwave hop.
107 Determine which Link Identifier values are incorrect.
108 Reprovision the Link Identifier values according to the results of step 107.
110 Did the Link Identifier Mismatch alarm clear?

Loss of protection
111 Retrieve the alarms for the local end of the radio direction using the Alarm Monitor.
112 Determine all of the radio alarms that are declared against the radio direction
declaring the Loss Of Protection and troubleshoot accordingly.

TAP-104 3EM23956AL
114 Did the Loss Of Protection alarm clear?

115 Retrieve the alarms for the far end of the radio direction using the Alarm Monitor.
declaring the Loss Of Protection and troubleshoot accordingly.
118 Did the Loss Of Protection alarm clear?

Loss of signal
119 Verify that the Core-E/MPTACC/P8ETH card Ethernet port is operating normally.

122 Verify the link cabling between the Core-E/MPTACC/P8ETH card Ethernet port and
the MPT ODU/MPT-HL.

PPP fail
125 Retrieve the alarms using the Alarm Monitor, verify that no other radio path alarms
(such as Demodulator Fail) exist, and troubleshoot accordingly.

3EM23956AL
TAP-104
126 Did other radio path alarms exist and were cleared?

128 Did the PPP Fail alarm clear?

129 Check the provisioning of the far end radio card that is associated with card in alarm,
and verify that the PPP RF is enabled.
130 Is the far end radio card PPP RF disabled?

131 Enable the PPP RF at far end radio card.

134 Verify that the Link Identifiers match at the local and far end radio cards.
135 Do the local and far end Link Identifiers match?

136 Determine which Link Identifier is correct.
137 Reprovision the incorrect Link Identifier.


TAP-104 3EM23956AL
Remote defect indication
140 Retrieve the alarms for the far end of the radio direction using the Alarm Monitor.
associated with the radio direction declaring the Remote Defect Indication (RDI) and
143 Did the RDI alarm clear?


3EM23956AL
TAP-104

TAP-105 3EM23956AL
TAP-105
Ethernet alarms (Core-E, MPTACC, P8ETH, MSS-1 Shelf Core)
Purpose
This procedure describes how to identify and clear Loss Of Signal on Ethernet ports on the
Core-E/MPTACC/P8ETH.
General
Loss Of Signal alarm indicates that a loss of Ethernet signal is detected on the port or a
communication problem with the remote peer; for example, a link down condition.
address.
STEP PROCEDURE
2 Review the output. See Table 105-A for information about the Ethernet alarms.
Table 105-A. Ethernet alarms

Loss of signal MAU/Slot#[1-2]/Port#[1-6] Core-E Step 3
MAU/Slot#1/Port#[1-6] MSS/CORE
MAU/Slot#[3-8]/Port#[1-4] MPTACC
MAU/Slot#[3-8]/Port#[1-8] P8ETH
ETHInterface#100 Core-E
ETHInterfaceonCore#4 Core-E
Bandwidth degrade for ERP[1-2]#1-2] Core-E Step 10
protection switch
Loss of signal
3 Verify that the link partner is operating normally.
Ethernet alarms (Core-E, MPTACC, P8ETH, MSS-1 Shelf Core) 4-75

3EM23956AL
TAP-105

6 Verify the link partner cabling between the Core-E/MPTACC/P8ETH card or MSS-1
shelf Core and the link partner.

Bandwidth degrade for protection switch
10 Retrieve the alarms for the radio direction on one node of the Ethernet Ring reporting
the Bandwidth degrade using the Alarm Monitor.
11 Determine all of the radio alarms that are declared against the radio direction and
13 Did the Bandwidth degrade for protection switch alarm clear?

14 Have all nodes in the Ethernet Ring been verified?

If no, repeat steps 10 to 13 for the other nodes in the Ethernet Ring.
4-76 Ethernet alarms (Core-E, MPTACC, P8ETH, MSS-1 Shelf Core)

TAP-106 3EM23956AL
TAP-106
License/software mismatch
Purpose
This procedure describes how to identify and clear License/Software Mismatch alarms (Provisioning
Mismatch or Version Mismatch, Standby Version mismatch) on the Core-E,
MPT-HC/MPT-XP/9558HC (MPT ODU), MPT-HL, ODU300, or MSS-1 Shelf Core.
General
A Provisioning Mismatch alarm is declared against a Core-E indicates that has an incorrect flash
card installed on the Core-E.
A Standby Version Mismatch alarm indicates that the software version on MPT ODU/MPT-HL does
not match the software version on the Core-E.
A Version Mismatch alarm declared against a Core-E indicates that an incorrect Core-E card is
installed in the MSS-4 or MSS-8 slot or the software license string is not loaded on the Core-E card.
A Version Mismatch alarm declared against the MPT ODU/MPT-HL/ODU300 indicates that
software version on the MPT ODU/MPT-HL/ODU300 does not match the software version on the
Core-E.
address.
STEP PROCEDURE
2 Review the output. See Table 106-A for information about License/Software Mismatch
alarms.
Table 106-A. License/software mismatch alarms

Provisioning mismatch r01s1/board#[1-2] Core-E Step 3
r01s1/board#1 MSS/CORE
License/software mismatch 4-77

3EM23956AL
TAP-106
Table 106-A. License/software mismatch alarms (cont.)

Standby version r01/subrack#1[1-6] MPT ODU connected Step 6
mismatch to Core-E,
MSS/CORE
r01/subrack#[3-8][1-4] MPT ODU connected
to MPTACC
to P8ETH
Version mismatch r01s1/board#[1-2] Core-E Step 12
r01/subrack#1[1-6] MPT ODU connected Step 22
to Core-E,
MSS/CORE
to MPTACC
to P8ETH
Provisioning mismatch
3 Replace the Core-E flash card with the correct flash card for the license. See DLP-104
to replace the Core-E flash card.
5 Did the Provisioning Mismatch alarm clear?

Standby version mismatch
7 Verify that the Firmware Download On Going is declared against the

MPT ODU/MPT-HL.
8 Is the Firmware Download On Going declared against the MPT ODU/MPT-HL?
4-78 License/software mismatch

TAP-106 3EM23956AL
9 A Firmware Download On Going alarm indicates that the MSS/Core-E is downloading

the correct software to the MPT ODU/MPT-HL. Wait at least 30 minutes for the
downloading process to complete.
11 Did the Standby Version Mismatch alarm clear?

Version mismatch
12 Verify the Core-E card type is installed in the slot declaring Version Mismatch alarm.
13 Is the Core-E card type Core-E?

14 Replace the Core-B card with the Core-E card. See DLP-103 to replace the Core-E
card.
16 Did the Version Mismatch alarm clear?

17 Verify the license string that is installed on the NE.
18 Is the license string correct?

19 Replace the Core-E card. See DLP-103 to replace the Core-E card.
21 Did the Version Mismatch alarm clear?

License/software mismatch 4-79

3EM23956AL
TAP-106
Version mismatch
23 Verify that a Firmware Download On Going alarm is declared against the

24 Is the Firmware Download On Going declared against the

MPT ODU/MPT-HL/ODU300?

25 A Firmware Download On Going alarm indicates the MSS/Core-E is downloading the

correct software to the MPT ODU/MPT-HL/ODU300. Wait at least 30 minutes for the
downloading process to complete.
27 Did the Version Mismatch, Standby Version Mismatch alarm clear?

4-80 License/software mismatch

TAP-107 3EM23956AL
TAP-107
Internal loss of communications
Purpose
This procedure describes how to identify and clear an Internal Communication Problem alarm on the
MPT-HC/MPT-XP/9558HC (MPT ODU), MPT-HL, or ODU300.
General
A Dialog Failure alarm indicates a temporary loss of communication between the MSS shelf and
MPT ODU/MPT-HL. A Dialog Failure alarm is declared until communication is reestablished or a
time-out period expires.
A Dialog Failure alarm also may indicate that the provisioned MPT is connected to the wrong MPT
type. Example, the port is provisioned for MPT-HL, but the radio port fibers are connected to an
MPT-ODU or vice versa.
After the time-out period is reached, a Dialog Failure alarm is cleared and an Internal
Communication Problem alarm is declared.
The Dialog Failure time-out durations varies based on the system configuration. The time-out
durations are:
• 1+0: 20 minutes
• 1+1 HSB: 5 minutes
• 1+1 FD: 20 minutes
An Internal Communication Problem alarm indicates that a loss of communications with the
NOTE: After a radio configuration change, such as transition from 1+1 MPT ODU to MPT ODU with
XPIC, in a rare event, a stuck Dialog Failure alarm may occur. If this condition exists, to clear the
Dialog Failure alarm, the associated MPT Access card must be reseated.
address.
STEP PROCEDURE
Internal loss of communications 4-81

3EM23956AL
TAP-107
2 Review the output. See Table 107-A for information about internal communication
problem alarms.
Table 107-A. Internal communication problem alarms

Dialog failure r01/subrack#1[1-6] MPT ODU connected Step 3
to Core-E,
MSS/CORE
to MPTACC
r01/subrack#[3-8][[5-8] MPT ODU connected
to P8ETH
r01/subrack#[3-8][5-8] MPT-HL connected to
P8ETH
Internal communication r01/subrack#1[1-6] MPT ODU connected Step 88
problem to Core-E,
MSS/CORE
to MPTACC
to P8ETH
r01/subrack#[3-8][5-8] MPT-HL connected to
P8ETH
Dialog failure

4 Has the appropriate time-out period be reached?
If no, wait for the appropriate time-out period to expire before
proceeding to step 5.
6 Did the Dialog Failure alarm clear?
4-82 Internal loss of communications

TAP-107 3EM23956AL
7 Is an Internal Communication Problem alarm declared?
If yes, go to step 88 to clear Internal Communication Problem.

8 CAUTION: Possibility of service interruption. Physically reseating an MPTACC in an

the MPTACC being reseated. Schedule appropriate maintenance window per local
9 Reseat the MPTACC card that is associated with the MPT ODU in alarm.
10 Wait for the status LED to turn steady green or amber.

13 Verify radio port provisioning against site documentation.
14 Is the radio port provisioned per site documentation?

15 Verify radio port fiber cabling per site documentation.
16 Is the radio port fiber cabling correct and connected to the correct MPT type?

17 Correct MPT fiber cable connections per site documentation.

20 Reprovision the radio port per site documentation.

3EM23956AL
TAP-107

24 Is a Replaceable Unit Problem alarm declared against the MPT ODU/MPT-HL in the
protection-pair?
If yes, see IXL-101 to clear the Replaceable Unit Problem.

25 Verify that power is properly supplied to the MPT ODU/MPT-HL in alarm. Correct if
required.
26 Was a power problem corrected?


29 Is the MPT ODU/MPT-HL in a protected system?

30 CAUTION: Possibility of service interruption. Forced EPS and HSB switching traffic
31 Is the MPT ODU/MPT-HL in alarm the main or spare?

32 Perform a Forced EPS Switch using the Craft Terminal.
33 Perform a Forced HSB Switch using the Craft Terminal.
34 Perform a Forced Rx Radio Switch using the Craft Terminal.
35 Go to step 39.

TAP-107 3EM23956AL
36 Perform a Lockout EPS Switch using the Craft Terminal.
37 Perform a Lockout HSB Switch using the Craft Terminal.
38 Perform a Lockout Rx Radio Switch using the Craft Terminal.
39 CAUTION: Possibility of service interruption. Unseating and reseating the

communication link between the MPT ODU/MPT-HL and the
Core-E/MPTACC/P8ETH card MSS-1 shelf in an unprotected facility causes a loss of
traffic on ALL facilities that are associated with the MPT ODU/MPT-HL. Schedule
40 Reseat the RJ45/SFP at the Core-E/MPTACC/P8ETH/MSS-1 shelf Core that is

associated with the MPT ODU/MPT-HL in alarm.
41 Reseat the SFP at the MPT-HL in alarm.

44 Which card type is declaring Dialog Failure?
If MPT ODU, go to step 45.

45 Is the MPT ODU in alarm supported by the Core-E/P8ETH card or MSS-1 shelf Core?

46 Is there a second radio channel supported by the MPTACC associated with the
MPT ODU in alarm?

47 Is the second radio channel error-free and alarm free?


3EM23956AL
TAP-107
48 CAUTION: Possibility of service interruption. Physically removing power to an

MPT ODU in an unprotected facility causes a loss of traffic on ALL facilities that are
associated with the MPT ODU being replaced. Schedule appropriate maintenance
49 Power cycle the MPT ODU.
If powered using PFoE/QMA through the MPTACC or MSS-1 shelf Core, use the craft
terminal to disable power, and then reprovision power.
If MPT ODU is powered using PFoE through a Power Injector Card/Power Injector
Box/MPT Extended Power Unit, disconnect the DC+Data cable connection to the
MPT ODU at the power injector card/box. Wait 10 seconds and reconnect.
If MPT ODU is powered using coaxial cable with connection to MPT Power Unit/MPT
Extended Power Unit, disconnect the power cable connection to the MPT ODU at the
MPT Power Unit/MPT Extended Power Unit. Wait 10 seconds and reconnect.
If MPT ODU is powered with connection to direct office power, locate the fuse
protecting the MPT ODU and remove. Wait 10 seconds and reinstall the fuse.

52 CAUTION: Possibility of service interruption. Physically replacing an MPT ODU in

an unprotected facility causes a loss of traffic on ALL facilities that are associated
with the MPT ODU being replaced. Schedule appropriate maintenance window per
local practices and procedures.
53 Replace the MPT ODU in alarm. See DLP-115 to replace MPT ODU.

56 CAUTION: Possibility of service interruption. Physically removing an

MPTACC/P8ETH/Core-E in an unprotected facility causes a loss of traffic on ALL
facilities that are associated with the MPTACC being removed. Schedule

TAP-107 3EM23956AL
57 Reseat the MPTACC/P8ETH/Core-E card that is associated with the MPT ODU in
alarm.

61 CAUTION: Possibility of service interruption. Physically replacing an

MPTACC/P8ETH/Core-E in an unprotected facility causes a loss of traffic on ALL
facilities that are associated with the MPTACC/P8ETH/Core-E being replaced.
62 Replace the MPTACC/P8ETH/Core-E that is associated with the MPT ODU in alarm.
See DLP-114 to replace the MPTACC.

66 CAUTION: Possibility of service interruption. Replacing an MPT ODU in an

the MPT ODU being replaced. Schedule appropriate maintenance window per local

70 CAUTION: Possibility of service interruption. reseating an MPT-HL in an

the MPT-HL reseat. Schedule appropriate maintenance window per local practices
and procedures.

3EM23956AL
TAP-107
71 Position the MPT-HL PA switch to the OFF ‘0’ position.
72 Remove the fuse in the PDU that is suppling battery power to the MPT-HL.
73 Install the fuse in the PDU that is suppling battery power to the MPT-HL.

78 CAUTION: Possibility of service interruption. Replacing an MPT-HL in an

the MPT-HL being replaced. Schedule appropriate maintenance window per local
79 Replace the card in alarm. See DLP-108 to replace the MPT-HL.

83 Is the MPT ODU/MPT-HL in a protected system?

87 Go to step 174.

TAP-107 3EM23956AL
Internal communication problem
88 Is traffic affected?

89 Has the Internal Communication Problem alarm been active for more than five
minutes?

If no, wait five minutes, then go to step 90.
91 Did the Internal Communication Problem alarm clear?

92 Verify radio port provisioning against site documentation.
93 Is the radio port provisioned per site documentation?

94 Verify radio port fiber cabling per site documentation.
95 Is the radio port fiber cabling correct and connected to the correct MPT type?

96 Correct MPT fiber cable connections per site documentation.

99 Reprovision the radio port per site documentation.

3EM23956AL
TAP-107

102 Is the radio facility protected?

103 CAUTION: Possibility of service interruption. Forced switching traffic causes a

104 Is the MPT ODU/MPT-HL/ODU300 in alarm main or spare?

108 Go to step 112.
112 Which card is in alarm?
If ODU300, go to step 113.

113 CAUTION: Possibility of service interruption. Physically removing an MOD300 in an

the MOD300 being removed. Schedule appropriate maintenance window per local
114 Physically reseat the MOD300 that is associated with the ODU300 in alarm. Do not
remove the IF cable while reseating the MOD300 card.

TAP-107 3EM23956AL
116 Did Internal communication Problem alarm clear?

117 CAUTION: Possibility of service interruption. Physically replacing an MOD300 in an

the MOD300 being replaced. Schedule appropriate maintenance window per local
118 Replace the MOD300 that is associated with the ODU300. See DLP-107 to replace the
MOD300.
120 Did the Internal communication Problem alarm clear?

121 CAUTION: Possibility of service interruption. Physically replacing an ODU in an

the ODU being replaced. Schedule appropriate maintenance window per local
122 Replace the ODU300 in alarm. See DLP-109 to replace the ODU300.
124 Did the Internal communication Problem alarm clear?

125 Is MPT ODU in alarm supported by the Core-E/P8ETH card or MSS-1 shelf Core?

126 Is there a second radio channel supported by the MPTACC associated with the
MPT ODU in alarm?


3EM23956AL
TAP-107

128 CAUTION: Possibility of service interruption. Physically removing power to an

MPT ODU in an unprotected facility causes a loss of traffic on ALL facilities that are
associated with the MPT ODU being replaced. Schedule appropriate maintenance
If powered through the MPTACC or MSS-1 shelf Core, use the craft terminal to disable
power, and then reprovision power.
If MPT ODU is powered using PFoE through a Power Injector Card/Power Injector
Box/MPT Extended Power Unit, disconnect the DC+Data cable connection to the
MPT ODU at the Power Injector Card/Power Injector Box/MPT Extended Power Unit.
Wait 10 seconds and reconnect.
If MPT ODU is powered using coaxial connection from MPT Power Unit/MPT
Extended Power Unit, disconnect the power cable connection to the MPT ODU at the
MPT Power Unit/MPT Extended Power Unit. Wait 10 seconds and reconnect.
131 Did Internal Communication Problem alarm clear?




TAP-107 3EM23956AL
136 CAUTION: Possibility of service interruption. Physically reseating an MPTACC in an

the MPTACC reseat. Schedule appropriate maintenance window per local practices
and procedures.
137 Reseat the MPTACC card that is associated with the MPT ODU in alarm.

141 CAUTION: Possibility of service interruption. Physically replacing an MPTACC in an

the MPTACC being replaced. Schedule appropriate maintenance window per local
142 Replace the MPTACC that is associated with MPT ODU in alarm. See DLP-114 to
replace the MPTACC.




3EM23956AL
TAP-107
150 CAUTION: Possibility of service interruption. Unseating and reseating the

communication link between the MPT-HL and the P8ETH, Core-E card or MSS-1
shelf in an unprotected facility causes a loss of traffic on ALL facilities that are
associated with the MPT-HL. Schedule appropriate maintenance window per local
151 Unseat and reseat the communication link between the MPT-HL and P8ETH, Core-E,
or MSS-1 Shelf.

154 CAUTION: Possibility of service interruption. Replacing the communication link

between the MPT-HL and the P8ETH, Core-E card or MSS-1 shelf in an unprotected
facility causes a loss of traffic on ALL facilities that are associated with the MPT-HL.
155 Replace the communication link between the MPT-HL and P8ETH, Core-E, or MSS-1
Shelf.

158 CAUTION: Possibility of service interruption. reseating an MPT-HL in an

the MPT-HL reseat. Schedule appropriate maintenance window per local practices
and procedures.
159 Position the MPT-HL PA switch to the OFF ‘0’ position.
160 Remove the fuse in the PDU suppling battery power to the MPT-HL.
161 Install the fuse in the PDU suppling battery power to the MPT-HL.


TAP-107 3EM23956AL
164 CAUTION: Possibility of service interruption. Replacing an MPT-HL in an

the MPT-HL being replaced. Schedule appropriate maintenance window per local
165 Replace the MPT-HL in alarm. See DLP-108 to replace the MPT-HL.


172 Go to step 174.

3EM23956AL
TAP-107

TAP-108 3EM23956AL
TAP-108
Threshold crossing alarms (MOD300, MPT-HC, MPT-HL, MPT-XP,
9558HC, P32E1DS1, MSS-1 shelf P32E1DS1)
Purpose
This procedure describes how to identify Threshold Crossing Alarms (TCA) Threshold Crossed or
Unavailable Time on the MPT-HC/MPT-XP/9558HC (MPT ODU), MPT-HL, MOD300, or P32E1DS1
cards or MSS-1 shelf P32E1DS1.
General
TCA alarms are associated with Performance Monitoring (PM). TCA thresholds are default values
or values configured by the user. Depending on the configured TCA threshold values provisioned, the
severity of the TCA alarms are determined. Due to the nature and flexibility of TCA alarms, only
general recommendations can be provided as a course of action to clear TCA alarms. Follow local
practices and procedures in assessing the severity/importance of TCA alarms.
A TCA declared against a MPT ODU/MPT-HL/MOD300/P32E1DS1/MSS shelf P32E1DS1 indicates

that the alarm threshold has been exceeded; applies to the PM parameters with an accumulation
period of 15 minutes and/or 24 hours on the MPT ODU/MPT-HL/MOD300/P32E1DS1/MSS shelf
P32E1DS1.
Single level threshold crossing mechanism is utilized with 24 hour PM TCA alarms. TCA alarm is
raised when 24 hour threshold is exceeded. Implicit clearing of 24 hour TCA alarms occurs at the
beginning of each 24 hour period. No TCA alarm clear message is sent by the NE.
Dual level threshold crossing mechanism is utilized with 15 minute PM TCA alarms. A TCA alarm
is raised when the high threshold is exceeded. An explicit clearing of the TCA alarm occurs at the
end of a 15 minute period where the current data value does not exceed the low threshold, and the
monitoring period does not contain a suspect interval or an unavailable period. When this occurs, the
NE sends TCA alarm clear message.
An Unavailable Time alarm is declared against a MPT ODU/MPT-HL/MOD300/P32E1DS1/MSS

shelf P32E1DS1 which indicates that ten consecutive SES events have occurred; applies to the PM
parameters on the MPT ODU/MPT-HL/MOD300/P32E1DS1/MSS shelf P32E1DS1.
address.
STEP PROCEDURE
Threshold crossing alarms (MOD300, MPT-HC, MPT-HL, MPT-XP, 9558HC, P32E1DS1, 4-97
3EM23956AL
TAP-108
2 Review the output. See Table 108-A for information about TCA alarms.
Table 108-A. Threshold crossing alarms

Threshold crossed Hop/Dir#1[1-6]/Slot#1/ MPT ODU connected to Step 3
Port#[1-6]/Ch#1-PM15min, Core-E, MSS/CORE
Hop/Dir#1[1-6]/Slot#1/
Port#[1-6]/Ch#1-PM1day,
Hop/Dir#[3-8][1-4]/Slot#[3-8]/ MPT ODU connected to
Port#[1-4]/Ch#[0-1]-PM15min MPTACC
Hop/Dir#[3-8][1-4]/Slot#[3-8]/
Link/Dir#[3-8][1-4]/Slot#[3-8]/
Link/Dir#[3-8][1-4]/Slot#[3-8]/
Port#[5-8]/Ch#1-PM15min P8ETH
Hop/Dir#[3-8][5-8]/Slot#[3-8]/
Hop/Dir#[3-8][5-8]/Slot#[3-8]/
Link/Dir#[3-8][5-8]/Slot#[3-8]/
Link/Dir#[3-8][5-8]/Slot#[3-8]/
Hop/Dir#[3-8]/Ch#[0-1]-PM15min MOD300
Hop/Dir#[3-8]/Ch#[0-1]-PM1day
PM15min
PM1day
DS1-out/Slot#[3-8]/Port#[1-32]-
PM15min
PM1day
4-98 Threshold crossing alarms (MOD300, MPT-HC, MPT-HL, MPT-XP, 9558HC, P32E1DS1,
TAP-108 3EM23956AL
Table 108-A. Threshold crossing alarms (cont.)

Threshold crossed DS1-in/Slot#3/Port#[1-16]-PM15min MSS/DS1 Step 3
continued DS1-in/Slot#3/Port#[1-16]-PM1day
PM15min
DS1-out/Slot#3/Port#[1-16]-PM1day
Unavailable time Hop/Dir#1[1-6]/Slot#1/ MPT ODU connected to Step 12
Port#[1-6]/Ch#1-PM15min, Core-E, MSS/CORE
Hop/Dir#1[1-6]/Slot#1/
Port#[1-6]/Ch#1-PM1day,
Port#[1-4]/Ch#[0-1]-PM15min MPTACC
Hop/Dir#[3-8][1-4]/Slot#[3-8]/
Link/Dir#[3-8][1-4]/Slot#[3-8]/
Link/Dir#[3-8][1-4]/Slot#[3-8]/
Port#[5-8]/Ch#1-PM15min P8ETH
Hop/Dir#[3-8][5-8]/Slot#[3-8]/
Hop/Dir#[3-8][5-8]/Slot#[3-8]/
Link/Dir#[3-8][5-8]/Slot#[3-8]/
Link/Dir#[3-8][5-8]/Slot#[3-8]/
Hop/Dir#[3-8]/Ch#[0-1]-PM15min MOD300
Hop/Dir#[3-8]/Ch#[0-1]-PM1day
3EM23956AL
TAP-108
Table 108-A. Threshold crossing alarms (cont.)

Unavailable time DS1-in/Slot#[3-8]/Port#[1-32]- P32E1DS1 Step 12
continued PM15min
PM1day
PM15min
PM1day
DS1-in/Slot#3/Port#[1-16]-PM15min MSS/DS1
DS1-in/Slot#3/Port#[1-16]-PM1day
PM15min
DS1-out/Slot#3/Port#[1-16]-PM1day
Threshold crossed
3 Verify the PM data using the Craft Terminal.
4 Verify the radio channel power levels.
6 Determine the local weather conditions that could affect radio performance.
7 Following local practices and procedures, determine whether corrective actions are
required.
8 Are corrective actions required?
9 Perform corrective actions per local practices and procedures.
11 Did the Threshold Crossed alarm clear?

TAP-108 3EM23956AL
Unavailable time
12 Verify the PM data using the Craft Terminal.
13 Verify the radio channel power levels.
15 Determine local weather conditions that could affect radio performance.
16 Following local practices and procedures, determine whether corrective actions are
required.
17 Are corrective actions required?

18 Perform corrective actions per local practices and procedures.
20 Did the Unavailable Time alarm clear?

3EM23956AL
TAP-108
TAP-109 3EM23956AL
TAP-109
Synchronization alarms (Core-E, MOD300, MPT-HC, MPT-HL,
MPT-XP, P32E1DS1, SDHACC, 9558HC)
Purpose
This procedure describes how to identify and clear synchronization alarms on the Core-E, MOD300,
MPT-HC/MPT-XP/9558HC (MPT ODU), MPT-HL, P32E1DS1, and SDHACC.
General
A Degrade alarm indicates that the frequency of the sync source signal is degraded.
A Loss Ethernet Synchronization Message Channel (ESMC) alarm indicates a loss of communication
with the far end synchronization source or a provisioning mismatch with the far end Ethernet port
or radio channel. Loss ESMC is applicable to the Core-E Ethernet ports and Radio interfaces
(MOD300/MPT ODU/MPT-HL) configured with SSM support enabled and is assigned as a
synchronous clock source input.
A Loss Of Signal alarm indicates that no signal is present on the incoming Sync-in port.
A Synchronization Signal Fail alarm indicates that the received source signal is not applicable as a
Sync Source.
address.
STEP PROCEDURE
2 Review the output. See Table 109-A for information about synchronization alarms.
Synchronization alarms (Core-E, MOD300, MPT-HC, MPT-HL, MPT-XP, P32E1DS1, 4-103

3EM23956AL
TAP-109
Table 109-A. Sync alarms

Degrade Sync-in/Port#1 Core-E Step 3
Radio/Dir#1.[1-6]/ MPT ODU connected
Slot#1/Port#[1-6]/Ch#1 to Core-E
Slot#[3-8]/Port#[5-8]/Ch#[0-1]
RadioLAG#[1-14] MPT ODU connected
to P8ETH, MPT-HL
Loss ethernet MAU/Slot#[1-2]/Port#[1-6] Core-E Step 29
synchronization Radio/Dir#[3-8]/Ch#[0-1] MOD300
messaging channel
RadioLAG#[1-14] MPT ODU, MPT-HL
Slot#[3-8]/Port#[5-8]/Ch#[0-1]
Loss of signal Sync-in/Port#1 Core-E Step 38
4-104 Synchronization alarms (Core-E, MOD300, MPT-HC, MPT-HL, MPT-XP, P32E1DS1,

TAP-109 3EM23956AL
Table 109-A. Sync alarms

Synchronization signal Sync-in/Port#1 Core-E Step 62
fail Radio/Dir#[3-8]/Ch#[0-1] MOD300
Slot#[3-8]/Port#[5-8]/Ch#[0-1]
RadioLAG#[1-14] MPT ODU, MPT-HL
Degrade
3 What is the sync source?
If Sync-In, go to step 4.
If Radio port, go to step 9.
If DS1 or OC-3 port, go to step 14.
Sync-In
4 Verify that the Sync reference source (GPS or other sync source) is functioning
correctly.
5 Verify the Sync-In cabling and connections to the sync-in port on the Core-E card
(main and spare, if equipped).
6 Verify the Sync cabling and connections to the sync-out port on sync source.
8 Did the Degrade Defect alarm clear?

Radio port

3EM23956AL
TAP-109
10 Verify that no other radio path alarms, such as Demodulator Fail. If radio path alarms
exist, troubleshoot accordingly.
11 Did the other radio path alarms exist and were they cleared?


DS1 or OC-3 port
15 Verify that no LOS alarm exists on the sync reference DS1 or OC-3 port. If a LOS
alarm exists, troubleshoot accordingly.
16 Did the an LOS alarm exist on the sync reference DS1 or OC-3 port and was it cleared?


19 Verify that the sync reference DS1 or OC-3 port frequency is correct. If the sync
reference frequency is not correct, troubleshoot accordingly.
20 Was a sync reference DS1 port frequency problem identified and was it corrected?


TAP-109 3EM23956AL

23 Verify the sync source provisioning at both the sync source and the alarming card is
correct.

26 Which card is the Degrade Defect alarm declared against?
If Core-E, replace the Core-E. See DLP-103 to replace Core-E.

If MOD300, replace the MOD300. See DLP-107 to replace MOD300.
If MPT ODU replace the MPT ODU. See DLP-115 to replace MPT ODU.
If MPT-HL, replace the MPT-HL. See DLP-108 to replace MPT-HL.
If P32E1DS1, replace the P32E1DS1. See DLP-111 to replace
P32E1DS1.
If SDHACC, replace the SDHACC. See DLP-126 to replace SDHACC.

Loss ethernet synchronization messaging channel
30 Verify no radio or Ethernet alarms are declared against the radio direction declaring
Loss ESMC.
31 Are radio or Ethernet alarms declared against the radio direction or Ethernet port?
If yes, see IXL-101 to clear radio or Ethernet alarms declared against

the radio direction or Ethernet port.
32 Using Craft Terminal retrieve the provisioned Synchronization SSM values for both
near end and far end of the hop for the alarmed Core-E/MOD300/MPT ODU/MPT-HL.

3EM23956AL
TAP-109
33 Verify the desired Synchronization SSM value of the microwave hop.
34 Determine which Synchronization SSM value is correct.
35 Reprovision the Synchronization SSM value according to the results of step 34.
37 Did the Loss ESMC alarm clear?

Loss of signal
38 Verify Sync reference source (GPS or other sync source) is functioning properly.
39 Verify Sync-In cabling and connections to sync-in port on Core-E card (Main and Spare
if equipped).

42 Verify sync source provisioning at both the sync source and the alarming card.

45 Is traffic affected?

46 Is Core-E in a protected system?

47 CAUTION: Possibility of service interruption. Forced EPS switching Core-E will

cause a hit to traffic.

TAP-109 3EM23956AL
48 Is Core-E card in alarm main or spare?

49 Perform Forced EPS Switch using Craft Terminal.
50 Go to step 52.
51 Perform Lockout EPS Switch using Craft Terminal.
52 CAUTION: Possibility of service interruption. Reseating an unprotected Core-E card

will cause a hit to traffic.
53 Reseat the Core-E card declaring Loss Of Signal.

56 CAUTION: Possibility of service interruption. Replacing an unprotected Core-E card

will cause a hit to traffic.
57 Replace the Core-E card declaring Loss Of Signal. See DLP-103 to replace Core-E.

60 Is Core-E in a protected system?

61 Release Forced/Lockout EPS Switch using Craft Terminal.
Synchronization signal fail
63 Verify Degrade, Loss ESMC, or Loss of Signal are not also declared against Sync
source declaring Synchronization Signal Fail.

3EM23956AL
TAP-109
64 Are Degrade, Loss ESMC, or Loss of Signal also declared against synch source?
If yes, See TAP-109 Table 109-A and clear other Sync alarms before
proceeding to step 65.
66 Did the Synchronization Signal Fail alarm clear?

67 What is the sync source?
If Sync-in, go to step 68.

If Radio port, go to step 73.
If DS1 or OC-3 port, go to step 80.
Sync-in
68 Verify Sync reference source (GPS or other sync source) is functioning properly.
69 Verify Sync-In cabling and connections to sync-in port on Core-E card (Main and Spare
if equipped).
70 Verify Sync cabling and connections to sync-out port on sync source.

Radio port
74 Verify no radio alarms are declared against the radio direction declaring
Synchronization Signal Fail.
75 Are radio alarms declared against the radio direction?
If yes, see IXL-101 to clear radio alarms declared against the radio
direction.

TAP-109 3EM23956AL
76 Verify no other radio path alarms (Demodulator Fail, etc.) exist. If radio path alarms
exist, troubleshoot accordingly.
77 Did the other radio path alarms exist and were they cleared?


DS1 or OC-3 port
81 Verify no LOS alarm exists on sync reference DS1 or OC-3 port. If LOS alarm exists,
82 Did the an LOS alarm exist on sync reference DS1 or OC-3 port and was it cleared?


85 Verify sync reference DS1 or OC-3 port frequency is correct. If sync reference
frequency is not correct, troubleshoot accordingly.
86 Was a sync reference DS1 or OC-3 port frequency problem identified and was it
corrected?



3EM23956AL
TAP-109
89 Verify sync source provisioning at both the sync source and the alarming card.

92 Which card is Synchronization Signal Fail alarm declared against?
If Core-E, replace the Core-E. See DLP-103 to replace the Core-E.

If MOD300, replace the MOD300. See DLP-107 to replace the MOD300.
If MPT ODU replace the MPT ODU. See DLP-115 to replace the
MPT ODU.
If MPT-HL, replace the MPT-HL. See DLP-108 to replace the MPT-HL.
If P32E1DS1, replace the P32E1DS1. See DLP-111 to replace the
P32E1DS1.
If SDHACC, replace the SDHACC. See DLP-126 to replace SDHACC.


TAP-110 3EM23956AL
TAP-110
ATPC loop conditions (MOD300, MPT-HC, MPT-HL, MPT-XP,
9558HC)
Purpose
This procedure describes how to identify and clear ATPC Loop conditions (ATPC Loop Problem and
Loop Problem) on MOD300, MPT-HC/MPT-XP/9558HC (MPT ODU), and MPT-HL.
General
An ATPC Loop Problem alarm indicates that the local transmitter was operating continuously at full
power for 5-minutes, and the transmitter power was reduced to its minimum power setting.
A Loop Problem alarm indicates that loss of ATPC command path between the far end transmitter
and local receiver.
address.
STEP PROCEDURE
1 Using the Alarm Monitor, retrieve all alarm.
2 Review the output. See Table 110-A for information about ATPC Loop conditions.
Table 110-A. ATPC loop conditions

ATPC loop problem Radio/Dir#1.[1-6]/ MPT ODU connected Step 3
MSS/CORE
Slot#[3-8]/Port#[5-8]/Ch#[0-1]
ATPC loop conditions (MOD300, MPT-HC, MPT-HL, MPT-XP, 9558HC) 4-113

3EM23956AL
TAP-110
Table 110-A. ATPC loop conditions

Loop problem Radio/Dir#1.[1-6]/ MPT ODU connected Step 8
MSS/CORE
Slot#[3-8]/Port#[5-8]/Ch#[0-1]
ATPC loop problem
3 Using the Craft Terminal, determine whether the local transmit power is at minimum
power setting.
4 Is the local transmit power at its minimum power setting?
5 Troubleshoot the RF path from the near end transmitter to the far end receiver.
7 Did the ATPC Loop Problem alarm clear?

Loop problem
8 Is the system configured with protection?


4-114 ATPC loop conditions (MOD300, MPT-HC, MPT-HL, MPT-XP, 9558HC)

TAP-110 3EM23956AL
11 Perform a Forced EPS Switch at the near end transmitter using the Craft Terminal.
12 Perform a Forced HSB Switch at the near end transmitter using Craft Terminal.
13 Perform a Forced Rx Radio Switch at the near end transmitter using Craft Terminal.
14 Go to step 18.
15 Perform a Lockout EPS Switch at the near end transmitter using the Craft Terminal.
16 Perform a Lockout HSB Switch at the near end transmitter using the Craft Terminal.
17 Perform a Lockout Rx Radio Switch at the near end transmitter using the Craft
Terminal.
19 Did the Loop Problem alarm clear?


procedures.
21 Replace the MPT ODU or MPT-HL in alarm at the near end.
Refer to DLP-115 to replace MPT ODU.

Refer to DLP-108 to replace MPT-HL Transceiver.


24 Release the Forced EPS Switch at the near end transmitter using the Craft Terminal.
25 Release the Forced HSB Switch at the near end transmitter using the Craft Terminal.
26 Release the Forced Rx Radio Switch at the near end transmitter using the Craft
Terminal.

3EM23956AL
TAP-110
27 Go to step 31.
28 Release the Lockout EPS Switch at the near end transmitter using the Craft
Terminal.
29 Release the Lockout HSB Switch at the near end transmitter using the Craft
Terminal.
30 Release the Lockout Rx Radio Switch at the near end transmitter using the Craft
Terminal.
32 Did the Loop Problem alarm return?




36 Perform a Forced EPS Switch at the far end transmitter using the Craft Terminal.
37 Perform a Forced HSB Switch at the far end transmitter using the Craft Terminal.
38 Perform a Forced Rx Radio Switch at the far end transmitter using the Craft
Terminal.
39 Go to step 43.
40 Perform a Lockout EPS Switch at the far end transmitter using the Craft Terminal.
41 Perform a Lockout HSB Switch at the far end transmitter using the Craft Terminal.
42 Perform a Lockout Rx Radio Switch at the far end transmitter using the Craft
Terminal.

TAP-110 3EM23956AL
44 Did the Loop Problem alarm clear?


procedures.
46 Replace the MPT ODU or MPT-HL at the far end.
Refer to DLP-115 to replace MPT ODU.

Refer to DLP-108 to replace MPT-HL Transceiver.


49 Release the Forced EPS Switch at the far end transmitter using the Craft Terminal.
50 Release the Forced HSB Switch at the far end transmitter using the Craft Terminal.
51 Release the Forced Rx Radio Switch at the far end transmitter using the Craft
Terminal.
52 Go to step 56.
53 Release the Lockout EPS Switch at the far end transmitter using the Craft Terminal.
54 Release the Lockout HSB Switch at the far end transmitter using the Craft Terminal.
55 Release the Lockout Rx Radio Switch at the far end transmitter using the Craft
Terminal.
57 Did the Loop Problem alarm return?


3EM23956AL
TAP-110

TAP-111 3EM23956AL
TAP-111
Cable LOS
Purpose
This procedure describes how to identify and clear radio alarms on the MOD300.
General
A Cable LOS alarm indicates that a bad cable or cable connection at the IF in/out connector on the
MOD300.
The DemXPIC LOS condition indicates that a bad or missing cable or cable connection at the XPIC
connector on the MPT-HC/MPT-XP/9558HC (MPT ODU).
address.
STEP PROCEDURE
2 Review the output. See Table 111-A for information about clear radio alarms.
Table 111-A. Clear radio alarms

Cable LOS r01s1/board#[3-8] MOD300 Step 3
DemXPIC LOS r01s1/b1[1-6]/daughter#04 MPT ODU connected Step 45
to Core-E,
MSS/CORE
r01s1/b[3-8][1-4]/daughter#04 MPT ODU connected
to MPTACC
r01s[3-8][5-8]b1/daughter#04 MPT ODU connected
to P8ETH
Cable LOS
3 Inspect the indoor IF cable is properly terminated, securely connected, and the run is
not damaged.
Cable LOS 4-119

3EM23956AL
TAP-111
4 Was the indoor IF cable not properly terminated, connected, or the run was damaged?
5 Repair or replace the indoor IF cable.
7 Did the Cable LOS alarm clear?

9 Verify that the MOD300 card in alarm status is Standby.
10 Is the MOD300 card in alarm status Standby?


12 Is the MOD300 card in alarm main or spare?

16 Go to step 21.
4-120 Cable LOS

TAP-111 3EM23956AL
20 CAUTION: Possibility of service interruption. Physically reseating the MOD300 in an

unprotected radio hop causes a loss of traffic on ALL facilities that are associated
with the MOD300 reseat. Schedule appropriate maintenance window per local
21 Physically reseat the MOD300 card in alarm and wait for the status LED to turn
steady green or amber.

24 CAUTION: Possibility of service interruption. Replacing the MOD300 in an

with the MOD300 being replaced. Schedule appropriate maintenance window per
25 Replace the MOD300. See DLP-107 to replace MOD300.
26 CAUTION: Possibility of service interruption. Manually switching traffic causes a


29 Inspect the outdoor IF cable is properly terminated, securely connected, and the run
is not damaged.
30 Was the outdoor IF cable not properly terminated, connected, or the run was
damaged?

31 Repair or replace the outdoor IF cable.
Cable LOS 4-121

3EM23956AL
TAP-111


35 CAUTION: Possibility of service interruption. Releasing Forced/Lockout switching

may cause a disruption to traffic.
36 Was the MOD300 declaring Cable LOS alarm the main or spare?

37 Release the Forced EPS Switch using the Craft Terminal.
38 Release the Forced HSB Switch using the Craft Terminal.
39 Release the Forced Rx Radio Switch using the Craft Terminal.
40 Go to step 75.
41 Release the Lockout EPS Switch using the Craft Terminal.
42 Release the Lockout HSB Switch using the Craft Terminal.
43 Release the Lockout Rx Radio Switch using the Craft Terminal.
44 Go to step 75.
DemXPIC LOS
45 Inspect the XPIC cable is properly terminated, securely connected, and the cable is not
damaged.
46 Is the XPIC cable not properly terminated, connected, or the cable is damaged?

47 Repair or replace the XPIC cable.
4-122 Cable LOS

TAP-111 3EM23956AL
49 Did the DemXPIC LOS alarm clear?

50 Reseat the XPIC cable on the horizontal and vertical MPT ODU.

53 Replace the XPIC cable between the horizontal and vertical MPT ODU.

56 Reseat the XPIC module on horizontal MPT ODU. See DLP-122 to reseat the XPIC
module.

59 Reseat the XPIC module on the vertical MPT ODU. See DLP-122 to reseat the XPIC
module.

62 Replace the XPIC module on the horizontal MPT ODU. See DLP-122 to replace the
XPIC module.
Cable LOS 4-123

3EM23956AL
TAP-111

65 Replace the XPIC module on vertical MPT ODU. See DLP-122 to replace the XPIC
module.

68 Replace the horizontal MPT ODU. See DLP-115 to replace the MPT ODU.

71 Replace the vertical MPT ODU. See DLP-115 to replace the MPT ODU.

4-124 Cable LOS

TAP-112 3EM23956AL
TAP-112
Loss of alignment (MOD300, MPT-HC, MPT-HL, MPT-XP, 9558HC)
Purpose
This procedure describes how to identify and clear Loss Of Alignment alarm on the MOD300,
MPT-HC/MPT-XP/9558HC (MPT ODU), and MPT-HL.
General
A Loss Of Alignment alarm indicates that a delay/loss of alignment between the main and protect
RF paths is detected.
address.
STEP PROCEDURE
2 Review the output. See Table 112-A for information about Loss of Alignment alarms.
Table 112-A. Loss of alignment alarms

Loss of alignment Hitless/Dir#[3-8].[1-4] MPT ODU connected Step 3
to MPTACC
Hitless/Dir#[3-8].[5-8] MPT-HL
Hitless/Dir#[3-8] MOD300
Loss of alignment
3 Verify that the MPT ODU/MPT-HL/ODU300 in alarm status is Standby.
4 Is the MPT ODU/MPT-HL/ODU300 in alarm status Standby?

Loss of alignment (MOD300, MPT-HC, MPT-HL, MPT-XP, 9558HC) 4-125

3EM23956AL
TAP-112
6 Is the MPT ODU/MPT-HL/ODU300 in alarm main or spare?
10 Go to step 14.
If MPT ODU go to step 15.

If MOD300, go to step 46.
15 Is there a second radio channel that is supported by the MPTACC which is associated
with the MPT ODU in alarm?


17 Remove power to the MPT ODU. If powered through the MPTACC, use the Craft
Terminal to disable power, and then reprovision power. If externally powered,
disconnect power to the MPT ODU in alarm and then reconnect power.
19 Did the Loss Of Alignment alarm clear?

4-126 Loss of alignment (MOD300, MPT-HC, MPT-HL, MPT-XP, 9558HC)

TAP-112 3EM23956AL
20 Replace the MPT ODU that is associated with MPTACC in alarm. See DLP-115 to
replace the MPT ODU.
21 Wait for the status LED to turn steady amber.

24 Reseat the MPTACC card that is associated with MPT ODU in alarm.

28 Replace the MPTACC card in alarm. See DLP-114 to replace the MPTACC.


35 Position the MPT-HL Transceiver PA switch to the OFF ‘0’ position.
36 Remove the fuse in the PDU that supplies battery power to the MPT-HL transceiver.
37 Install the fuse in the PDU that supplies battery power to the MPT-HL transceiver.

3EM23956AL
TAP-112
38 Position the MPT-HL Transceiver PA switch to the ON ‘1’ position.

42 Replace the MPT-HL in alarm. See DLP-108 to replace the MPT-HL.

46 Physically reseat the MOD300 card in alarm.

50 Replace the MOD300 card in alarm. See DLP-107 to replace the MOD300.

54 Replace the ODU300 that is associated with MOD300 in alarm. See DLP-109 to
replace the ODU300.

TAP-112 3EM23956AL

60 Go to step 62.

3EM23956AL
TAP-112

TAP-113 3EM23956AL
TAP-113
Loss of frame (MOD300, MPT-HC, MPT-HL, MPT-XP, 9558HC)
Purpose
This procedure describes how to identify and clear Loss of Frame radio alarms on the MOD300,
MPT-HC/MPT-XP/9558HC (MPT ODU), and MPT-HL.
General
A Loss Of Frame alarm indicates the BER has increased to the point that frames are being lost.
Probable causes include far end transmitter problems, RF path problems, or local card failures.
address.
STEP PROCEDURE
2 Review the output. See Table 113-A for information about Loss of Frame radio alarms.
Table 113-A. Loss of frame radio alarms

Loss of frame Radio/Dir#[3-8]/Ch#[0-1] MOD300 Step 3
MSS/CORE
Slot#[3-8]/Port#[5-8]/Ch#[0-1]
Loss of frame
3 Verify that there are no weather-related problems.
Loss of frame (MOD300, MPT-HC, MPT-HL, MPT-XP, 9558HC) 4-131

3EM23956AL
TAP-113
4 Do weather-related problems exist?
If yes, wait for the weather to clear and recheck alarms. Go to step 139.



Unprotected radio configuration


4-132 Loss of frame (MOD300, MPT-HC, MPT-HL, MPT-XP, 9558HC)

TAP-113 3EM23956AL
15 Is the MPT ODU in alarm supported by the Core-E/P8ETH card or MSS-1 Shelf Core?

16 Is there a second radio channel, at the local and/or at the far end, supported by the
MPTACC associated with the MPT ODU in alarm?

17 Is the second radio channel, at the local or at the far end, error-free and alarm free?

18 Reseat the local MPTACC that is associated with the MPT ODU in alarm.

22 Reseat the far end MPTACC that is associated with the MPT ODU in alarm.

26 Replace the local MPTACC that is associated with the MPT ODU in alarm. See
DLP-114 to replace the MPTACC.

3EM23956AL
TAP-113

30 Replace the far end MPTACC that is associated with the MPT ODU in alarm. See

34 Replace the local MPT ODU in alarm. See DLP-115 to replace the MPT ODU.

37 Replace the far end MPT ODU in alarm. See DLP-115 to replace the MPT ODU.

40 Reseat the local MOD300 card.

42 Reseat the far end MOD300 card.


TAP-113 3EM23956AL
44 Replace the local MOD300. See DLP-107 to replace the MOD300.

46 Replace the far end MOD300. See DLP-107 to replace the MOD300.

48 Replace the local ODU300. See DLP-109 to replace the ODU300.

50 Replace the far end ODU300. See DLP-109 to replace the ODU300.

52 Position the local MPT-HL Transceiver PA switch to the OFF ‘0’ position.
53 Remove fuse in PDU suppling battery power to local MPT-HL Transceiver.
54 Install fuse in PDU suppling battery power to local MPT-HL Transceiver.
55 Position the local MPT-HL Transceiver PA switch to the ON ‘1’ position.

57 Position the far end MPT-HL Transceiver PA switch to the OFF ‘0’ position.
58 Remove fuse in PDU suppling battery power to far end MPT-HL Transceiver.
59 Install fuse in PDU suppling battery power to far end MPT-HL Transceiver.
60 Position the far end MPT-HL Transceiver PA switch to the ON ‘1’ position.

3EM23956AL
TAP-113

62 Replace the local MPT-HL. See DLP-108 to replace the MPT-HL Transceiver.

64 Replace the far end MPT-HL. See DLP-108 to replace the MPT-HL Transceiver.

Protected radio configuration
66 Determine the status of the MPT ODU/MPT-HL/MOD300 declaring the Loss Of

Frame alarm.
If Active, go to step 67.

If Standby, go to step 68.

68 Is the MPT ODU/MPT-HL/MOD300 declaring the Loss Of Frame alarm the main or
spare?

69 Perform a Forced Rx Radio Switch using the Craft Terminal on the local
MPT ODU/MPT-HL/MOD300.
70 Perform a Forced Equipment Switch using the Craft Terminal on the local
71 Perform a Forced HSB Switch using the Craft Terminal on the far end
72 Perform a Forced Equipment Switch using the Craft Terminal on the far end

TAP-113 3EM23956AL
73 Go to step 78.
74 Perform a Lockout Rx Radio Switch using the Craft Terminal on the local
75 Perform a Lockout Equipment Switch using the Craft Terminal on the local
76 Perform Lockout HSB Switch using the Craft Terminal on the far end
77 Perform a Lockout Equipment Switch using the Craft Terminal on the far end

79 Reseat the local MOD300 card that is declaring the Loss Of Frame alarm.

81 reseat far end MOD300 card.

83 Replace the local MOD300 that is declaring the Loss Of Frame alarm.
See DLP-107 to replace the MOD300.

85 Replace the far end MOD300 associated with the MOD300 that is declaring the Loss
Of Frame alarm. See DLP-107 to replace the MOD300.

3EM23956AL
TAP-113

87 Replace the local ODU300 associated with the MOD300 that is declaring Loss Of
Frame alarm. See DLP-109 to replace the ODU300.

89 Replace the far end ODU300 associated with the MOD300 that is declaring the Loss
Of Frame alarm. See DLP-109 to replace the ODU300.

91 Is there a second radio channel, at the local and/or at the far end, supported by the
MPTACC that is associated with the MPT ODU in alarm?

92 Is the second radio channel, at the local or at the far end, error-free and alarm free?

93 Reseat the local MPTACC that is associated with the MPT ODU in alarm.

97 Reseat the far end MPTACC that is associated with MPT ODU in alarm.

TAP-113 3EM23956AL

101 Replace the local MPTACC that is associated with MPT ODU in alarm. See DLP-114
to replace the MPTACC.

105 Replace the far end MPTACC that is associated with MPT ODU in alarm. See

109 Replace the local MPT ODU in alarm. See DLP-115 to replace the MPT ODU.

112 Replace the far end MPT ODU in alarm. See DLP-115 to replace the MPT ODU.

115 Position the local MPT-HL Transceiver PA switch to the OFF ‘0’ position.

3EM23956AL
TAP-113
116 Remove the fuse in the PDU that is suppling battery power to the local MPT-HL
transceiver.
117 Install the fuse in the PDU that is suppling battery power to the local MPT-HL
transceiver.
118 Position the local MPT-HL Transceiver PA switch to the ON ‘1’ position.

120 Position the far end MPT-HL Transceiver PA switch to the OFF ‘0’ position.
121 Remove the fuse in the PDU that is suppling battery power to the far end MPT-HL
transceiver.
122 Install the fuse in the PDU that is suppling battery power to the far end MPT-HL
transceiver.
123 Position the far end MPT-HL Transceiver PA switch to the ON ‘1’ position.

125 Replace the local MPT-HL. See DLP-108 to replace the MPT-HL Transceiver.

127 Replace the far end MPT-HL. See DLP-108 to replace the MPT-HL Transceiver.

129 Verify antenna is aligned.
130 Is the antenna aligned?

If no, align the antenna. See 9500 MPR-A Turn-Up manual

TAP-113 3EM23956AL


133 Release the Forced/Lockout Rx Radio Switch using the Craft Terminal on the local
134 Release the Forced/Lockout Equipment Switch using the Craft Terminal on the local
135 Release the Forced/Lockout HSB Switch using the Craft Terminal on the far end
136 Release the Forced/Lockout Equipment Switch using the Craft Terminal on the far
end MPT ODU/MPT-HL/MOD300.
137 Go to step 139.

3EM23956AL
TAP-113

TAP-114 3EM23956AL
TAP-114
RPS path fail (MPT-HC, MPT-HL, MPT-XP, 9558HC)
Purpose
This procedure describes how to identify and clear an RPS Path Fail alarm on the
MPT-HC/MPT-XP/9558HC (MPT ODU) and MPT-HL.
General
An RPS Path Fail alarm that is declared against the MPT-HL indicates that a failure is detected on
the RPS coupler port between the MPT-HL protection pair.
An RPS Path Fail alarm against the MPT ODU indicates that a communication failure is detected
between the MPT ODUs; only reported for MPT ODUs working in 1+1 configuration with Virtual
Protection.
address.
STEP PROCEDURE
2 Review the output. See Table 114-A for RPS Path Fail alarms.
Table 114-A. RPS path fail alarms

RPS path fail RadioProt/Dir#[3-8][5-8] MPT-HL Step 3
RadioProt/Dir#[3-8][1-4] MPT ODU connected
to MPTACC
RPS path fail
3 Using the Craft Terminal, determine which MPT ODU/MPT-HL status is Standby.

RPS path fail (MPT-HC, MPT-HL, MPT-XP, 9558HC) 4-143

3EM23956AL
TAP-114
5 Retrieve the alarms for the local end of the radio direction using the Alarm Monitor.
6 Determine all radio alarms that are declared against the radio direction declaring RPS
Path Fail and troubleshoot accordingly.
8 Did RPS Path Fail alarm clear?

9 Retrieve the alarms for the far end of the radio direction using Alarm Monitor.
10 Determine all radio alarms declared against the radio direction declaring RPS Path
Fail and troubleshoot accordingly.
12 Did the RPS Path Fail alarm clear?

13 On the MPT-HL with status of Standby, position the PA switch to the OFF ‘0’ position.
14 Remove the fuse in the PDU that is suppling battery power to the MPT-HL with a
status of Standby.
15 Install the fuse in the PDU that is suppling battery power to MPT-HL with a status of
Standby.
16 On the MPT-HL with status of Standby, position the PA switch to the ON ‘1’ position.

20 Replace the MPT-HL with status of Standby. See DLP-108 to replace MPT-HL.
4-144 RPS path fail (MPT-HC, MPT-HL, MPT-XP, 9558HC)

TAP-114 3EM23956AL


25 Is the MPT-HL card in alarm main or spare?

29 Go to step 33.
33 On the MPT-HL with status of Standby, position the PA switch to the OFF ‘0’ position.
34 Remove the fuse in the PDU that is suppling the battery power to the MPT-HL with a
status of Standby.
35 Install the use in the PDU that is suppling battery power to the MPT-HL with a status
of Standby.
36 On the MPT-HL with status of Standby, position the PA switch to the ON ‘1’ position.

40 Replace MPT-HL with status of Standby. See DLP-108 to replace the MPT-HL.
RPS path fail (MPT-HC, MPT-HL, MPT-XP, 9558HC) 4-145

3EM23956AL
TAP-114


48 Go to step 50.
4-146 RPS path fail (MPT-HC, MPT-HL, MPT-XP, 9558HC)

TAP-115 3EM23956AL
TAP-115
Rx fail (MOD300)
Purpose
This procedure describes how to identify and clear Rx Fail alarms on MOD300.
General
An Rx Fail alarm indicates that a failure is detected in the receive direction of the MOD300 RF
receiver and includes no input signal.
address.
STEP PROCEDURE
2 Review the output. See Table 115-A for information about Rx Fail alarms.
Table 115-A. Rx fail alarms

Rx fail Radio/Dir#[3-8]/Ch#[0-1] MOD300 Step 3
Rx fail
3 Verify there are no weather-related problems existing.
4 Do weather-related problems exist?
If yes, wait for weather to clear and recheck alarms. Go to step 72.
Rx fail (MOD300) 4-147

3EM23956AL
TAP-115
8 Is RSL above RX threshold?

11 Did the Rx Fail alarm clear?



14 Is the MOD300 in alarm the main or spare?

15 Perform a Forced EPS Switch using the Craft Terminal on the local MOD300.
16 Perform a Forced HSB Switch using the Craft Terminal on the local MOD300.
17 Perform a Forced Rx Radio Switch using the Craft Terminal on the local MOD300.
18 Go to step 24.
19 Perform Lockout EPS Switch using the Craft Terminal on the local MOD300.
20 Perform Lockout HSB Switch using the Craft Terminal on the local MOD300.
21 Perform Lockout Rx Radio Switch using the Craft Terminal on the local MOD300.
22 Go to step 24.
4-148 Rx fail (MOD300)

TAP-115 3EM23956AL
23 CAUTION: Possibility of service interruption. Reseat the MOD300 in an unprotected

radio hop causes a loss of traffic on ALL facilities that are associated with the
MOD300 reseat. Schedule appropriate maintenance window per local practices and
procedures.
24 Reseat the MOD300 card in alarm. Physically remove the card and reinsert.



29 Is the MOD300 in alarm main or spare?

30 Perform a Forced EPS Switch using the Craft Terminal on the far end MOD300.
31 Perform a Forced HSB Switch using the Craft Terminal on the far end MOD300.
32 Perform a Forced Rx Radio Switch using the Craft Terminal on the far end MOD300.
33 Go to step 38.
34 Perform Lockout EPS Switch using the Craft Terminal on the far end MOD300.
35 Perform Lockout HSB Switch using the Craft Terminal on the far end MOD300.
36 Perform Lockout Rx Radio Switch using the Craft Terminal on the far end MOD300.
37 CAUTION: Possibility of service interruption. reseating the MOD300 in an

with the MOD300 reseat. Schedule appropriate maintenance window per local
38 Reseat the far end MOD300 card associated with the card in alarm. Physically remove

3EM23956AL
TAP-115


42 Replace the near end MOD300. See DLP-107 to replace the MOD300.


46 Replace the far end MOD300. See DLP-107 to replace the MOD300.

49 Replace the near end ODU300. See DLP-109 to replace the ODU300.
51 Did Rx Fail alarm clear?

52 Replace the far end ODU300. See DLP-109 to replace the ODU300.

TAP-115 3EM23956AL
54 Did Loss Of Frame alarm clear?

55 Verify antenna is aligned.
56 Is antenna aligned?

If no, align the antenna. See the 9500 MPR-A Turn-Up Manual



61 Release the Forced/Lockout EPS Switch using the Craft Terminal on the far end
MOD300.
62 Release the Forced/Lockout HSB Switch using the Craft Terminal on the far end
MOD300.
63 Release the Forced/Lockout Rx Radio Switch using the Craft Terminal on the far end
MOD300.
64 Go to step 66.



3EM23956AL
TAP-115
67 Release the Forced/Lockout EPS Switch using the Craft Terminal on the local
MOD300.
68 Release the Forced/Lockout HSB Switch using the Craft Terminal on the local
MOD300.
69 Release the Forced/Lockout Rx Radio Switch using the Craft Terminal on the local
MOD300.
70 Go to step 72.

TAP-116 3EM23956AL
TAP-116
Housekeeping alarms
Purpose
This procedure describes how to identify and clear Housekeeping alarms (External Point Input) on
AUX card.
General
Housekeeping Alarm inputs are external alarms that are monitored by the NE. Housekeeping
alarms are provisionable for alarm state active low or high.
Housekeeping Alarm Input [1-6] indicates that the external alarm point is active, improperly
configured, or improperly provisioned.
address.
STEP PROCEDURE
2 Review the output. See Table 116-A for information about Housekeeping alarms.
Table 116-A. Housekeeping alarms

Housekeeping alarm ExtPt/Input#[1-6] AUX Step 3
ExtPt/Input#[1-3] MSS/AUX
Housekeeping alarm
3 Verify the equipment that is associated with housekeeping alarm input which is in the
alarm state.
4 Is the equipment that is associated with housekeeping alarm input [1-6] in the alarm
state?
Housekeeping alarms 4-153

3EM23956AL
TAP-116
5 Resolve the problem with external equipment generating the housekeeping alarm.
6 Did the Housekeeping Alarm Input [1-6] clear?

7 Verify the Housekeeping Alarm Input provisioning for housekeeping alarm input in
alarm.
8 Correct the provisioning as required.

11 Verify the Housekeeping Alarm Input configuration for housekeeping alarm input in
alarm.
12 Correct the configuration as required.

4-154 Housekeeping alarms

TAP-117 3EM23956AL
TAP-117
LAG alarms (Core-E, MPT-HC, MPT-HL, MPT-XP, ODU300, 9558HC,
MSS-1 shelf Core)
Purpose
This procedure describes how to identify and clear LAG alarms on the Core-E,
MPT-HC/MPT-XP/9558HC (MPT ODU), MPT-HL, ODU300, and MSS-1 shelf Core.
General
A Degrade alarm indicates that a member of an Ethernet or Radio LAG group has no activity. A
Degrade is declared when the number of active ports in the LAG are greater than zero and less than
the LAG size.
A Loss of Signal alarm indicates that ALL members of an Ethernet or Radio LAG have no activity.
A Loss of Signal is declared when the number of active ports in the LAG equals zero.
address.
STEP PROCEDURE
1 Using the Alarm Monitor, retrieve ALL alarms.
2 Review the output. See Table 117-A for information about LAG alarms.
Table 117-A. LAG alarms

Degrade EthLAG#[1-14] Core-E, MSS/CORE Step 3
RadioLAG#[1-14] MPT ODU, MPT-HL,
ODU300
Loss of signal EthLAG#[1-14] Core-E, MSS/CORE Step 8
RadioLAG#[1-14] MPT ODU, MPT-HL,
ODU300
Degrade
LAG alarms (Core-E, MPT-HC, MPT-HL, MPT-XP, ODU300, 9558HC, MSS-1 shelf Core) 4-155
3EM23956AL
TAP-117
4 Identify the alarms that are declared against members of the LAG group. If alarms
exists, see IXL-101 and troubleshoot accordingly.
5 Did the alarms exist on the LAG group members and were they cleared?
7 Did the Degrade alarm clear?

Loss of signal
9 Identify the alarms that are declared against members of the LAG group. If alarms
exists, see IXL-101 and troubleshoot accordingly.
10 Did the alarms exist on the LAG members and were they cleared?

12 Did the Loss of Signal alarm clear?

4-156 LAG alarms (Core-E, MPT-HC, MPT-HL, MPT-XP, ODU300, 9558HC, MSS-1 shelf Core)
TAP-118 3EM23956AL
TAP-118
Ethernet connectivity fault management alarms
Purpose
This procedure describes how to identify and clear Ethernet Connectivity Fault Management
(ECFM) alarms.
General
An Eth OAM Loss of Continuity alarm indicates that a MEP received no CCM frames from a peer
MEP during an interval equal to 3.5 times the CCM transmission interval configured at the MEP.
This is caused by a failure in the network located between the local and far end of the MEP.
An Eth OAM MisMerge Condition alarm indicates that a MEP received a CCM frame with expected
MD Level but unexpected MA ID. The MA ID is the MD Name appended with the MA Format.
An Eth OAM Remote Defect Indication alarm indicates that a MEP received a CCM frame with the
RDI field set.
An Eth OAM Unexpected Level alarm indicates that a MEP received a CCM frame with the incorrect
MD Level. The MEP expects to receive a MD level [0-7] either equal to or higher than the provisioned
MD Level.
An Eth OAM UnexpectedMEPID alarm indicates that received MEPID value is different than the
expected MEPID [1-8191]. The MEP expects to receive the provisioned MEPID.
Eth OAM Unexpected Period alarm indicates that received MEP Transmission Interval value is
different than the expected MEP Transmission Interval [300-hundred-hertz, ten-ms, hundred-ms,
one-sec, ten-sec, one-min, ten-min]. The MEP expects to receive the same value inside the CCM frame
as the provisioned Transmission Interval.
address.
See the 9500 MPR-A Operation and Administration (PN 3EM23954AL) WT CLI Tool Reference
Guide for information about how to execute the commands that are described in this procedure.
STEP PROCEDURE
2 Review the output. See Table 118-A for information about ECFM alarms.
Ethernet connectivity fault management alarms 4-157

3EM23956AL
TAP-118
Table 118-A. ECFM alarms

Eth OAM loss of MEP#MDID[1-16]#MA ID Core-E, MSS/CORE Step 3
continuity [1-512]#MEPID[1-8191]
Eth OAM MisMerge MEP#MDID[1-16]#MA ID Core-E, MSS/CORE Step 7
condition [1-512]#MEPID[1-8191]
Eth OAM remote defect MEP#MDID[1-16]#MA ID Core-E, MSS/CORE Step 12
indication [1-512]#MEPID[1-8191]
Eth OAM unexpected MEP#MDID[1-16]#MA ID Core-E, MSS/CORE Step 17
level [1-512]#MEPID[1-8191]
Eth OAM MEP#MDID[1-16]#MA ID Core-E, MSS/CORE Step 22
unexpectedMEPID [1-512]#MEPID[1-8191]
Eth OAM unexpected MEP#MDID[1-16]#MA ID Core-E, MSS/CORE Step 27
period [1-512]#MEPID[1-8191]
Eth OAM loss of continuity
3 Locate the failure in the network.
If MIPs were created on the MEP, use the Link Trace command using WT CLI Tool.
See WT CLI Tool Reference Guide for more information.
Otherwise, Retrieve the alarms using the Alarm Monitor and locate alarms associated
with the path between the local and far end of the MEP.
4 Were the alarms identified and cleared between the local and far end of the MEP?
6 Did the Eth OAM Loss of Continuity Condition alarm clear?

Eth OAM MisMerge condition
7 Retrieve MA ID for both ends of the MEP using WT CLI Tool. See WT CLI Tool
Reference Guide for more information.
8 Determine which MA ID value(s) are incorrect.
4-158 Ethernet connectivity fault management alarms

TAP-118 3EM23956AL
9 Reprovision the MA ID value(s) according to the results of step 8.
11 Did the Eth OAM MisMerge Condition alarm clear?

Eth OAM remote defect indication
12 Retrieve the alarms on the far end of the MEP using Alarm Monitor.
13 Check the far end for the one or more of the above RDI set conditions and troubleshoot
accordingly.
14 Were the RDI set condition cleared at the far end of the MEP?

16 Did the Eth OAM Remote Defect Indication Level alarm clear?

Eth OAM unexpected level
17 Retrieve the MD Level for both ends of the MEP using WT CLI Tool. See WT CLI Tool
18 Determine which MD Level values are incorrect.
19 Reprovision the MD Level values according to the results of step 18.
21 Did the Eth OAM Unexpected Level alarm clear?

Eth OAM unexpectedMEPID
22 Retrieve MEPID for both ends of the MEP using WT CLI Tool. See WT CLI Tool
Ethernet connectivity fault management alarms 4-159

3EM23956AL
TAP-118
23 Determine which MEPID value(s) are incorrect.
24 Reprovision the MEPID value(s) according to the results of step 23.
26 Did the Eth OAM UnexpectedMEPID alarm clear?

Eth OAM unexpected period
27 Retrieve the MEP Transmission Interval for both ends using WT CLI Tool. See WT
CLI Tool Reference Guide for more information.
28 Determine which MEP Transmission Interval values are incorrect.
29 Reprovision the MEP Transmission Interval according to the results of step 28.
NOTE: Eth OAM Unexpected Period alarm requires 3.5 times the MEP Transmission
Interval to clear the alarm. For MEP Transmission Interval provisioned one-sec, the
alarm requires 3.5 seconds to clear. For MEP Transmission Interval provisioned 10-
min, the alarm requires 35 minutes to clear.
31 Did the Eth OAM Unexpected Period alarm clear?

4-160 Ethernet connectivity fault management alarms

TAP-119 3EM23956AL
TAP-119
Clock failure (MPT-HC, MPT-HL, MPT-XP, 9558HC)
Purpose
This procedure describes how to identify and clear Clock Failure alarm on the
MPT-HC/MPT-XP/9558HC (MPT ODU) and MPT-HL.
General
A Clock Failure alarm indicates that the MPT ODU or MPT-HL is unable to lock the air Tx symbol
rate to the NE clock.
address.
STEP PROCEDURE
2 Review the output. See Table 119-A for information about Clock Failure alarms.
Table 119-A. Clock failure alarm

Clock failure Radio/Dir#1.[1-6]/ MPT ODU connected Step 3
MSS/CORE
Slot#[3-8]/Port#[5-8]/Ch#[0-1]
Clock failure (MPT-HC, MPT-HL, MPT-XP, 9558HC) 4-161

3EM23956AL
TAP-119
Clock failure

Unprotected Radio Configuration
4 CAUTION: Possibility of service interruption. Power Cycling an in-service MPT ODU

or MPT-HL in an unprotected link causes a loss of traffic on ALL facilities that are
associated with the MPT ODU or MPT-HL in alarm. Schedule appropriate
maintenance window per local practices and procedures.
5 CAUTION: Possibility of service interruption. Replacing the MPT ODU or MPT-HL in

an unprotected link causes a loss of traffic on ALL facilities that are associated with
the MPT ODU or MPT-HL in alarm. Schedule appropriate maintenance window per
7 Verify that it is appropriate to proceed with clear Clock Failure procedure or

appropriate maintenance window is scheduled per local practices and procedures.
8 Is it appropriate to proceed with clear Clock Failure procedure?

10 Is the MPT ODU in alarm associated with the Core-E/P8ETH card or MSS-1 shelf
Core?

MPT ODU connected to Core-E/P8ETH card or MSS-1 shelf Core
11 CAUTION: Possibility of service interruption. Power Cycling the MPT ODU in an

the MPT ODU in alarm. Schedule appropriate maintenance window per local
4-162 Clock failure (MPT-HC, MPT-HL, MPT-XP, 9558HC)

TAP-119 3EM23956AL
If MPT ODU is powered through MSS-1 shelf Core PFoE port, power cycle the
MPT ODU. From the MPT Main View, Power Source tab, Settings tab, disable power
source. Wait 10 seconds and then reapply power source.
If MPT ODU is powered through a power injector card/power injector box, disconnect
the Ethernet+Data cable connection to the MPT ODU at the power injector card/box.
Wait 10 seconds and reconnect.
If MPT ODU is powered with connection to MPT Power Unit/MPT Extended Power
Unit, disconnect the power cable connection to the MPT ODU at the MPT Power
Unit/MPT Extended Power Unit. Wait 10 seconds and reconnect.
13 Dialog Failure is declared against the MPT ODU. Wait for Dialog Failure condition to
clear before proceeding.
15 Did the Clock Failure alarm clear?

16 CAUTION: Possibility of service interruption. Replacing the MPT ODU in an

unprotected link causes a loss of traffic on ALL facilities that are associated with

MPT ODU connected to MPTACC card
20 CAUTION: Possibility of service interruption. Power Cycling the MPT ODU in an


3EM23956AL
TAP-119
21 Power cycle the MPT ODU. From the MPT Main View, Power Source tab, Settings tab,
disable power source. Wait 10 seconds and then reapply power source.



MPT-HL
29 CAUTION: Possibility of service interruption. Power Cycling the MPT-HL in an

the MPT-HL in alarm. Schedule appropriate maintenance window per local practices
and procedures.
31 Remove the fuse in the PDU that is suppling battery power to the MPT-HL
transceiver.
32 Install the fuse in PDU that is suppling battery power to the MPT-HL transceiver.

TAP-119 3EM23956AL

36 CAUTION: Possibility of service interruption. Replacing the MPT-HL in an

the MPT-HL in alarm. Schedule appropriate maintenance window per local practices
and procedures.
37 Replace the local MPT-HL. See DLP-108 to replace the MPT-HL transceiver.

Protected radio configuration

40 Determine the status of MPT ODU/MPT-HL declaring Clock Failure alarm.
If Active, go to step 41.

If Standby, go to step 42.


43 Is the MPT ODU/MPT-HL declaring Clock Failure alarm the main or spare?

45 Perform a Forced Equipment Switch using the Craft Terminal.
47 Go to step 51.

3EM23956AL
TAP-119
49 Perform a Lockout Equipment Switch using the Craft Terminal.

MPT ODU connected to MPTACC card
52 Power cycle the MPT ODU. From the MPT main View, Power Source tab, Settings tab,
disable power source. Wait 10 seconds and then reapply power source.

56 Replace the MPT ODU in alarm. See DLP-115 to replace the MPT ODU.

MPT-HL
60 Remove the fuse in the PDU that is suppling battery power to the MPT-HL
transceiver.
61 Install the fuse in the PDU that is suppling battery power to the MPT-HL transceiver.

TAP-119 3EM23956AL

65 Replace the MPT-HL. See DLP-108 to replace MPT-HL Transceiver.

68 CAUTION: Possibility of service interruption. Releasing Forced/Lockout

EPS/HSB/RX Radio switch causes a disruption to traffic.
70 Release the Forced/Lockout Equipment Switch using the Craft Terminal.
72 Go to step 74.

3EM23956AL
TAP-119

DLP-100 3EM23956AL
DLP-100
Detailed Level Procedures (DLPs)
Mechanical card removal and installation

Purpose
This procedure describes how to remove and install cards mechanically in the 9500 MPR-A.
General
This procedure addresses only mechanical card removal and installation.
See the 9500 MPR-A Product Information (PN 3EM23952AL) to determine card location and type.
STEP PROCEDURE
1 DANGER: Possibility of personal injury. Modules can be installed or removed with

bay power on. Hazardous electrical potentials are present; use extreme care when
installing or removing cards with power on.

unprotected link causes loss of traffic. Removing an Active card in a protected link
requires switching the traffic onto the Standby card. Do applicable trouble clearing
and logical replacement procedures before proceeding with this procedure.
3 WARNING: Possibility of equipment damage. Modules contain static-sensitive

devices. These devices can be damaged by static discharge. See introduction
for special handling instructions.
4 Which procedure to perform?
If card removal, go to step 5.

If card installation, go to step 9.
Card removal
5 Loosen the screws on the front of the card to be replaced.
6 Unlock the extraction tabs on the front of the card to be replaced.
7 Remove the card from the slot.
8 Go to step 16.
Mechanical card removal and installation 5-1

3EM23956AL
DLP-100
Card installation
9 Install the new card in the slot.
10 Lock the extraction tabs on the front of the new card.
11 Align the retaining screws.
12 Start both screws before tightening
13 WARNING: Possibility of equipment damage. Failure to start both screws

prior to tightening may cause screws to be cross threaded and possibly
resulting in broken retaining screws.
14 Tighten the screws on the front of the new card.
15 Return to the point in the DLP that referenced this procedure.
5-2 Mechanical card removal and installation

DLP-101 3EM23956AL
DLP-101
MPT-HL transceiver air filter replacement
Purpose
This procedure describes how to check and replace a dust filter on the MPT-HL Transceiver.
General
STEP PROCEDURE
1 WARNING: Possibility of equipment damage. Possibility of damage to

equipment. Modules contain static-sensitive devices. These devices can be
damaged by static discharge. See the introduction for special handling
instructions.
2 Loosen the screws securing the dust filter and cover to the front of the MPT-HL
Transceiver.
3 Remove the filter from the MPT-HL Transceiver.
4 Is the dust filter dirty?
If the dust filter is dirty, go to step 5.

If the dust filter is clean, go to step 6.
5 Replace filter with a clean filter.
6 Install the filter and cover on to the MPT-HL transceiver.
7 Tighten the screws securing the dust filter and cover to the MPT-HL transceiver.
MPT-HL transceiver air filter replacement 5-3

3EM23956AL
DLP-101
5-4 MPT-HL transceiver air filter replacement

DLP-102 3EM23956AL
DLP-102
SFP replacement
Purpose
This procedure describes how to replace an SFP on a Core-E, MPT-HC/MPT-XP/9558HC

(MPT ODU), MPT-HL, P8ETH, SDHACC cards or MSS-1 shelf.
General
address.
STEP PROCEDURE
1 WARNING: Possibility of equipment damage. Modules contain static-sensitive

devices. These devices can be damaged by static discharge. See the
introduction for special handling instructions.
2 Ensure that the extractor for the SFP, PN 3AL 81424 AAAA, is available.
3 Is the equipment protected?
4 Is the SFP port to be replaced in the Standby state?

6 Is the SFP port to be replaced the main or spare?
8 Go to step 11.
SFP replacement 5-5

3EM23956AL
DLP-102
10 CAUTION: Possibility of service interruption. Replacing SFP in an unprotected

system causes a loss of traffic on ALL facilities that are associated with the SFP
procedures.
11 Remove the fibers from the SFP to be replaced.
12 Insert the extractor into the SFP to be replaced. The extractor locks into place when it
is secure.
13 Push the lever in on the left side of the extractor to unlock the SFP from the socket.
14 Gently pull the SFP out of the slot and remove it from the card.
15 Place the new SFP into the appropriate SFP slot.
16 Reconnect the fibers to the new SFP.
17 Ensure that there are no alarms declared against the SFP or its associated equipment.
If there are alarms, see IXL-101.

If there are no alarms, go to step 18.
18 Ensure that traffic is running.
If traffic is running, go to step 19.

If traffic is not running, go to step 23.
19 Is equipment protected?


22 Go to step 24.
5-6 SFP replacement

DLP-103 3EM23956AL
DLP-103
Core switching module (Core-E) replacement
Purpose
This procedure describes how to replace a Core Switching Module (Core-E) in an MSS-4/MSS-8 shelf.
Perquisites
Although this procedure is typically used to replace a failed (inactive) component, always verify the
component state before removal.
General
On the Core-E flash card(s) the NE configuration and license key data is stored.
When replacing the Core-E card on an NE in the protected core configuration, and the active Core-E
card is operating properly, the flash card on the replacement Core-E card will synchronize to the NE
database stored on the active Core-E card. In this configuration a flash card from another shelf type
or Core position could be used on the replacement Core-E card if necessary.
When replacing the Core-E card on an NE in the unprotected core configuration, it is mandatory to
transfer the flash card from the replaced Core-E card to the replacement Core-E card. Failure to
transfer the flash card will result in a loss of the NE database and a system that may not boot up
properly. At a minimum ALL NE configuration will be lost and the NE configuration previously
stored on the flash card will be applied to the NE.
In this procedure, the MSS-4/MSS-8 shelf main Core-E is resident in slot 1. The protect Core-E is
resident in slot 2 if equipped.
All MSS-4/MSS-8 shelf plug-ins can be removed and installed with power applied.
STEP PROCEDURE
1 DANGER: Possibility of personal injury. Circuit packs can be installed or removed

with the bay power on. Hazardous electrical potentials are present; use extreme
care when installing or removing circuit packs with the power on.
2 CAUTION: Possibility of service interruption. All slots must be filled with a

peripheral plug-in card or a blank panel. Failure to do so compromises the EMC
integrity and cooling air from the fan.
Core switching module (Core-E) replacement 5-7

3EM23956AL
DLP-103

requires switching the traffic onto the Standby card.
4 CAUTION: Possibility of service interruption. If the Main Core-E in slot 1 fails,

traffic/services protection and control platform protection switches to the protected
(spare) Core-E in slot 2. Loopbacks and all other manual operations, such as
Forced/Lockout switch and Tx Mute, is lost (deactivated). Alarms previously active
are newly detected and reported using notification, with a new time stamp.
5 CAUTION: Possibility of service interruption. If the main Core-E fails, traffic and
platform data will switch to the protected Core-E automatically. Do not remove the
power from the NE during the removal and replacement of the failed main Core-E.
6 CAUTION: Possibility of service interruption. Do not swap the main Core-E flash
card with the protect Core-E flash card which results in a system that cannot
properly boot-up.
7 WARNING: Possibility of equipment damage. Circuit packs contain

static-sensitive devices. These devices can be damaged by static discharge. See
the introduction for special handling instructions.
8 WARNING: Possibility of equipment damage. When installing a plug-in,

ensure its backplane connector is correctly engaged before applying sufficient
pressure to bring the plug-in panel flush with the front panel. Improper
alignment can result in damaged pins on the backplane connector and/or
damage to the plug-in connector.
9 WARNING: Possibility of equipment damage. Plug-ins must be withdrawn

and inserted using their finger-grip fastener pulls. Never withdraw or insert
using attached cables. Pulling on the cables may damage the cable, plug-in
connector, and/or plug-in card connector attachment.

11 Is the Core-E that is to be replaced in a protected system?

5-8 Core switching module (Core-E) replacement

DLP-103 3EM23956AL
Protected Core-E replacement procedures
12 Is the power still applied to the MSS-4/MSS-8 shelf where the Core-E is to be replaced
is equipped?

Shelf power still applied to MSS-4/MSS-8 shelf
13 Verify the status of the other Core-E card (the Core-E card not being replaced) is
normal and communicates properly.
14 Is the status of the other Core-E card normal and communicates properly?

15 Is the Core-E to be replaced the main or spare?

16 CAUTION: Possibility of service interruption. Forced EPS switch may cause a hit to
traffic.
17 On the Protection Schemes tab, perform a Forced EPS Switch Main Core-E.
18 Go to step 20.
19 On the Protection Schemes tab, perform a Lockout of Spare Core-E.
20 Verify that the Core-E to be replaced status is Standby.
21 Remove the Core-E to be replaced. See DLP-100 for information about how to remove
the card.
22 Remove the flash card from the Core-E card removed in step 21 and install into the
replacement Core-E card.

24 Install the replacement Core-E into shelf. See DLP-100 for information about how to
install the card.

3EM23956AL
DLP-103
26 Verify the communication with the replacement Core-E using the Craft Terminal.
27 Verify the replacement Core-E status using the Craft Terminal.
28 Does the replacement Core-E communicate properly and is the status is normal?

29 Is replaced Core-E the main or spare?

30 CAUTION: Possibility of service interruption. Releasing Forced EPS switch may

31 On the Protection Schemes tab, release the Forced Switch Main Core-E.
32 Go to step 67.
33 On the Protection Schemes tab, release Lockout of Spare Core-E.
34 Go to step 67.
Shelf power has been turned off
the card.
36 CAUTION: Possibility of service interruption. Do not swap the active Core-E flash
card (i,e, the Core-E card which is not being replaced) with a flash card from another
Core-E card.
38 Turn on shelf power and wait for the installed Core-E status LED to turn steady green.

install the card.

DLP-103 3EM23956AL
44 Does replacement Core-E communicate properly and is the status is normal?

Unprotected Core-E replacement procedure
45 Is power still applied to MSS-4/MSS-8 shelf where the Core-E to be replaced is

equipped?

Shelf power still applied to MSS-4/MSS-8 shelf

unprotected system causes loss of traffic.
47 Remove Core-E to be replaced. See DLP-100 for information about how to remove the
card.
card with a flash card from a different Core-E card.

install the card.
52 Wait for the status LED to turn steady green.
55 Does the replacement Core-E communicate properly and is the status is normal?


3EM23956AL
DLP-103
the card.
card with the a flash card from a different Core-E card.

install the card.
61 Turn on the shelf power.
62 Wait for the replaced Core-E status LED to turn steady green.
65 Does the replacement Core-E communicate properly and is the status normal?


DLP-104 3EM23956AL
DLP-104
Core switching module (Core-E) flash card replacement
Purpose
This procedure describes how to replace a Flash Card located on the Core Switching Module
(Core-E).
Prerequisites
Although this procedure is typically used to replace a failed (inactive) component, always verify
General
In this procedure, the main Core-E is resident in slot 1. The protect Core-E is resident in slot 2 if
equipped.
For a Non Protected system, reboot for the Main Flash Card which can take up to three minutes.
Replacement Flash Card must be pre-loaded with the MAC Address and the RMU Serial Number
associated with the NE.
Record the MAC Address and the RMU Serial Number using the Craft Terminal. Use this
information to obtain a replacement Flash Card.
• MAC Address (located on the Systems Setting screen and in the configuration file,
see Bridge Address)
• RMU Serial number (located on the SW License screen)
NOTE: If the MAC Address and RMU Serial Number information is not accessible using the Craft
Terminal, it is also located on the label adhered to the flash card.
Verify that the RMU Serial Number loaded on the replacement flash card meets the following
compatibility rules:
• Main flash card (Core-E slot 1) and spare flash card (Core-E slot 2) must be loaded
with the same RMU Serial number.
• License capacity must be the same across a hop
• MAC Address of the replacement Flash Card must match the MAC Address of the
Flash Card to be replaced
Do not swap the main Core-E flash card with the protect Core-E flash card which results in a system
that cannot properly boot-up.
All plug-ins can be removed and installed with power applied.
Core switching module (Core-E) flash card replacement 5-13

3EM23956AL
DLP-104
STEP PROCEDURE

with bay power on. Hazardous electrical potentials are present; use extreme care
when installing or removing circuit packs with power on.

3 CAUTION: Possibility of service interruption. Removing an In-Service card in an

4 CAUTION: Possibility of service interruption. If the Main Core-E in slot 1 fails,

traffic/services protection and control platform protection switches to the protected
(spare) Core-E in slot 2. Loopbacks and all other manual operations, such as
Forced/Lockout switch and Tx Mute and tx mute, are lost (deactivated). Alarms
previously active are newly detected and reported using notification, with a new
time stamp.
5 CAUTION: Possibility of service interruption. If the main Core-E fails, traffic and
platform data switches to the protected Core-E automatically. Do not remove power
from the NE during the removal and replacement of the failed main Core-E.
6 CAUTION: Possibility of service interruption. In a Protected system, reboot for both

Main and Spare Flash Cards can take up to 15 minutes. The flashing status green
LED indicates that a reboot is in progress. Status LED turns solid green at
completion of reboot.
properly boot-up.
8 CAUTION: Possibility of service interruption. Replacing the Flash Card with one
which is not correctly programmed with the correct MAC Address and RMU serial
number may result in a loss of traffic. STOP this procedure immediately. Perform
this procedure in its entirety after an appropriate replacement Flash Card is
available.
5-14 Core switching module (Core-E) flash card replacement

DLP-104 3EM23956AL




13 Verify that the replacement Flash Card and the Flash Card to be replaced are loaded
with the correct MAC Address and RMU Serial number:
– MAC Address (located on the Systems Setting screen and in the configuration
file, see Bridge Address)
– RMU Serial number (located on the SW License screen)
NOTE: If this information is not available using the Craft Terminal, it is also located
on the label adhered to the flash card itself.
14 Does the MAC Address and RMU Serial numbers match?

15 Record the MAC Address and RMU Serial numbers. Use this information to obtain an
appropriate replacement Flash Card.
16 CAUTION: Possibility of service interruption. Replacing the Flash Card with one
which is not programmed with the correct MAC Address and RMU Serial number
results in a loss of traffic. Perform the following activities:
a. STOP this procedure immediately.
b. Procure a replacement Flash Card loaded with the correct MAC Address and RMU Serial
number.
c. Perform this procedure in its entirety after an appropriate replacement Flash Card is
available.

3EM23956AL
DLP-104
17 Is the flash card on the Core-E to be replaced in a protected system?

Flash card replacement on protected Core-E configuration
18 Is the power still applied to MSS-4/8 shelf where flash card on the Core-E to be
replaced is equipped?

Shelf power still applied to MSS-4/8 shelf
19 Verify that the status of the other Core-E card (the Core-E card on which the flash card
is not being replaced) is normal and communicates properly.
20 Is status of the other Core-E card normal and communicates properly?

21 Is the Core-E equipped with flash card to be replaced the main or spare?
If Main, go to step 22.

If Spare, go to step 25.
22 CAUTION: Possibility of service interruption. Forced EPS switch may cause a

23 On the Protection Schemes tab, perform a Forced EPS Switch Main Core-E.
24 Go to step 26.
25 On the Protection Schemes tab, perform a Lockout EPS of Spare Core-E.
26 Verify the Core-E that is equipped with flash card to be replaced status is Standby.
27 Remove the Core-E that is equipped with flash card to be replaced. See DLP-100 for
information about how to remove the card.
28 Remove the flash card from the Core-E.
properly boot-up.

DLP-104 3EM23956AL
30 Install the replacement flash card onto the Core-E.

32 Install the Core-E into shelf. See DLP-100 for information about how to install the
card.
34 Verify the communication with the Core-E with replacement flash card using the
Craft Terminal.
35 Verify the Core-E with replacement flash card status using the Craft Terminal.
36 Does the Core-E with replacement flash card communicate properly and status
normal?

37 Is replaced Core-E the main or spare?

38 CAUTION: Possibility of service interruption. Releasing Forced EPS switch may

39 On the Protection Schemes tab, release the Forced EPS Switch Main Core-E.
40 Go to step 77.
41 On the Protection Schemes tab, release Lockout EPS of Spare Core-E.
42 Go to step 77.
43 Remove the Core-E equipped with flash card to be replaced. See DLP-100 for
information about how to remove the card.
card with the protect Core-E flash card. This will result in a system that will not
properly boot-up.

3EM23956AL
DLP-104
46 Install replacement flash card onto the Core-E.
47 Turn on shelf power and wait for installed Core-E status LED to turn steady green

prior to tightening may cause screw(s) to be cross threaded and possibly
49 Install Core-E into shelf. See DLP-100 for information about how to remove the card.
51 Verify communication with the Core-E with replacement flash card using the Craft
Terminal.
52 Verify Core-E with replacement flash card status using the Craft Terminal.
53 Does Core-E with replacement flash card communicate properly and status normal?

Unprotected Core-E replacement procedure
54 Is power still applied to MSS-4/8 shelf where flash card on Core-E to be replaced is
equipped?

Shelf power still applied to MSS-8 shelf

unprotected link will cause loss of traffic.
56 Remove Core-E equipped with flash card to be replaced. See DLP-100 for detailed
steps to remove card.
card with the protect Core-E flash card. This will result in a system that will not
properly boot-up.
59 Install replacement flash card onto the Core-E.

DLP-104 3EM23956AL

prior to tightening may cause screw(s) to be cross threaded and possibly
61 Install Core-E into shelf. See DLP-100 for information about how to remove the card.
63 Verify communication with the Core-E with replacement flash card using the Craft
Terminal.
65 Does Core-E with replacement flash card communicate properly and status normal?

66 Remove Core-E equipped with flash card to be replaced. See DLP-100 for information
about how to remove the card.
properly boot-up.
69 Install the replacement flash card onto the Core-E.

71 Install the Core-E into shelf. See DLP-100 for information about how to remove the
card.
72 Turn on the shelf power and wait for the status LED to turn steady green.
73 Verify the communication with the Core-E with replacement flash card using the
Craft Terminal.

3EM23956AL
DLP-104
75 Does the Core-E with replacement flash card communicate properly and status
normal?


DLP-105 3EM23956AL
DLP-105
Ethernet access switch (P8ETH) replacement
Purpose
This procedure describes how to replace an Ethernet Access Switch (P8ETH) circuit pack.
Prerequisites
General
In this procedure, the main P8ETH is resident in slots 3, 5, or 7. The spare P8ETH is resident in slots
4, 6, or 8 if equipped.
STEP PROCEDURE

2 CAUTION: Possibility of service interruption. All slots must be filled with either a

4 CAUTION: Possibility of service interruption. Only MPT-HL transceiver Ethernet

traffic may be protected within the 9500 MPR-A. All other Ethernet traffic is
unprotected within the 9500 MPR-A. Ethernet traffic switching is
controlled/performed outside the 9500 MPR-A if available. If no protection is
available, Ethernet traffic is lost after a failure or removal of the P8ETH.
5 CAUTION: Possibility of service interruption. All MPT ODU traffic is unprotected

within the 9500 MPR-A. All Ethernet traffic supported by an MPT ODU is lost after a
failure or removal of the P8ETH.
Ethernet access switch (P8ETH) replacement 5-21

3EM23956AL
DLP-105
6 CAUTION: Possibility of service interruption. In protected MPT-HL transceiver

Ethernet configurations, MPT-HL transceiver Ethernet traffic switching is controlled
by the 9500 MPR-A. Working and protect MPT-HL transceiver Ethernet signals are
provisioned on a per channel basis. If the P8ETH card in slot 3, 5, or 7 fails, working
MPT-HL transceiver Ethernet traffic switches to the protect P8ETH SFP port in slot
4, 6, or 8. If the P8ETH card in slot 4, 6, or 8 fails, working MPT-HL transceiver
Ethernet traffic switches to the protect P8ETH SFP port in slot 3, 5, or 7.
7 CAUTION: Possibility of service interruption. In unprotected Ethernet

configurations, Ethernet traffic switching is controlled/performed outside the
9500 MPR-A if available. If no protection is available, Ethernet traffic is lost after a
8 CAUTION: Possibility of service interruption. In protected P8ETH configurations

configured with 1+1 revertive operation, inserting the main P8ETH card, may cause
a disruption to the protected traffic. To prevent an impact to protect traffic, always
perform a Forced EPS, HSB, and RX Radio to spare before inserting the main P8ETH
card.




13 Is the P8ETH to be replaced in a protected system?

5-22 Ethernet access switch (P8ETH) replacement

DLP-105 3EM23956AL
Protected P8ETH replacement procedures
14 CAUTION: Possibility of service interruption. Only MPT-HL transceiver Ethernet

traffic is protected within the 9500 MPR-A. All other P8ETH Ethernet traffic is
unprotected within the 9500 MPR-A. Ethernet traffic switching is
available, Ethernet traffic will be lost upon a failure or removal of the P8ETH.

16 What is the role of P8ETH card being replaced the main or spare?

17 CAUTION: Possibility of service interruption. Forced EPS switching traffic will

cause a hit to traffic.

card.
19 Perform a Forced EPS Switch Main, MPT-HL transceiver port to Spare MPT-HL
transceiver port.
20 Perform a Forced HSB Switch Main, MPT-HL transceiver port to Spare MPT-HL
transceiver port.
21 Perform a Forced RX Radio Switch Main, MPT-HL transceiver port to Spare MPT-HL
transceiver port.
22 Repeat steps 19 to 21 until all of the MPT-HL Transceiver ports are Forced Switch to
Spare, then go to step 27.
23 Perform a Lockout EPS of Spare MPT-HL transceiver port.
24 Perform a Lockout HSB of Spare MPT-HL transceiver port.
25 Perform a Lockout Rx Radio of Spare MPT-HL transceiver port.
26 Repeat steps 23 to 25 until all MPT-HL Transceiver ports are Lockout of Spare, then
go to step 27.

3EM23956AL
DLP-105
27 Verify that all MPT-HL transceiver ports status is Standby.
28 Verify that all cable connections to the P8ETH card to be replaced are properly
labeled.
29 Disconnect all cables that are connected to the front of the P8ETH.
30 Remove P8ETH to be replaced. See DLP-100 for information about how to remove
card.
31 Remove the SFPs from the P8ETH.
32 Install the SFPs into the replacement P8ETH.

card.

35 Install the replacement P8ETH into the shelf. See DLP-100 for information about how
to install the card.
37 Connect all cables to the front of the P8ETH that were disconnected in step 29.
38 Verify the communication with the replacement P8ETH using the Craft Terminal.
39 Verify that the status is normal for the replacement P8ETH.
40 Verify that the Links are up for all Ethernet ports that are associated with the
replacement P8ETH.
41 Does the replacement P8ETH communicate properly? Is the status normal? Are all
Ethernet port Links up?

42 Verify the replacement P8ETH alarms and capable of carrying Ethernet traffic using

DLP-105 3EM23956AL
43 Is the replacement P8ETH status normal and is it capable of carrying Ethernet traffic?

44 Is the replaced P8ETH “Main” or “Spare”?
If Main, go to step 45.

If Spare, go to step 49.
45 Release the Forced EPS Switch Main, MPT-HL transceiver port to Spare MPT-HL
transceiver port.
46 Release the Forced HSB Switch Main, MPT-HL transceiver port to Spare MPT-HL
transceiver port.
47 Release the Forced Rx Radio Switch Main, MPT-HL transceiver port to Spare
MPT-HL transceiver port.
48 Repeat steps 45 to 47 until all MPT-HL Transceiver ports are released Forced Switch
Main, then go to step 72.
49 Release the Lockout EPS Spare MPT-HL transceiver port.
50 Release the Lockout HSB Spare MPT-HL transceiver port.
51 Release the Lockout Rx Radio Spare MPT-HL transceiver port.
52 Repeat steps 49 to 51 until all MPT-HL Transceiver ports are released Lockout of
Spare, then go to step 72.
Unprotected P8ETH replacement procedure
53 CAUTION: Possibility of service interruption. In unprotected P8ETH configurations,

ALL Ethernet traffic is lost upon removal of the SFP connection to the P8ETH.
54 CAUTION: Possibility of service interruption. All other P8ETH Ethernet traffic is

unprotected within the 9500 MPR-A. All other Ethernet traffic switching is
available, Ethernet traffic is lost after removal of the Ethernet cabling.

56 Verify that all cable connections to the P8ETH card to be replaced are properly
labeled.

3EM23956AL
DLP-105
57 Disconnect the Ethernet cables, one at a time.
58 Remove the P8ETH to be replaced. See DLP-100 for information about how to remove
card.
59 Remove the SFPs from P8ETH to be replaced.
60 Install the SFPs into the replacement P8ETH.

62 Install the replacement P8ETH into the shelf. See DLP-100 for information about how
to install the card.
64 Connect all cables to the front of the P8ETH that you disconnected in step 57.
65 Verify the communication with the replacement P8ETH using the Craft Terminal.
66 Verify the status is normal for the replacement P8ETH.
67 Verify the Link is up for all Ethernet ports associated with the replacement P8ETH.
68 Does the replacement P8ETH communicate properly? Is the status normal? Are all
Ethernet port Links up?

69 Verify the replacement P8ETH alarms and capable of carrying Ethernet traffic using
70 Is the replacement P8ETH status normal, and capable of carrying Ethernet traffic?


DLP-106 3EM23956AL
DLP-106
MSS-4/8 shelf FAN replacement
Purpose
This procedure describes how to replace a MSS-4/8 shelf FAN card.
Prerequisites
A replacement FAN card must be available on-site before starting this procedure.
General
STEP PROCEDURE



4 Confirm the replacement MSS-4/8 FAN card is available and of the same type
installed in the MSS-4/8 shelf.
5 Disconnect the Office Alarm and Control cable if present.
6 Remove the FAN card. See DLP-100 for information about how to remove the card.

8 Install the replacement FAN card. See DLP-100 for information about how to install
the card.
MSS-4/8 shelf FAN replacement 5-27

3EM23956AL
DLP-106
9 Connect Office Alarm and Control cable if removed in step 5.
10 Verify that the FAN card is operating properly.
11 Verify the communication with the replacement FAN card.
12 Does the FAN card operate properly, communicate properly, and the status is normal?

5-28 MSS-4/8 shelf FAN replacement

DLP-107 3EM23956AL
DLP-107
MOD300 (radio modem) replacement
Purpose
This procedure describes how to replace a MOD300.
Prerequisites
General
The Radio (MOD300) cards can be installed in any of the universal slots (3 to 8).
The MSS-8 can be configured with a maximum of six optional MOD300 cards; three protected cards,
six non-protected cards, or a combination of protected and non-protected cards.
In protected radios, the main MOD300 is resident in slots 3, 5, and/or 7. The protect MOD300 is
resident in slots 4, 6, and/or 8. The main and protected cards must be plugged in side-by-side.
In an unprotected radio, performing the MOD300 removal and replacement procedure causes loss of
traffic. In a protected system, the procedure is an in-service but not a hitless procedure.
Disconnecting the MOD300 from the MSS-8 backplane removes power to the ODU300, and can cause
a disruption on traffic.
STEP PROCEDURE

MOD300 (radio modem) replacement 5-29

3EM23956AL
DLP-107

4 CAUTION: Possibility of service interruption. In protected radio configurations, the

Main MOD300 cards reside in slots 3, 5, and/or 7. The spare MOD300 cards reside in
slots 4, 6, and/or 8.


equipment. Circuit packs contain static-sensitive devices. These devices can
be damaged by static discharge. See the Introduction for special handling
instructions.


MOD300 replacement procedures
9 Is the MOD300 to be replaced in a protected system?


11 Is MOD300 to be replaced the main or spare?

5-30 MOD300 (radio modem) replacement

DLP-107 3EM23956AL
15 Go to step 19.
19 Verify that the MOD300 to be replaced status is Standby.

21 Remove the MOD300 to be replaced.
22 Disconnect the IF in/out cable.
23 Install the replacement MOD300 into shelf but do not seat the card at this time.
24 Connect the IF in/out cable.
25 Seat the replacement MOD300 into shelf and wait for the status LED to turn steady
green or amber.
26 Verify the replacement MOD300 is free of alarms using the Alarm Monitor.
27 Is the replacement MOD300 status LED to turn steady green or amber and free of
alarms?

28 Is the replacement MOD300 in a protected system?

29 CAUTION: Possibility of service interruption. Releasing Forced EPS switch causes

a disruption to traffic.
30 Release the Forced/Lockout EPS Switch using Craft the Terminal.
33 Go to step 35.
MOD300 (radio modem) replacement 5-31

3EM23956AL
DLP-107
5-32 MOD300 (radio modem) replacement

DLP-108 3EM23956AL
DLP-108
MPT-HL transceiver replacement
Purpose
This procedure describes how to replace a Microwave Packet Transport (MPT-HL) transceiver.
Prerequisites
General
The MPT-HL transceiver card can be installed in either MPT-HL shelf slots 1 or 2.
The MPT-HL shelf can be configured with a maximum of two MPT-HL Transceiver cards; one
protected pair, or two unprotected MPT-HL transceiver cards.
In protected radios, the main MPT-HL transceiver is resident in slot 1. The spare MPT-HL
Transceiver is resident in slot 2.
In an unprotected radio, performing a MPT-HL transceiver removal and replacement procedure

causes loss of traffic. In a protected system, the procedure is an in-service but not a hitless procedure.
STEP PROCEDURE

2 CAUTION: Possibility of service interruption. Removing an in-service MPT-HL

transceiver in an unprotected link causes loss of traffic. Removing an in-service
card in a protected MPT-HL transceiver requires switching the traffic onto the spare
channel.
3 CAUTION: Possibility of service interruption. In protected MPT-HL Transceiver

configurations, the Main MPT-HL transceiver reside in slot 1. The spare MPT-HL
transceiver reside in slot 2.
MPT-HL transceiver replacement 5-33

3EM23956AL
DLP-108
4 CAUTION: Possibility of service interruption. This is an out of service procedure for

unprotected configurations. To avoid disruption of traffic on protected
configurations, switch traffic to Standby MPT-HL transceiver.

the Introduction for special handling instructions.



MPT-HL transceiver replacement procedures
9 Is the MPT-HL transceiver to be replaced in a protected system?

10 CAUTION: Possibility of service interruption. Forced EPS and HSB switching traffic
11 Is the MPT-HL transceiver to be replaced the main or spare?

15 Go to step 19.
5-34 MPT-HL transceiver replacement

DLP-108 3EM23956AL
19 Verify that the MPT-HL Transceiver to be replaced status is Standby.
20 CAUTION: Possibility of service interruption. Removing power to an in-service card

in an unprotected link causes loss of traffic.
21 Position the MPT-HL transceiver PA switch to the OFF ‘0’ position.
22 Remove the fuse in PDU that is suppling battery power to the MPT-HL transceiver.
23 Disconnect the power cable.
24 Disconnect the GigE cable (optical or Molex) from the SFP port on the MPT-HL
transceiver.
25 Remove SFP from MPT-HL transceiver, if required.
26 Loosen the screws securing the MPT-HL transceiver to the MPT-HL shelf. See
DLP-100 for information about how to remove the card.
27 Pull out on the MPT-HL transceiver to disconnect from the shelf backplane
connectors.
28 Remove the MPT-HL transceiver from the shelf.
29 Slowly push replacement MPT-HL transceiver into shelf until contact is made with
alignment pins/backplane connectors. See DLP-100 for information about how to
install the card.
30 Apply steady pressure and push in on replacement MPT-HL transceiver until

MPT-HL transceiver is seated in backplane connectors.

32 Tighten the screws securing MPT-HL Transceiver to MPT-HL shelf.
33 Verify that the RF cables on shelf backplane connectors on rear of shelf have not been
loosened by installation of the MPT-HL Transceiver. Tighten cables to no more than
19 in lbs, if required.
34 Install the SFP into SFP receptacle (if required).
MPT-HL transceiver replacement 5-35

3EM23956AL
DLP-108
35 Connect the GigE cable (optical or Molex) into the SFP port on MPT-HL transceiver.
36 Connect the power cable.
37 Verify that the MPT-HL transceiver PA switch is in the OFF ‘0’ position.
38 Install the fuse in the PDU that is suppling battery power to MPT-HL transceiver.
39 Position the MPT-HL transceiver PA switch to the ON ‘1’ position.
40 Ensure that the MPT-HL transceiver PA (Power Amplifier) switch is in the “On” (1)
position.
41 Wait for the MPT-HL transceiver to finish booting.
42 Verify that the replacement MPT-HL transceiver status LED turns steady green or
amber.
43 Verify that the replacement MPT-HL transceiver is alarm free using the Alarm
Monitor.
44 Is replacement MPT-HL transceiver status LED turns steady green or amber, and
alarm free?

45 Is the replacement MPT-HL transceiver in a protected system?

46 CAUTION: Possibility of service interruption. Releasing Forced EPS and HSB switch
50 Go to step 52.
5-36 MPT-HL transceiver replacement

DLP-109 3EM23956AL
DLP-109
ODU300 replacement
Purpose
This procedure describes how to replace a Outdoor Unit (ODU300).
Prerequisites
Before starting, verify that the replacement ODU300 matches the failed ODU300 using the following
procedure.
1. Obtain part number of failed ODU300 on inventory screen.
2. Verify part number of replacement ODU300, located on identification label,

matches part number of failed ODU300.
General
In protected radios, the associated main MOD300 is resident in slots 3, 5, and/or 7. The associated
protect MOD300 is resident in slots 4, 6, and/or 8. The main and protected cards must be plugged in
side-by-side.
Disconnecting the MOD300 from the MSS-8 backplane removes power to the ODU300, and can cause
a disruption on traffic.
In an unprotected radio, removing MOD300 causes loss of traffic. In a protected radio, removing
MOD300 can cause a disruption on traffic.
See the 9500 MPR-A Installation Practices (PN 3EM23953AL) Charts 10 and 11 for information
about how to physically remove and install the ODU300 to be replaced in this procedure.
STEP PROCEDURE
1 DANGER: Possibility of personal injury. Exposure to energy radiated at microwave

frequencies can cause eye injury and eventual blindness. Do not look directly into
any unterminated waveguide port.
ODU300 replacement 5-37

3EM23956AL
DLP-109

3 CAUTION: Possibility of service interruption. In an unprotected radio, performing the

ODU300 removal and replacement procedure will cause loss of traffic. In a protected
system the procedure is an in-service but not a hitless procedure. Disconnecting the
MOD300 from the MSS-8 backplane to remove power to the ODU300 can cause a
disruption on traffic.
4 WARNING: Possibility of equipment damage. Failure to disconnect power to

the ODU300 by disconnecting the associated MOD300 card from the MSS-8
backplane can result in damage to the MOD300 card and can cause damage
to the ODU300.

instructions.
6 Is the ODU300 to be replaced in a protected system?
7 Is the MOD300 associated with the ODU300 to be replaced the main or spare?
9 Go to step 11.
10 Perform Lockout EPS Switch using Craft Terminal.
11 Verify that the MOD300 card, associated with the failed ODU300 status is Standby.
12 On the MSS-8, pull out on the MOD300 card, associated with the failed ODU300, to
disconnect the MOD300 card from the MSS-8 backplane.
13 Disconnect the IF in/out cable.
NOTE: The procedure to Remove an ODU300 is dependent on the ODU300 mounting and
how the ODU300 is configured. The procedure to remove an ODU300 is the reverse of
ODU300 installation. See Installation Practices manual (PN 3EM23953AL) Charts 10 and 11
for information about how to physically install an ODU300.
5-38 ODU300 replacement

DLP-109 3EM23956AL
14 Disconnect and remove the failed ODU300. See the Installation Practices manual for
more information.
15 Install the replacement ODU300. See the Installation Practices manual for more
information.
16 Connect the IF in/out cable.
17 Reinstall the MOD300 card to restore power to the MOD300 and replacement
ODU300.
18 On the MOD300 card front panel, verify that there are no alarms.
19 Open the WebEML Measurements screens for the MOD300 card that is connected to
the replaced ODU300.
20 On the Measurements window, enter 15 minutes Measurement Interval.
21 On the Measurements window, select 2 sec Sample Time.
22 On the Measurements window, click on the Start button to start measurements. The
Graphics window appears.
23 On Measurement graphics window, check the Details box. The Tx and Rx dBm Power
Levels Details table appears.
24 On Tx and Rx dBmPower Levels Details table, verify the Tx Local End and Rx
Far End power levels.
25 Is the replacement ODU300 status normal and capable of carrying traffic?

26 Is the replacement ODU300 in a protected system?


ODU300 replacement 5-39

3EM23956AL
DLP-109
5-40 ODU300 replacement

DLP-110 3EM23956AL
DLP-110
P2E3DS3 (2-Port DS3) replacement
Purpose
This procedure describes how to replace a P2E3DS3 card.
Prerequisites
General
The DS3 P2E3DS3 card can be installed in any of the universal MSS-8 slots (3 through 8).
The MSS-8 can be configured with a maximum of six optional P2E3DS3 cards; three protected pairs,
six unprotected cards, or a combination of protected pairs and unprotected cards.
In protected DS3 configurations, the main P2E3DS3 is resident in slots 3, 5, and/or 7. The spare
P2E3DS3 is resident in slots 4, 6, and/or 8 respectively. The main and spare cards must be plugged
in side-by-side.
In unprotected DS3 configurations, performing the P2E3DS3 removal and replacement procedure
causes loss of traffic. In a protected system the procedure is an in-service but not a disruptionless
procedure.
STEP PROCEDURE

3 CAUTION: Possibility of service interruption. In protected DS3 configurations, the

Main P2E3DS3 cards reside in slots 3, 5, and/or 7. The Spare P2E3DS3 cards reside
in slots 4, 6, and/or 8.
P2E3DS3 (2-Port DS3) replacement 5-41

3EM23956AL
DLP-110





P2E3DS3 replacement procedures
9 Is the P2E3DS3 to be replaced in a protected system?


11 Is the P2E3DS3 to be replaced the main or spare?

13 Go to step 15.
15 Verify that the P2E3DS3 to be replaced status is Standby.

unprotected configuration causes a loss of traffic.
5-42 P2E3DS3 (2-Port DS3) replacement

DLP-110 3EM23956AL
17 Verify that all cable connections to the P2E3DS3 card to be replaced are properly
labeled.
18 Remove the P2E3DS3 to be replaced. See DLP-100 for information about how to
remove the card.
19 Disconnect the DS3 input and output cables.
20 Install the replacement P2E3DS3 into the shelf, but do not seat the card at this time.
See DLP-100 for information about how to install card.
21 Connect the DS3 input and output cables.

23 Install the replacement P2E3DS3 into the shelf.
25 Verify the replacement P2E3DS3 alarms, that the status is normal, and capable of
carrying traffic using the Alarm Monitor and Craft Terminal.
26 Is the replacement P2E3DS3 status normal and capable of carrying traffic?

27 Is the replacement P2E3DS3 in a protected system?


30 Go to step 32.

3EM23956AL
DLP-110

DLP-111 3EM23956AL
DLP-111
P32E1DS1 (32-Port DS1) replacement
Purpose
This procedure describes how to replace a P32E1DS1 card.
Prerequisites
General
The DS1 P32E1DS1 card can be installed in any of the universal MSS-8 slots (3 to 8).
The MSS-8 can be configured with a maximum of six optional P32E1DS1 cards; three protected
cards, six unprotected cards, or a combination of protected and unprotected cards.
In protected DS1 configurations, the main P32E1DS1 is resident in slots 3, 5, and/or 7. The spare
P32E1DS1 is resident in slots 4, 6, and/or 8 respectively. The main and spare cards must be plugged
in side-by-side.
In unprotected DS1 configurations, performing the P32E1DS1 removal and replacement procedure
causes loss of traffic. In a protected system the procedure is an in-service but not a hitless procedure.
STEP PROCEDURE

peripheral plug-in card or a blank panel. Failure to do so will compromise EMC
3 CAUTION: Possibility of service interruption. In protected DS1 configurations, the

Main P32E1DS1 cards reside in slots 3, 5, and/or 7. The spare P32E1DS1 cards
reside in slots 4, 6, and/or 8.

3EM23956AL
DLP-111





P32E1DS1 replacement procedures
9 Is the P32E1DS1 to be replaced in a protected system?


11 Is the P2E3DS3 to be replaced main or spare?

13 Go to step 15.
15 Verify that the P32E1DS1 to be replaced status is Standby.


DLP-111 3EM23956AL
17 Verify that all cable connections to the P32E1DS1 card to be replaced are properly
labeled.
18 Remove the P32E1DS1 to be replaced. See DLP-100 for information about how to
remove card.
19 Disconnect DS1 cables.
20 Install the replacement P32E1DS1 into shelf but do not seat the card at this time. See
DLP-100 for information about how to remove card.
21 Connect the DS1 input and output cables.

23 Seat the replacement P32E1DS1 into the shelf.
25 Verify the replacement P32E1DS1 alarms, that the status is normal, and capable of
26 Is the replacement P32E1DS1 status normal, and capable of carrying traffic?

27 Is the replacement P32E1DS1 in a protected system?


30 Go to step 32.

3EM23956AL
DLP-111

DLP-112 3EM23956AL
DLP-112
Clean fiber-optic connectors
Purpose
This procedure describes the recommended instructions to clean fiber-optic connectors found in
Alcatel-Lucent equipment.
Prerequisites
Anyone who performs this procedure must be familiar with cleaning fiber-optic connectors and with
the specific system on which the procedure is to be performed.
This procedure must not be performed on traffic-carrying equipment. If a system is in service, traffic
must be removed from equipment to be cleaned.
Recommended Tools
The following tools must be available for this procedure:
• Optical power meter with standard accessories
• Inspection microscope, 200X to 400X—Aerotech World Trade Ltd. AWT200

or AWT300
• Anti-static lint-free swab—Texwipe PN TX757E
• CLETOP®1 fiber-optic cleaner, Aerotech World Trade Ltd. PN 14100500 for all
fiber-optic connectors except bulkhead type
• CLETOP® 2.5mm Stick-Type cleaner- Aerotech World Trade Ltd. PN 14100400,

box of 200
• CLETOP® 1.25mm Stick-Type cleaner - Aerotech World Trade Ltd. PN 14100401

box of 200
• Optical removal and cleaning tool—Alcatel-Lucent PN 3EM07060AAAA
• Penlight (pocket-style flashlight)
• Laser safety glasses
General
If the cleaning method described in this procedure does not produce acceptable results, the connector
may need to be replaced.
1. CLETOP is a registered trademark of NTT International.
Clean fiber-optic connectors 5-49

3EM23956AL
DLP-112
STEP PROCEDURE
1 DANGER: Possibility of personal injury. DO NOT LOOK INTO FIBER-OPTIC

CONNECTOR. Laser infrared radiation is present when fiber-optic connector is
open and optical interface is installed. Laser infrared radiation is not visible to
naked eye or with laser safety glasses.
2 DANGER: Possibility of personal injury. Ensure no optical power is connected to

fiber being tested. An optical power meter must be used to ensure all optical power
has been removed.
3 WARNING: Possibility of equipment damage. Do not disassemble cards to

clean fibers. Disassembling card could cause damage to optical splice and
could void warranty.
4 WARNING: Possibility of equipment damage. To preserve integrity of

fiber-optic connectors, observe the following precautions:
-Do not use cleaning swabs more than once.
-Do not use alcohol or any type of liquid to clean fiber-optic connectors.
-Do not use canned air to clean fiber-optic connectors. Canned air propellant
leaves residue that clouds fiber-optic connectors.
-Do not touch polished optical surface of fiber-optic connector. Oil from skin
can degrade performance of fiber-optic connector and attract dust particles.
-Always use protective covers to protect disconnected fiber-optic connectors.

When protective covers are not in use, store them in a clean container. Do not
store protective covers in clothes pocket.
5-50 Clean fiber-optic connectors

DLP-112 3EM23956AL
Figure 112-1. Fiber-optic connector inspection
PARTICLES
OIL FILM AND PARTICLES

ON CLADDING AND IN
CORE AREA
FIBER CONTAMINATED FIBER CONTAMINATED

WITH SOLID PARTICLES FIBER WITH OIL (FINGERPRINT)
CLADDING CORE
FERRULE
(SHAPE CAN VARY
BY CONNECTOR TYPE)
CLEAN FIBER
129-1280-1
021607
5 Use an optical power meter to determine if light is coming out of fiber-optic connector.
6 Does the optical power meter detect light coming out of fiber-optic connector?
7 Find a laser transmission source and disable it.
8 Remove the fiber-optic connector from receptacle, if necessary.
9 Use an inspection microscope to inspect fiber-optic connector. See Figure 112-1 for
examples of clean and contaminated fibers. Use the following criteria to determine
clean fiber:
a. Fiber core must have no contaminants or defects.

3EM23956AL
DLP-112
b. Fiber cladding must have no contaminants. Minor defects (pits and scratches) are
acceptable.
c. Fiber ferrule may not have contaminants or defects that interfere with fiber-optic
connector mating.
10 Is the fiber-optic connector clean?

11 Select the type of connector to clean. See Figures 112-2 and 112-3 for connector types.
If FC, SC, MU, LC, or ST/STII fiber-optic connector, go to step 12.

If bulkhead connectors, go to step 16.
Figure 112-2. Fiber-optic connector types, illustrations
FC CONNECTOR SC CONNECTOR ST CONNECTOR
MU FIBER CONNECTOR LC FIBER CONNECTOR
950-0151-1
092109

DLP-112 3EM23956AL
Figure 112-3. Fiber-optic connector types, photographs
SC CONNECTOR FC CONNECTOR
ST/STII CONNECTOR
950-0150-1
092109
FC, SC, MU, LC, or ST/STII fiber-optic connector
12 Holding the CLETOP fiber-optic cleaner with one hand, use metal lever to open metal
slide and expose the cleaning surface. Do not release the lever.
13 Place the fiber ferrule firmly against the CLETOP fiber-optic cleaner cleaning surface,
rotate the ferrule 90 degrees, then gently wipe the ferrule along cleaning surface one
time in one direction only.
14 Release the metal lever.
15 Go to step 19.
Bulkhead connectors
16 Select the appropriate CLETOP Stick-Type to clean bulkhead connector for fiber optic
connection.
a. For FC, SC, and ST bulkhead connectors use the CLETOP 2.5mm Stick-Type
cleaner.
b. For LC and MU bulkhead connectors use the CLETOP 1.25mm Stick-Type

cleaner.

3EM23956AL
DLP-112
17 Insert the CLETOP swab into the optical bulkhead adapter and gently twist/wipe to
clean fiber-optic interface. Discard the swab after each use.
18 Are there more fiber optic bulkheads to clean?

Inspect connector
19 Use an inspection microscope to inspect fiber-optic connector. See Figure 112-1 for
examples of clean and contaminated fibers. Use the following criteria to determine
clean fiber:
a. Fiber core must have no contaminants or defects.
b. Fiber cladding must have no contaminants. Minor defects (pits and scratches) are
acceptable.
c. Fiber ferrule may not have contaminants or defects that interfere with fiber-optic
connector mating.

21 Clean and inspect the fiber-optic connector up to five more times.

If no, contact the next level of support.
23 Remove the permanent plastic cap retainer, if applicable. Follow customer practices.
24 Are there more fiber-optic connectors to clean?


DLP-113 3EM23956AL
DLP-113
System power down and power up
Purpose
This procedure describes how to power down and power up a 9500 MPR-A system.
General
When powering down the system, you must shut down the transmitters first, remove power from the
MPT-HC/MPT-XP/9558HC (MPT ODU)s, MPT-HL transceivers, and MOD300s before you remove
power from the MSS-1/4/8 shelf.
When powering up the system, you must power up the MSS-1/4/8 shelf first, power up the MPT
ODUs, MPT-HL transceivers, and MOD300s, before bringing up the transmitters.
All cards can be removed and installed with power applied.
STEP PROCEDURE




System power down and power up 5-55

3EM23956AL
DLP-113
5 Select an action?
If the system power is down, go to step 6.

If the system power is up, go to step 13.
System power down procedure
6 CAUTION: Possibility of service interruption. Removing power on a traffic barring

system causes a loss of traffic.
7 Remove all MOD300 cards from the system.
8 Position all MPT-HL transceiver PA switches to the OFF ‘0’ position.
9 Remove fuses in the PDU that are suppling battery power to all MPT-HL transceivers
in the system.
10 Remove power to the MPT ODU. Depending upon the configuration, perform one of
the following for each MPT ODU:
• If power is provided by the MPTACC card, use the Craft Terminal and disable
power source.
• If power is provided by the MSS-1 shelf Core, use the Craft Terminal and disable
power source.
• If MPT ODU is powered through a power injector card/power injector box,

disconnect the Ethernet+Data cable connection to the MPT ODU at the power
injector card/box.
• If MPT ODU is powered with connection to MPT Extended Power Unit, DC+ODU
Data connection, disconnect the Ethernet+Data cable connection to the
MPT ODU at the MPT Extended Power Unit.
• If MPT ODU is powered with connection to MPT Power Unit or MPT Extended
Power Unit DC (Type N) connection, disconnect the power cable connection to the
MPT ODU at the MPT Power Unit/MPT Extended Power Unit.
• If MPT ODU is powered with connection to direct office power, locate the fuse
protecting the MPT ODU and remove.
• If power is provided by an external source, disconnect power appropriately.
11 Remove the fuses in PDU that are suppling battery power to the MSS-1/4/8 shelf.
12 Go to step 20.
5-56 System power down and power up

DLP-113 3EM23956AL
System power up procedure
13 Install the fuses in PDU that are suppling battery power to the MSS-1/4/8 shelf.
14 Install all MOD300 cards into the system.
15 Install the fuses in PDU that are suppling battery power to all MPT-HL transceivers
in the system.
16 Position all MPT-HL transceiver PA switches to the ON ‘1’ position.
17 Apply power to all MPT ODUs. Depending upon the configuration.
19 Verify that there are no unexpected alarms and conditions on the system.
System power down and power up 5-57

3EM23956AL
DLP-113
5-58 System power down and power up

DLP-114 3EM23956AL
DLP-114
MPTACC (MPT Access) replacement
Purpose
This procedure describes how to replace an MPTACC.
Prerequisites
General
The MPTACC is supported in MSS-8 slots 3 to 8 and MSS-4 slots 3 and 4.
In unprotected radio configurations the main MPTACC card is supported in any of the transport
MSS-4/8 slots, two radio channels per MPTACC card for a maximum of twelve MPTACC
MPT-HC/MPT-XP/9558HC (MPT ODU) radio channels per MSS-8 shelf and four radio channels per
MSS-4 shelf.
In protected radio configurations, two arrangements are available. The first arrangement utilizes
one interface on a MPTACC card configured as main and the second interface as spare for a single
protected radio channel. This arrangement is supported in MSS-8 slots 3 to 8 and MSS-4 slots 3 and
4.
The second arrangement utilizes a main MPTACC card and a spare MPTACC card. The main
MPTACCs are equipped in slots 3, 5, and/or 7 and the protect (spare) MPTACCs are equipped in the
slots directly across from the main (slots 4, 6, and/or 8).
Disconnecting the MPTACC from the MSS backplane may remove power to the MPT ODU, and may
See the 9500 MPR-A Operation and Administration (PN 3EM23954AL) for detailed procedures to
execute the commands included in this procedure.
STEP PROCEDURE

MPTACC (MPT Access) replacement 5-59

3EM23956AL
DLP-114
peripheral plug-in card or a blank panel. Failure to do so will compromise EMC


configurations, the Main MPTACC cards resides in slots 3, 5, and/or 7. The spare
MPTACC cards resides in slots 4, 6, and/or 8.


instructions.

pressure to bring the plug-in pane flush with the front panel. Improper

MPTACC replacement procedures
9 Determine MPTACC configuration.
d. Is the power to the radio channels provided by the MPTACC card?
5-60 MPTACC (MPT Access) replacement

DLP-114 3EM23956AL
10 Verify that radio protection is available for all traffic supported by the MPTACC to be
replaced or appropriate maintenance window is scheduled per local practices and
procedures.
11 Is it appropriate to proceed with MPTACC replacement procedure?



configurations, the Main MPTACC cards resides in slots 3, 5, and/or 7. The spare
MPTACC cards resides in slots 4, 6, and/or 8.

15 Are any radio channels supported by the MPTACC in a protected system?
If yes, perform steps 16 through 24 for each protected radio channel

supported by the MPTACC to be replaced.

17 Is the MPTACC to be replaced main or spare?

21 Go to step 25.

3EM23956AL
DLP-114
25 Verify that the MPTACC to be replaced status is Standby.

27 Verify that all cable connections to the MPTACC to be replaced are properly labeled.
28 Disconnect all cables connected to the front of the MPTACC.
29 Remove the MPTACC to be replaced. See DLP-100 for information about how to
remove the card.

31 Install the replacement MPTACC into the shelf. See DLP-100 for information about
how install the card.
32 Connect all cables to the front of the MPTACC that you disconnected in step 28.
34 Verify that the replacement MPTACC is free of alarms using the Alarm Monitor.
35 Verify that the radio channels that are supported by the MPTACC are error free.
36 Is the replacement MPTACC status LED steady green or amber, error free, and free
of alarms?

37 Is the replacement MPTACC in a protected system?
If yes, perform steps 38 through 41 for each radio channel supported by

the MPTACC to be replaced.
38 CAUTION: Possibility of service interruption. Releasing Forced/Lockout

EPS/HSB/RX Radio switch causes a disruption to traffic.

DLP-114 3EM23956AL
42 Go to step 44.

3EM23956AL
DLP-114

DLP-115 3EM23956AL
DLP-115
MPT ODU replacement (MPT-HC, MPT-XP, 9558HC)
Purpose
This procedure describes how to replace an Outdoor Unit, MPT-HC/MPT-XP/9558HC (MPT ODU).
Prerequisites
Before starting, verify that the replacement MPT ODU matches the failed MPT ODU using the
following procedure.
1. Obtain part number of failed MPT ODU on inventory screen.
2. Verify part number of replacement MPT ODU, located on identification label,

matches part number of failed MPT ODU.
General
The MPT ODU is supported in numerous configurations, protected and unprotected radio
configurations. The MPT ODU may be associated with an MSS shelf or stand-alone. Connectivity to
the MSS-4/8 shelf may be achieved through an MPTACC, P8ETH, or Core-E card or MSS-1 Core.
Office power may be provided by the MPTACC card (coaxial or through PFoE), Power Injector Card,
Power Injector Box, MPT Power Unit, MPT Extended Power Unit, or through direct connection to
office power. Fully understand the MPT ODU configuration prior to starting MPT ODU replacement
procedure.
In unprotected radio configurations the associated radio port is supported in the following:
• main Core-E card is supported in MSS-4/8 slot 1
• main MPTACC card in any of the transport MSS-4/8 slots 3 through 8
• main P8ETH card in any of the transport MSS-4/8 slots 3 through 8
• MSS-1 shelf Core
In protected radio configurations, two arrangements are available. The first arrangement associates
one interface on a MPTACC card configured as main and the second interface as spare for a single
protected radio channel. This arrangement is supported in MSS-8 slots 3 through 8 and MSS-4 slots
3 and 4.
The second arrangement associates a main MPTACC card and a spare MPTACC card. The main
MPTACCs are equipped in slots 3, 5, and/or 7 and the protect (spare) MPTACCs are equipped in the
slots directly across from the main (slots 4, 6, and/or 8).
MPT ODU replacement (MPT-HC, MPT-XP, 9558HC) 5-65

3EM23956AL
DLP-115
See the 9500 MPR-A Installation Practices (PN 3EM23953AL) Charts 10 for information about how
to physically remove and install the MPT ODU to be replaced in this procedure.
STEP PROCEDURE

frequencies can cause eye injury and eventual blindness. Do not look directly into
any unterminated waveguide port.

3 CAUTION: Possibility of service interruption. In an unprotected radio, performing the

MPT ODU removal and replacement procedure causes loss of traffic. In a protected
system the procedure is an in-service but not a hitless procedure. Disconnecting the
MPTACC from the MSS-8 backplane to remove power to the MPT ODU can cause a
disruption on traffic.

instructions.
5 Is the radio channel associated with the MPT ODU to be replaced in a protected
system?

7 Is the radio channel associated with the MPT ODU to be replaced the main or spare?
5-66 MPT ODU replacement (MPT-HC, MPT-XP, 9558HC)

DLP-115 3EM23956AL
11 Go to step 15.
15 Mute the radio channel associated with the MPT ODU to be replaced.
16 Remove power to the MPT ODU. Depending upon the configuration, perform one of
the following for each MPT ODU:
• If power is provided by the MPTACC card, use the Craft Terminal and disable
power source.
• If power is provided by the MSS-1 shelf Core, use the Craft Terminal and disable
power source.
• If MPT ODU is powered through a power injector card/power injector box,

disconnect the Ethernet+Data cable connection to the MPT ODU at the power
injector card/box.
• If MPT ODU is powered with connection to MPT Extended Power Unit, DC+ODU
Data connection, disconnect the Ethernet+Data cable connection to the
MPT ODU at the MPT Extended Power Unit.
• If MPT ODU is powered with connection to MPT Power Unit or MPT Extended
Power Unit DC (Type N) connection, disconnect the power cable connection to the
MPT ODU at the MPT Power Unit/MPT Extended Power Unit.
• If MPT ODU is powered with connection to direct office power, locate the fuse
protecting the MPT ODU and remove.
• If power is provided by an external source, disconnect power appropriately.
17 Verify that all cable connections to the MPT ODU to be replaced are properly labeled.
18 Disconnect all cables that are connected to the MPT ODU.
NOTE: The procedure to Remove an MPT ODU is dependent on the MPT ODU mounting,
power configuration, and how the MPT ODU is configured. The procedure to remove an
MPT ODU is the reverse of MPT ODU installation. See Installation Practices manual (PN
3EM23953AL) Charts 10 for information about how to physically install an MPT ODU.
19 Remove the failed MPT ODU. See the Installation Practices manual for more
information.

3EM23956AL
DLP-115
20 Install replacement MPT ODU. See the Installation Practices manual for more
information.
21 Connect all cables to the MPT ODU that you disconnected in step 18.
22 Apply power to the MPT ODU that was removed in step 16.
23 Unmute the radio channel associated with the replaced MPT ODU.
24 Using the Craft Terminal, verify that there are no alarms associated with the
replacement MPT ODU.
25 Open WebEML Measurements windows for the radio channel that is associated with
the replaced MPT ODU.
26 On Measurements window, enter 15 minutes Measurement Interval.
27 On Measurements window, select 2 sec Sample Time.
28 On Measurements window, click on the Start button to start the measurements. The
29 On Measurement graphics window, check the Details box. Tx and Rx dBm Power
Levels Details table appears.
30 On Tx and Rx dBm Power Levels Details table, verify the Local and Far End Tx and
Rx power levels.
31 Is the replacement MPT ODU status normal and capable of carrying traffic?

32 Is the replacement MPT ODU in a protected system?



DLP-115 3EM23956AL

3EM23956AL
DLP-115

DLP-116 3EM23956AL
DLP-116
Auxiliary (AUX) replacement
Purpose
This procedure describes how to replace an AUX card.
Prerequisites
General
The AUX card can be installed in MSS-8 slot 8 and MSS-4 slot 4.
STEP PROCEDURE




Auxiliary (AUX) replacement 5-71

3EM23956AL
DLP-116

AUX replacement procedures
7 CAUTION: Possibility of service interruption. Removing an AUX card may isolate a

portion of the network being supervised on a service channel supported by the AUX
card.
8 Verify that all cable connections to the AUX card to be replaced are properly labeled.
9 Disconnect the cables that are connected to the front of the AUX card.
10 Remove the AUX to be replaced. See DLP-100 for information about how to remove the
card.

12 Install replacement AUX into shelf. See DLP-100 for detailed steps to install AUX
card.
13 Connect all cables to the front of the AUX card that you disconnected in step 9.
15 Verify the replacement AUX alarms, that the status is normal using the Alarm
Monitor and Craft Terminal.
16 Is the replacement AUX status normal and functioning properly?

5-72 Auxiliary (AUX) replacement

DLP-117 3EM23956AL
DLP-117
Protection upgrade and downgrade procedures
Purpose
These procedures describes how to upgrade and downgrade protection configuration on the
9500 MPR-A system.
General
The protection upgrade and downgrade procedures provide the general steps and sequence required
to change protection scheme. The number of possible configuration scenarios prevents covering all
upgrade and downgrade possibilities.
PDH protection
PDH protection upgrade applies when converting from 1+0 not protected to 1+1 EPS protection
configuration.
PDH protection downgrade applies when converting from 1+1 EPS protection to 1+0 not protected
configuration.
Radio protection
Radio protection upgrade applies when converting from 1+0 not protected to 1+1 HSB, HSB SD, or
FD radio protection configuration.
Radio protection downgrade applies when converting from 1+1 HSB, HSB SD, or FD protection to
1+0 not protected radio configuration. Radio protection downgrade requires a power cycle of the NE.
There are no steps are included to account for the required changes to the MPT-HL shelf diplexer
configuration or outside plant configuration, such as ODU/antenna configuration, RF coupler, DC
Extractor, waveguide, and grounding.
Modulation scheme
The modulation scheme conversion applies when converting from static to adaptive radio profile and
the reverse.
To change modulation scheme, ATPC must be disabled, radio configuration must be 1+0 not
protected, and license key must support adaptive modulation.
Converting from static to adaptive radio profile, all existing TDM2TDM and TDM2ETH
cross-connections must be supported by the lowest adaptive modulation profile (4 QAM). When all
existing TDM2TDM and TDM2ETH cross-connections are supported by the lowest adaptive
modulation profile (4 QAM), all the existing TDM2TDM and TDM2ETH cross-connections are kept
and the residual bandwidth for new TDM2TDM and TEM2ETH cross-connections will be
Protection upgrade and downgrade procedures 5-73

3EM23956AL
DLP-117
recomputed. When all the existing TDM2TDM and TDM2ETH cross-connections can not be
supported by the lowest adaptive modulation profile (4 QAM), the request to change modulation
scheme is rejected. Some existing TDM2TDM and/or TEM2ETH cross-connections must be deleted
to achieve a bandwidth which is supported by the lowest adaptive modulation profile.
Converting from adaptive to static radio profile, the new static radio profile is the one that
corresponds to the largest supported radio profile configured (16 QAM or 64 QAM). all existing
TDM2TDM and TDM2ETH cross-connections are preserved and the residual bandwidth for new
TDM2TDM or TEM2ETH cross-connections are recalculated.
all cards can be removed and installed with power applied.
STEP PROCEDURE




5 Select an action?
To Upgrade PDH 1+0 to 1+1 EPS protection configuration, go to step 6.

To Downgrade PDH 1+1 EPS to 1+0 not protected configuration, go to
step 13.
To Upgrade 1+0 to 1+1 protected radio configuration, go to step 20.
To Downgrade 1+1 to 1+0 not protected radio configuration, go to
step 31.
To Upgrade fixed modulation to adaptive modulation configuration, go
5-74 Protection upgrade and downgrade procedures

DLP-117 3EM23956AL
to step 43.
To Downgrade adaptive modulation to fixed modulation configuration,
go to step 60.
Upgrade PDH 1+0 to 1+1 EPS protection configuration
6 CAUTION: Possibility of service interruption. This is an In-Service but not a hitless

procedure.
7 Install spare P32E1DS1/P2E3DS3 card in spare slot 4, 6, or 8 associated with main

P32E1DS1/P2E3DS3 card. An Unconfigured Equipment Present alarm displays.
8 Connect the DS1 or DS3 cables to spare the P32E1DS1/P2E3DS3 card that you
installed in step 7.
9 On CT settings window, enable the spare P32E1DS1/P2E3DS3 card that you installed
in step 7.
10 On CT settings window, configure the P32E1DS1/P2E3DS3 cards for 1+1 EPS

protection type.
NOTE: To complete the upgrade to 1+1 EPS protection, all TDM2ETH and TDM2TDM
cross-connections MAC address affected by this system upgrade, must be changed from
‘unicast’ to ‘multicast’ at the remote NEs.
11 Reprovision all of the TDM2ETH and TDM2TDM cross-connections MAC address

from ‘unicast’ to ‘multicast’ at the remote NEs. For more information about how to
configure cross-connections, see the 9500 MPR-A Operation and Administration
Manual.
12 Go to step 75.
Downgrade PDH 1+1 EPS to 1+0 not protected configuration
13 CAUTION: Possibility of service interruption. Downgrading from 1+1 EPS to 1+0 Not
protected configuration is an In-Service procedure. all traffic including sync source
must be Active on the main PDH card before starting this procedure.
14 On CT settings window, set the P32E1DS1/P2E3DS3 cards protection type to No

Protection.
15 On CT settings window, set the spare P32E1DS1/P2E3DS3 card equipment type to

Empty.
16 Disconnect the DS1 or DS3 cables from spare the P32E1DS1/P2E3DS3 card.
17 Remove the spare P32E1DS1/P2E3DS3 card in spare slot 4, 6, or 8.

3EM23956AL
DLP-117
NOTE: To complete the downgrade to 1+0 Not Protected configuration, all TDM2ETH and
TDM2TDM cross-connections MAC address affected by this system downgrade, must be
changed from ‘multicast’ to ‘unicast’ at the remote NEs.
18 Reprovision all of the affected TDM2ETH and TDM2TDM cross-connections MAC

address from ‘multicast’ to ‘unicast’ at the remote NEs. For more information about
how to configure cross-connections, see the 9500 MPR-A Operation and
Administration Manual.
19 Go to step 75.
Upgrade 1+0 to 1+1 protected radio configuration
20 CAUTION: Possibility of service interruption. This is an In-Service but not a hitless

procedure.
21 NOTE: To achieve expected radio operation the upgrade from 1+0 not protected to 1+1
protected radio configuration must be performed at both ends of the radio hop.
22 For a radio that is equipped with a MOD300 card, install the MOD300 card in slot 4,
6, or 8 but do not seat the card at this time. Connect IF coax cable to MOD300 card.
23 Install the appropriate radio spare card in spare slot 4, 6, or 8 that is associated with
main radio channel. An Unconfigured Equipment Present alarm appears.
For a radio that equipped with the MOD300 card, seat the card into slot 4, 6, or 8.
For a radio that equipped with a MPT-HL transceiver, the spare P8ETH card must be
installed in slot 4 if not already equipped. Install the MPT-HL transceiver in slot 2 of
the MPT-HL shelf.
For a radio that is equipped with a MPTACC card, the spare radio directions are
supported on port 2 of the same MPTACC card or from an MPTACC card installed in
adjacent slot to the main MPTACC card, slots 4, 6, or 8. Install the MPTACC as
required, as described in the site documentation.
24 On the CT settings window, enable the cards/MPT-HL transceiver that you installed
in step 23.
25 On the CT settings window, configure the radio channel protection type as 1+1 HSB(SD)
or 1+1 FD. Local station and remote station observes 2 second sync loss.
26 Connect the new radio direction cables to the spare radio card that you installed in
step 23, as described in the site documentation.

DLP-117 3EM23956AL
For a radio that is equipped with MPT-HL transceiver, install the SFP into the
appropriate P8ETH SFP port. Connect the fiber optic cable between the SFP port and
MPT-HL transceiver. Connect the MPT-HL transceiver power cable, as described in
the site documentation.
For a radio that is equipped with a MPTACC card, connect the radio cables, as
described in the site documentation (optical Ethernet and power coaxial cable,
electrical Ethernet and power coaxial cable, or electrical Ethernet W/PFoE
connectivity).
27 If radio protection is configured as 1+1 FD, configure the spare radio direction.
NOTE: If unexpected radio alarms are present on the radio channel associated with
protection upgrade, a system restart is required to clear the alarms.
28 CAUTION: Possibility of service interruption. Performing a system restart to clear

unexpected radio alarms causes disruption to traffic.
NOTE: To complete the upgrade to 1+1 radio protection, all TDM2ETH and TDM2TDM
cross-connections MAC address affected by this system upgrade, must be changed from
‘unicast’ to ‘multicast’ at the remote NEs.

address from ‘unicast’ to ‘multicast’ at the remote NEs. For more information about
how to configure cross-connections, see the 9500 MPR-A Operation and
Administration Manual.
30 Go to step 75.
Downgrade 1+1 to 1+0 not protected radio configuration
31 CAUTION: Possibility of service interruption. Downgrading from 1+1 HSB, HSB SD,
or FD to 1+0 configuration is an Out-Of-Service procedure. All traffic including sync
source must be Active on the main channel before starting this procedure.
or FD to 1+0 configuration is an Out-Of-Service procedure. To complete the
downgrade procedure, the NE must be power cycled off and back on again. The
power cycle takes approximately 15 minutes complete.
33 NOTE: To achieve expected radio operation the downgrade from 1+1 protected to 1+0 not
protected radio configuration must be performed at both ends of the radio hop.
34 On CT settings window for radio channel, enable the Local Tx Mute for channel #1 and
#0.
35 On CT settings window, set the radio channel protection type to No Protection.

3EM23956AL
DLP-117
36 On CT settings window for radio channel, disable the Local Tx Mute for channel #1
only.
37 Disconnect the channel#0 radio direction cables to the spare radio cards.
For a radio that is equipped with a MOD300 card, unseat the MOD300 card from the
shelf, then disconnect the IF coax cable from the MOD300 card.
For a radio that is equipped with a MPT-HL transceiver, disconnect the fiber optic
cable between the SFP port and MPT-HL transceiver, as described in the site
documentation.
For a radio that is equipped with a MPTACC card, disconnect the radio cables, as
described in the site documentation (optical Ethernet and power coaxial cable,
electrical Ethernet and power coaxial cable, or electrical Ethernet W/PFoE
connectivity).
NOTE: In the case of 1+1 FD configuration, local AIS will remain active throughout remainder
of the procedure.
38 On CT settings window, set the radio channel equipment type to Empty.
39 Remove the appropriate radio spare card from the spare MSS slot 4, 6, or 8.
For a radio that is equipped with a MOD300 card, remove from slot 4, 6, or 8.
For a radio that is equipped with an MPT-HL transceiver, remove the P8ETH card
from slot 4 only if described in the site documentation. Remove the SFP from the
P8ETH SFP port. Remove the MPT-HL transceiver in slot 2 of the MPT-HL shelf.
For a radio that is equipped with an MPTACC card, spare radio directions are
supported on port 2 of the same MPTACC card or from an MPTACC card installed in
adjacent slot to the main MPTACC card, slots 4, 6, or 8. Remove the MPTACC only if
described in the site documentation.
or FD to 1+0 configuration is an Out-Of-Service procedure. To complete the
downgrade procedure the NE must be power cycled off and back on again. The
power cycle takes approximately 15 minutes complete.
41 Power down and then power up the NE. See DLP-113 for information about the power
cycles of the NE.
NOTE: To complete the downgrade to 1+0 radio configuration, all TDM2ETH and TDM2TDM
cross-connections MAC address affected by this system downgrade, must be changed from
‘multicast’ to ‘unicast’ at the remote NEs.

DLP-117 3EM23956AL

address from ‘multicast’ to ‘unicast’ at the remote NEs. For more information about
how configure cross-connections, see the 9500 MPR-A Operation and Administration
Manual, DLP-112.
Upgrade fixed modulation to adaptive modulation configuration
43 CAUTION: Possibility of service interruption. This is an Out-of-Service procedure.

44 Verify that the system license key supports adaptive modulation. For more
information about how to display and update the system license key, see the
9500 MPR-A Operation and Administration Manual, DLP-120.
45 Open the radio channel view. Take a screen capture to save all radio channel
provisioning information.
46 Which type of radio direction configuration?
If 1+0 Not protected, go to step 49.

If 1+1 protected, go to step 47.
47 Mute the spare radio channel (channel #0).
48 Set the radio direction Protection Type to No Protection.
49 Is the ATPC enabled?

50 Disable the ATPC (unchecked) and click on the Apply button.
51 From the radio direction Mode drop-down menu, choose Adaptive Modulation and click
on the Apply button.
52 NOTE: If the sum of all TDM2TDM and TDM2ETH cross-connections exceed the supported
capacity for the reference channel at 4 QAM, the request to change modulation mode is
rejected.

54 Set the radio direction Protection Type to 1+1 HSB(SD) or 1+1 FD.
55 Unmute the spare radio channel (channel #0).

3EM23956AL
DLP-117
56 NOTE: To complete the upgrade from fixed modulation to adaptive modulation both ends of
the radio hop must be upgraded.
57 Verify that the radio direction is alarm free.
58 Verify that the radio direction is error free and operating as expected.
59 Go to step 75.
Downgrade adaptive modulation to fixed modulation configuration


63 Mute the spare radio channel (channel #0).
64 Set the radio direction Protection Type to No Protection.
65 From the radio direction Mode drop-down menu, choose Presetting and click on the
Apply button.

67 Set the radio direction Protection Type to 1+1 HSB(SD) or 1+1 FD.
68 Unmute the spare radio channel (channel #0).
69 Provision the ATPC?

70 Enable the ATPC (checked) and click on the Apply button.
71 Configure the local ATPC Tx range, remote ATPC Rx threshold, and click on the Apply
button.

DLP-117 3EM23956AL
72 NOTE: To complete the upgrade from adaptive modulation to fixed modulation both ends of
the radio hop must be downgraded.
74 Verify that they radio direction is error free and operating as expected.

3EM23956AL
DLP-117

DLP-118 3EM23956AL
DLP-118
Upgrade and downgrade radio profile
Purpose
These procedures describes how to upgrade and downgrade radio profile on the 9500 MPR-A system.
General
The radio profile upgrade and downgrade procedures provide the general steps and sequence
required to change protection scheme. The number of possible radio profile scenarios prevents
covering all upgrade and downgrade possibilities.
Radio profile
Radio profile upgrade applies when the new radio profile has a capacity which is larger than the
existing profile. In this case all the existing TDM2TDM or TDM2ETH cross-connections are kept and
the residual bandwidth for new TDM2TDM or TEM2ETH cross-connections are calculated.
Radio profile downgrade applies when the new radio profile has a capacity which is smaller than the
existing profile. When all the existing TDM2TDM and TDM2ETH cross-connections are supported
by the new profile, all the existing TDM2TDM and TDM2ETH cross-connections are kept and the
residual bandwidth for new TDM2TDM and TEM2ETH cross-connections will be recomputed. When
all the existing TDM2TDM and TDM2ETH cross-connections can not be supported by the new
profile, the request to change radio profile are rejected. Some existing TDM2TDM and/or TEM2ETH
cross-connections must be deleted to achieve a bandwidth which is supported by the new radio
profile.
STEP PROCEDURE
1 Select an action?
To Upgrade radio profile, go to step 2.

To Downgrade radio profile, go to step 12.
Upgrade radio profile

Upgrade and downgrade radio profile 5-83

3EM23956AL
DLP-118
3 Verify that the system license key supports the new radio profile. For information
about how to display and upgrade the system license key, see the 9500 MPR-A
Operation and Administration Manual, DLP-120.
4 From the radio direction Reference Channel Spacing drop-down menu, select new
channel bandwidth.
5 From the radio direction Modulation drop-down menu, select the new modulation
value.
6 Click on the Apply button.
7 Verify the Tx power provisioning and adjust, as described in the site documentation.
8 NOTE: To complete an upgrade of a radio profile, both ends of the radio hop must be
upgraded.
11 Go to step 22.
Downgrade radio profile

14 From the radio direction Reference Channel Spacing drop-down menu, select the new
channel bandwidth.
15 From the radio direction Modulation drop-down menu, select the new modulation
value.
16 Click on the Apply button.
17 NOTE: If the sum of all TDM2TDM and TDM2ETH cross-connections exceed the supported
capacity for the new radio channel, the request to change radio profile will be rejected.
18 Verify the Tx power provisioning and adjust, as described in the site documentation.
19 NOTE: To complete downgrade of radio profile both ends of the radio hop must be
downgraded.
5-84 Upgrade and downgrade radio profile

DLP-118 3EM23956AL
Upgrade and downgrade radio profile 5-85

3EM23956AL
DLP-118
5-86 Upgrade and downgrade radio profile

DLP-119 3EM23956AL
DLP-119
Upgrade unlicensed MPT-HL radio to lower 6 GHz radio
Purpose
This procedure describes how to upgrade a MPT-HL unlicensed radio hop to a lower 6 GHz radio hop
on the 9500 MPR-A system.
General
This upgrade procedure provides general steps and the sequence required to upgrade a MPT-HL
unlicensed radio hop to a lower 6 GHz radio hop. The number of possible radio configurations
precludes covering all possible radio configurations.
A site survey and site documentation must be provided to ensure that facilities that are not
associated with the upgrade radio direction are not impacted by this upgrade procedure.
This procedure describes the steps required for a protected radio direction. For not protected radio
directions, disregard the references to the spare radio channel.
Before starting this procedure, read and fully understand this procedure and all referenced
procedures in their entirety.
STEP PROCEDURE


The radio direction being upgraded must be taken Out-of Service to complete this
procedure. All remaining facilities that are not associated with the radio direction
scheduled for upgrade, should not be impacted by this upgrade procedure.

Upgrade unlicensed MPT-HL radio to lower 6 GHz radio 5-87

3EM23956AL
DLP-119



7 Verify that the system license key supports the new radio profile. For information
about how to display and update the system license key, see the 9500 MPR-A
Operation and Administration Manual, DLP-120.
8 CAUTION: Possibility of service interruption. Removing power to an In-Service

MPT-HL Transceiver in an unprotected link causes loss of traffic.
9 Position the local MPT-HL transceiver PA switch to the OFF ‘0’ position for the main
and spare channel.
10 Position the far end MPT-HL transceiver PA switch to the OFF ‘0’ position for the
main and spare channel.
11 Remove the fuse in PDU that is supplying battery power to the main and spare
MPT-HL transceiver.
12 Loosen the screws that are securing the MPT-HL transceivers to MPT-HL shelf. See
DLP-100 for information about how to remove the MPT-HL transceiver.
13 Unseat the MPT-HL transceivers to disconnect from shelf backplane connectors. Do

not remove the MPT-HL transceivers from the shelf.
14 Verify that all of the cable connections on the rear of the MPT-HL shelf to the MPT-HL
filter are properly labeled per site documentation.
15 Disconnect all of the cables that are connected to the MPT-HL Filter end only.
16 Remove the MPT-HL filter.
17 Install the new MPT-HL filter.
5-88 Upgrade unlicensed MPT-HL radio to lower 6 GHz radio

DLP-119 3EM23956AL
18 Connect all of the cables to the MPT-HL Filter that you disconnected in step 15.
Tighten the connectors to 7.1 in-lbs.
19 Verify that the cable ends are properly secured to the MPT-HL shelf and Tx switch.
Tighten the connectors to 7.1 in-lbs.
20 Seat the MPT-HL transceivers into the shelf.
21 Verify that the MPT-HL transceiver PA switch is in the OFF ‘0’ position for the main
and spare channel.
22 Install the fuse in the PDU that is suppling battery power to the main and spare
MPT-HL transceiver.
23 Using the Craft Terminal, provision the new radio profile as described in the site
documentation. For information about how to configure the radio profile, see the
9500 MPR-A Operation and Administration Manual, DLP-109.
NOTE: If one or more of the radio parameters is determined to be out of range, it must
be provisioned first before provisioning continues on the radio direction.
a. Set the new Channel #1 Shifter (MHz) shifter value.
b. Enter the TX Frequency within the allowed range. The Rx Freq (KHz) displays the
Rx RF Frequency.
c. Click on the Apply button.
d. Configure the new Reference Channel Spacing.
e. Configure the new Modulation scheme.
f. Configure the new gain configuration.
g. Click on the Apply button.
h. Which Tx Power management is configured?
If ATPC, go to step i.
If RTPC, go to step m.
i. Configure the new Minimum and Maximum transmit power values.
j. Configure the new remote ATPC Rx Threshold.
k. Click on the Apply button.
l. Go to step 24.
m. Configure the new RTPC Tx Power.
Upgrade unlicensed MPT-HL radio to lower 6 GHz radio 5-89

3EM23956AL
DLP-119
24 NOTE: To complete the upgrade of the radio profile, both ends of the radio hop must be
upgraded.
25 Position the local MPT-HL transceiver PA switch to the ON ‘1’ position for the main
and spare channel.
26 Position the far end MPT-HL transceiver PA switch to the ON ‘1’ position for the main
and spare channel.
5-90 Upgrade unlicensed MPT-HL radio to lower 6 GHz radio

DLP-120 3EM23956AL
DLP-120
+24/-48 volt converter replacement
Purpose
This procedure describes how to replace a +24/-48 volt Converter.
Prerequisites
General
The +24/-48 volt Converter is supported in the MSS-8 slots 4, 6, or 8 and MSS-4 slot 4.
In unprotected power configurations, one +24/-48 volt Converter is equipped in the left converter
chassis location.
In protected power configurations, the main +24/-48 volt Converter is equipped in the left converter
chassis location. The spare +24/-48 volt Converter is equipped in the right converter chassis location.
Removing the +24/-48 volt Converter from the MSS shelf does not remove power to the +24/-48 volt
Converter. Power from the PDU or battery must be turned off before removing the converter from
the chassis.
The +24/-48 volt Converter can not be removed and installed with power applied.
STEP PROCEDURE
1 DANGER: Possibility of personal injury. The +24/-48 Volt Converter must NOT be
installed or removed with bay power on. Hazardous electrical potentials are present.
Do NOT install or remove the +24/-48 Volt Converter card from the chassis with
power applied to the converter.
3 CAUTION: Possibility of service interruption. Removing an in-service +24/-48 Volt

Converter in an unprotected MSS-4/8 shelf causes loss of traffic.
+24/-48 volt converter replacement 5-91

3EM23956AL
DLP-120
4 CAUTION: Possibility of service interruption. In redundant power configurations,

the Main +24/-48 Volt Converter resides in left chassis location. The spare +24/-48
Volt Converter resides in right chassis location.

instructions.

+24/-48 Volt converter replacement procedure
7 Verify the status of the MSS-4/8 shelf.
a. Is traffic affected?
b. Is the shelf configured with unprotected or redundant power arrangement?
c. Is the appropriate maintenance window schedule per local practices and

procedures?
8 Is it appropriate to proceed with the +24/-48 Volt Converter replacement procedure?
9 CAUTION: Possibility of service interruption. Removing an In-Service +24/-48 Volt

Converter in an unprotected MSS-4/8 shelf causes loss of traffic.
5-92 +24/-48 volt converter replacement

DLP-120 3EM23956AL
Figure 120-1. +24/-48 Volt converter cabling diagram
Cable Assemblies:
3DB18766AA
Main
(A-Side)
Power
Protect
(B-Side)
Power
Main Power Protect Power

Cable Assemblies: Converter Converter 950-0152-1
3DB18271AA 101910
10 Remove the PDU/battery fuse supplying power to the converter to be replaced.
11 Verify that the two cables connected to the front of the converter are clearly identified.
12 Disconnect the two cables that are connected to the front of the converter.
13 Remove the converter to be replaced from the chassis. See DLP-100 for information
about how to remove the converter.

15 Install the replacement converter into the chassis. See DLP-100 for information about
how to install the converter.
16 Connect the two cables to the front of the converter that you disconnected in step 12.
17 Install the PDU/battery fuse that you removed in step 10.
18 Verify that there are no power-related alarms using the Alarm Monitor.
19 Is the replacement +24/-48 Volt Converter status normal and capable of carrying
traffic?

+24/-48 volt converter replacement 5-93

3EM23956AL
DLP-120
5-94 +24/-48 volt converter replacement

DLP-121 3EM23956AL
DLP-121
Power injector replacement
Purpose
This procedure describes how to replace a Power Injector card and Power Injector box.
Perquisites
General
The Power Injector Box/Card supports up to two 1+0 MPT ODU based radio channels. The
MPT ODU radio channels may be connected to MSS-4/8 Core-E or P8ETH cards, or MSS-1 shelf
Core.
The Power Injector card is supported in MSS-8 slots 3 to 8 and MSS-4 slots 3 and 4.
The Power Injector box is a stand-alone unit.
Power Injector replacement affects traffic on both radio channels that are associated with the Power
Injector Box/Card. Fully understand the ramifications to both radio channels before beginning the
Power Injector Replacement Procedure. Verify that radio protection is available for all traffic that is
supported by the Power Injector to be replaced or appropriate maintenance window is scheduled per
The Power Injector card can be removed and installed with power applied to the MSS-4 and MSS-8
shelf.
The Power Injector box must be powered down during the replacement procedure.
STEP PROCEDURE


Power injector replacement 5-95

3EM23956AL
DLP-121
3 CAUTION: Possibility of service interruption. Replacing an in-service Power Injector

causes loss of traffic on both radio channels that are associated with the Power
Injector.

instructions.
5 WARNING: Possibility of equipment damage. When installing a Power

Injector card, ensure its backplane connector is correctly engaged before
applying sufficient pressure to bring the plug-in pane flush with the front
panel. Improper alignment can result in damaged pins on the backplane
connector and/or damage to the plug-in connector.

Power injector replacement procedure
7 Determine the Power Injector box/card configuration.
a. Does the Power Injector support one or two radio channels?
b. Is traffic supported on one or both radio channels?
8 Verify that the appropriate maintenance window is scheduled per local practices and
procedures.
9 Is it appropriate to proceed with Power Injector replacement procedure?

10 CAUTION: Possibility of service interruption. Replacing an in-service Power Injector

causes loss of traffic on both radio channels associated with the Power Injector.
11 Verify that all cable connections to the Power Injector to be replaced are properly
labeled.
12 Which Power Injector is to be replaced?
If Power Injector box, go to step 13.

If Power Injector card, go to step 20.
5-96 Power injector replacement

DLP-121 3EM23956AL
13 Locate the fuses protecting the A and B battery feeds to the Power Injector box and
remove.
14 Disconnect all of the cables that re connected to the front of the Power Injector box.
15 Remove the Power Injector box to be replaced from the bracket.
16 Install the Power Injector box onto the bracket.
17 Connect all of the cables to the front of the Power Injector box that you disconnected
in step 14.
18 Install the fuses protecting the A and B battery feeds removed in step 13.
19 Go to step 25.
20 Remove the Power Injector card to be replaced. See DLP-100 for information about
how to remove the card.
21 Disconnect all of the cables that are connected to the front of the Power Injector card.

23 Install the replacement Power Injector card into shelf. See DLP-100 for information
about how to install the card.
24 Connect all of the cables to the front of the Power Injector card that you disconnected
in step 21.
25 Retrieve the alarms using the Alarm Monitor. A Dialog Failure is declared against the
MPT ODUs. Wait for Dialog Failure condition to clear before proceeding.
26 Verify the MPT ODUs that are associated with the replacement Power Injector are
free of alarms using Alarm Monitor.
27 Verify the radio channels that are supported by the Power Injector are error free.
28 Are the MPT ODUs that are associated with the replacement Power Injector error free
and free of alarms?

Power injector replacement 5-97

3EM23956AL
DLP-121
5-98 Power injector replacement

DLP-122 3EM23956AL
DLP-122
RPS/XPIC module replacement
Purpose
This procedure describes how to replace a RPS and XPIC module on the MPT-HC/MPT-XP/9558HC
(MPT ODU).
Prerequisites
Before starting, verify that the replacement RPS or XPIC module type matches the failed RPS or
XPIC using the following procedure.
1. Obtain the part number of the failed RPS or XPIC on the remote inventory screen.
2. Verify the part number of the replacement RPS or XPIC, located on the
identification label, matches the part number of the failed RPS or XPIC.
General
The RPS/XPIC module is installed on the MPT ODU.
Appropriate personnel are required to replace the RPS/XPIC module.
You can replace the MPT ODU with the replacement RPS/XPIC module already installed per local
practices and procedures. If the MPT ODU replacement is preferred, see DLP-115.
Table 122-A. MPT ODU 1+1 module details

ITEM DESCRIPTION Part Number
XPIC Module 3DB20116BA/BB
RPS Module 3DB20117BA
See the 9500 MPR-A Installation Practices (PN 3EM23953AL) Charts 10 for information about how
to physically remove and install the RPS/XPIC module to be replaced in this procedure.
RPS/XPIC module replacement 5-99

3EM23956AL
DLP-122
STEP PROCEDURE

frequencies. Observe all safety instruction per local practices and procedures
during RPS/XPIC replacement procedure.
2 DANGER: Possibility of personal injury. RPS/XPIC replacement should not be

performed with power applied. Hazardous electrical potentials are present; use
extreme care when installing or removing RPS/XPIC module.

instructions.

unprotected link causes a loss of traffic on all facilities that are associated with the
MPT ODU in alarm. Schedule appropriate maintenance window per local practices
and procedures.
5 CAUTION: Possibility of service interruption. Forced EPS/HSB/Rx Radio switching

6 What is the radio configuration that is associated with the RPS/XPIC module to be
replaced?
If 1+1 XPIC or 1+1 protected, go to step 7.

If co-channel XPIC, go to step 17.
If 1+0 unprotected, go to step 19.
7 CAUTION: Possibility of service interruption. Forced EPS/HSB/Rx Radio switching

8 Is the radio channel that is associated with the RPS/XPIC to be replaced the main or
spare?
12 Go to step 20.
5-100 RPS/XPIC module replacement

DLP-122 3EM23956AL
16 Go to step 20.
17 CAUTION: Possibility of service interruption. Replacing the MPT ODU RPS/XPIC

module in an unprotected XPIC link (horizontal or vertical) may cause a disruption
to traffic on the other polarization radio channel (vertical or horizontal) which is a
member of the XPIC configuration.
18 Go to step 20.
19 CAUTION: Possibility of service interruption. Replacing the MPT ODU RPS/XPIC

module in an unprotected link causes a loss of traffic on ALL facilities that are
associated with the MPT ODU. Schedule appropriate maintenance window per local
20 Mute the radio channel that is associated with the RPS/XPIC to be replaced.
21 Remove power to the MPT ODU housing the RPS/XPIC; module to be replaced. Use
the Craft Terminal and disable power source.
NOTE: The procedure to remove an RPS/XPIC is the reverse of RPS/XPIC installation. See
Installation Practices manual (PN 3EM23953AL) Charts 10 for information about how to
physically install an MPT ODU.
22 Remove the solar shield from the MPT ODU.
23 Verify that all cable connections to the MPT ODU are properly labeled.
24 Disconnect all of the cables that are connected to the MPT ODU RPS/XPIC module.
See the Installation Practices Manual for more information.
25 Remove the external RPS/XPIC cover.
26 Remove the cap from the replacement RPS/XPIC module.
27 Verify that the gasket is in good condition and installed properly.
28 Install the replacement RPS/XPIC module onto the MPT ODU and lock the four
screws. Pay attention to the correct position of the screws.
29 Connect all of the cables to the MPT ODU RPS/XPIC module that you disconnected in
step 24.

3EM23956AL
DLP-122
30 Install the solar shield onto the MPT ODU.
31 Apply power to the MPT ODU.
32 Unmute the radio channel that is associated with the replaced MPT ODU RPS/XPIC
module.
33 Using the Craft Terminal, verify that there are no alarms associated with the
MPT ODU associated with the RPS/XPIC module replacement.
34 Open WebEML Measurements windows for the radio channel that is associated with
the MPT ODU RPS/XPIC module replacement.
35 On the Measurements window, enter 15 minutes Measurement Interval.
36 On the Measurements window, select 2 sec Sample Time.
37 On the Measurements window, click on the Start button to start measurements. The
38 On the Measurement graphics window, check on the Details box.Tx and Rx dBm
Power Levels Details table appears.
39 On Tx and Rx dBm Power Levels Details table, verify the Local and Far End Tx and
Rx power levels.
40 Is the MPT ODU status normal and capable of carrying traffic?

41 What is the radio configuration that is associated with the RPS/XPIC module to be
replaced?
If 1+1 XPIC or 1+1 protected, go to step 42.

If co-channel XPIC, go to step 47.
If 1+0 unprotected, go to step 47.


DLP-122 3EM23956AL

3EM23956AL
DLP-122

DLP-123 3EM23956AL
DLP-123
Upgrade MPT ODU to MPT ODU L1 LAG port
Purpose
This procedure describes how to upgrade an Out-of-Service MPT-HC/MPT-XP/9558HC (MPT ODU)

radio hop to an MPT ODU configured as the L1 LAG Master Port.
General
This upgrade procedure provides general steps and the sequence required to upgrade an MPT ODU
radio interface supported on an MPTACC card to an MPT ODU radio interface supported on an
P8ETH card and configured as the L1 LAG Master Port.
The L1 LAG Master Port must be located in P8ETH card Ethernet port 5 or 7.
The number of possible radio configurations precludes covering all possible radio configurations.
MPT ODU connected to an P8ETH card requires power provided by one of the following methods:
• MPT Power Unit
• MPT Extended Power Unit (required for MPT-XP)
• Power Injector Card
• Power Injector Box
• Direct connection to office power
• MPTACC card
A site survey and site documentation must be provided to ensure that facilities that are NOT
associated with the upgrade MPT ODU radio direction are not impacted by this upgrade procedure.
Before the L1 LAG port is ready to carry traffic, this procedure must be performed at both ends of
the radio hop.
Upgrade MPT ODU to MPT ODU L1 LAG port 5-105

3EM23956AL
DLP-123
STEP PROCEDURE



The radio direction being upgraded must be taken Out-of Service to complete this
procedure. All remaining facilities that are not associated with the radio direction
scheduled for upgrade, should not be impacted by this upgrade procedure.




8 Verify the NE is running R3.4.0 or higher software version.
9 Install power source as required per site documentation including running any new
cabling between the power source and the MPT ODU.
10 Install optical Ethernet fiber from MSS-4/8 shelf to MPT ODU as required per site
documentation.
11 Verify that the MPT ODU radio interface is NOT associated with the following:
a. Cross-Connection
5-106 Upgrade MPT ODU to MPT ODU L1 LAG port

DLP-123 3EM23956AL
b. VLAN
c. Port Segregation
d. PPP RF enabled
e. Synchronization reference
f. SSM
12 Perform a database backup. See the 9500 MPR-A Operation and Administration
Manual, DLP-131 for a detailed procedure to perform a database backup.
13 If MPT ODU radio interface is configured for 1+1 HSB/FD/SD, downgrade radio
protection to 1+0. Refer to 9500 MPR-A Maintenance and Trouble Clearing Manual,
DLP-117 for a detailed procedure.
14 Disable MPT ODU radio port from MPTACC card. See the 9500 MPR-A Operation
and Administration Manual, DLP-105 for a detailed procedure.
15 If MPTACC PFoE is the power source for the MPT ODU, verify the power source is
still configured for PFoE.
16 If MPTACC card is to be replaced with P8ETH card to support L1 LAG port. Perform
the following actions:
a. Verify no radio interfaces are supported on the remaining MPTACC radio

interface. If there is a radio interface connected to the remaining MPTACC radio
port, STOP this procedure immediately and contact the next level of support!
b. Disable MPTACC card. See the 9500 MPR-A Operation and Administration
Manual, DLP-105 for a detailed procedure.
c. Remove the MPTACC card from the MSS-4/8 shelf.
d. Install the P8ETH card into the MSS-4/8 shelf.
17 Verify/enable P8ETH card to support L1 LAG port.
NOTE: Electrical SFPs are NOT supported for interconnection between P8ETH SFP
port and MPT ODU.
18 Install SFP into the P8ETH radio port and connect fiber cable to SFP. L1 LAG Master
port must reside in P8ETH Ethernet port 5 or 7.
19 Install SFP into the MPT ODU data port and connect the fiber cable to the SFP per
site documentation.
20 Provision MPT ODU radio interface.
Upgrade MPT ODU to MPT ODU L1 LAG port 5-107

3EM23956AL
DLP-123
21 If MPTACC PFoE/SMA connector is the power source for the MPT ODU, the
Ethernet/coax cable remains connected and will be used to power the MPT ODU.
22 If MPTACC PFoE is the power source for the MPT ODU, perform one of the following:
a. Disable the power source. Then provision the power source for PFoE. See the
9500 MPR-A Operation and Administration Manual, DLP-109 for a detailed
procedure to provision MPT ODU power scheme.
b. Unplug and reinsert the PFoE Ethernet cable on the MPTACC card.
23 Create L1 LAG port. See the 9500 MPR-A Operation and Administration Manual,
DLP-140 for a detailed procedure to create L1 LAG port.
24 Add MPT ODU radio interface to L1 LAG port. See the 9500 MPR-A Operation and
Administration Manual, DLP-140 for a detailed procedure to create L1 LAG port.
25 NOTE: To complete the upgrade to MPT ODU L1 LAG Port, this procedure must be
performed on both ends of the radio hop.
5-108 Upgrade MPT ODU to MPT ODU L1 LAG port

DLP-124 3EM23956AL
DLP-124
Upgrade MPT-HL to MPT-HL L1 LAG port
Purpose
This procedure describes how to upgrade an In-Service MPT-HL radio hop to an MPT-HL configured
as an L1 LAG Lowest Index Port.
General
This upgrade procedure provides general steps and the sequence required to upgrade an MPT-HL
radio port In-Service to an MPT-HL configured as an L1 LAG Lowest Index Port.
Supported configurations are as follows:
• 1+0 to 1+0 L1 LAG Port
• 1+1 HSB to 1+1 HSB L1 LAG Port
• 1+1 FD to 1+1 L1 LAG Ports
Upgrade from an 1+1 FD to 2+0 L1 LAG Ports is not supported. To accomplish this upgrade perform
the following steps:
• Down grade the 1+1 FD to 1+0 not protected.upgrade, See DLP-117 for a detailed
procedure to download.
• Perform this procedure in its entirety
• Add the second MPT-HL radio port to the L1 LAG port
The MPT-HL radio ports to be upgraded to L1 LAG port(s) must reside in P8ETH card Ethernet port
5 or 7 to be a candidate for this upgrade procedure.
The L1 LAG Lowest Index Port must be located in P8ETH card Ethernet port 5 or 7.
During this procedure the following parameters are re-provisioned to the L1 LAG port:
• Cross-Connections
• VLANs
• Port Segregation
• PPP-RF
• Synchronization
Upgrade MPT-HL to MPT-HL L1 LAG port 5-109

3EM23956AL
DLP-124
The Max User Bandwidth available for a radio port configured as an L1 LAG port member is
ninety-five percent of the pre-migration MPT-HL radio port capacity. The reduction in Max User
Bandwidth must be accounted for prior to migration to an L1 LAG port. Failure to account for this
reduction in Max User Bandwidth may result in a loss of ALL cross-connected traffic after the
migration to the L1 LAG port.
TDM2TDM and TDM2ETH services supported by the L1 LAG port require a different amount of
bandwidth then when supported by an MPT-HL radio port. The required bandwidth for
cross-connected services must be recalculated to ensure that the cross-connected services do not
exceed the Max User Bandwidth of the new L1 LAG port. Failure to confirm that all services are
supported by the new L1 LAG port may result in a loss of ALL cross-connected traffic after the
migration to the L1 LAG port. For information regarding bandwidth required based upon type of
service, see table 124-A. To calculate the required bandwidth for cross-connected services, use the
following equation:
Required Bandwidth = (# DS1 TDM2TDM x 2080) + (# DS1 TDM2ETH x 1882) +

(# DS3 TDM2TDM x 60264) + (# DS3 TDM2ETH x 46571)
Table 124-A. MPT-HL L1 LAG bandwidth per service type

Type of service L1 LAG bandwidth used MPT-HL bandwidth used
[Kbps] [Kbps]
DS1 TDM2TDM 2080 1683
DS1 TDM2Eth 1882 1694
DS3 TDM2TDM 60264 48756
DS3 TDM2Eth 46571 45574
CAUTION: Possibility of service interruption: Migration to L1 LAG port impacts TDM2TDM and TDM2ETH
traffic on a per flow-id basis. Typical impact to traffic is less than 10 seconds for each cross-connection.
The time required for the system to migrate the MPT-HL radio port to the L1 LAG port is dependent upon
radio port provisioning (synchronization, PPP RF, number of; port segregations, VLANs, and
cross-connections). Typical migration duration is less than two minutes. Allow up to five minutes for the
system to migrate all services from the MPT-HL radio port to the L1 LAG port.
The number of possible radio configurations precludes covering all possible radio configurations.
A site survey and site documentation must be provided to ensure that facilities that are NOT
associated with the upgrade MPT-HL radio direction are not impacted by this upgrade procedure.
To complete the migration to an L1 LAG port, both ends of the MPT-HL radio direction must be
migrated.
See the 9500 MPR-A Product Information (PN 3EM23952AL) for a detailed description of the L1
LAG feature and to determine card location and type.
5-110 Upgrade MPT-HL to MPT-HL L1 LAG port

DLP-124 3EM23956AL
STEP PROCEDURE

2 CAUTION: Possibility of service interruption. Upgrading an MPT-HL radio port to a L1 LAG

port with cross-connections in excess of the supported Max User Bandwidth will result in
a loss of services on ALL cross-connected services associated with the L1 LAG port.
3 CAUTION: Possibility of service interruption. Migration to L1 LAG port impacts TDM2TDM

and TDM2ETH traffic on a per flow-id basis. Typical impact to traffic is less than 10
seconds for each cross-connection.




8 Verify the NE is running R3.4.0 or higher software version.
9 Verify the MPT-HL radio channel is alarm/condition free and error free on both the
near and far ends of the radio hop.
10 Verify there are no unexpected and unexplained alarm/abnormal conditions declared

on the MSS-4/8 shelf supporting both the near and far ends of the radio direction.
11 Verify that ninety-five percent of the MPT-HL radio channel bandwidth is sufficient
to support the existing cross-connected services when configured in an L1 LAG port.

3EM23956AL
DLP-124
12 Perform a database backup. See the 9500 MPR-A Operation and Administration
Manual, DLP-131 for a detailed procedure to perform a database backup.
13 If radio channel is configured in 1+1 HSB/FD configuration, verify that the radio link
is active on the main radio hop on both the near and far ends of the radio link for the
following:
• Equipment Protection Switching (EPS)
• Hot StandBy (HSB)
• Rx Radio (RPS)
14 If radio channel is configured in 1+1 HSB/FD configuration, perform Lockout

protection switch for the following:
• Rx Radio (RPS)
15 If MPT-HL radio interface is configured for 1+1 FD, and the desired configuration is
2+0 L1 LAG port, downgrade radio protection to 1+0. See the 9500 MPR-A
Maintenance and Trouble Clearing Manual, DLP-117 for a detailed procedure.
16 Download and save the Current Configuration file. See the 9500 MPR-A Operation
and Administration Manual, DLP-116 for a detailed procedure to download and save
the current configuration file.
17 Create L1 LAG port. See the 9500 MPR-A Operation and Administration Manual,
DLP-140 for a detailed procedure to create L1 LAG port.
18 CAUTION: Possibility of service interruption. Upgrading an MPT-HL radio port to an L1

LAG port with cross-connections in excess of the supported Max User Bandwidth will
result in a loss of traffic on ALL cross-connected services associated with the L1 LAG port.
19 CAUTION: Possibility of service interruption. Migration to L1 LAG port impacts TDM2TDM

and TDM2ETH traffic on a per flow-id basis. Typical impact to traffic is less than 10
seconds for each cross-connection.
20 Add MPT-HL radio interface to L1 LAG port. See the 9500 MPR-A Operation and
Administration Manual, DLP-140 for a detailed procedure to create L1 LAG port.
When you add the radio port to the L1 LAG port, the following message will display.

DLP-124 3EM23956AL
Figure 124-1. MPT-HL to L1 LAG information message
21 Click on the OK button.
After you click on the OK button, the following warning message will display.
Figure 124-2. MPT-HL to L1 LAG warning message
22 Click on the Yes button.
23 Wait for the system to migrate services to the L1 LAG port.
The time required for the system to migrate the MPT-HL radio port to the L1 LAG port
is dependent upon radio port provisioning (synchronization, PPP RF, number of; port
segregations, VLANs, and cross-connections provisioned). Typical migration duration
is two minutes or less. Allow up to five minutes for the system to migrate all services
from the MPT-HL radio port to the L1 LAG port. When the system has completed
migrating to the L1 LAG port you will be prompted to close the Craft Terminal.
24 Close the Craft Terminal.
25 Reopen the Craft Terminal and log in to the NE.
28 Download and save the Current Configuration file.
29 Using the Current Configuration files downloaded in steps 16 and 28, verify that the
following provisioning parameters were re-provisioned correctly:

3EM23956AL
DLP-124
• Cross-Connections
• VLANs
• Port Segregation
• PPP-RF
• Synchronization
30 If radio channel is configured in 1+1 HSB/FD configuration, release Lockout

protection switch for the following:
• Rx Radio (RPS)
31 NOTE: To complete the upgrade to MPT-HL L1 LAG Port, this procedure must be
performed on both ends of the radio direction.

DLP-125 3EM23956AL
DLP-125
MPT Power Unit replacement
Purpose
This procedure describes how to replace a MPT Power Unit or MPT Extended Power Unit.
Prerequisites
General
The MPT Power Unit and MPT Extended Power Unit are stand-alone units.
The MPT Power Unit provides power for up to four MPT-HC/MPT-XP/9558HC (MPT ODU) based
radio channels.
The MPT Extended Power Unit provides power for up to two MPT ODU based radio channels.
Power Unit replacement affects traffic on ALL radio channels that are associated with the Power
Unit. Fully understand the ramifications to ALL radio channels before beginning the Power Unit
Replacement Procedure. Verify that radio protection is available for all traffic that is supported by
the Power Unit to be replaced or an appropriate maintenance window is scheduled per local practices
and procedures.
The Power Unit must be powered down during the replacement procedure.
STEP PROCEDURE


3 CAUTION: Possibility of service interruption. Replacing an in-service MPT Power

Unit causes loss of traffic on ALL radio channels that are associated with the MPT
Power Unit.
MPT Power Unit replacement 5-115

3EM23956AL
DLP-125

instructions.

MPT power unit replacement procedure
6 Determine the Power Unit configuration.
a. Does the Power Unit support one, two, or more radio channels?
b. Is traffic supported on one, two, or more radio channels?
procedures.
8 Is it appropriate to proceed with Power Unit replacement procedure?
9 CAUTION: Possibility of service interruption. Replacing an in-service Power Unit

causes loss of traffic on ALL radio channels associated with the Power Unit.
10 Verify that all cable connections to the Power Unit to be replaced are properly labeled.
11 Locate the fuses protecting the A and B battery feeds to the Power Unit and remove.
12 Disconnect all of the cables that are connected to the front of the Power Unit.
13 Remove the Power Unit to be replaced from the bracket.
14 Install the Power Unit onto the bracket.
15 Connect all of the cables to the front of the Power Unit that you disconnected in
step 12.
5-116 MPT Power Unit replacement

DLP-125 3EM23956AL
18 Verify all the MPT ODUs that are associated with the replacement Power Unit are
free of alarms using Alarm Monitor.
19 Verify all the radio channels that are supported by the Power Unit are error free.
20 Are ALL the MPT ODUs that are associated with the replacement Power Unit error
free and free of alarms?

MPT Power Unit replacement 5-117

3EM23956AL
DLP-125
5-118 MPT Power Unit replacement

DLP-126 3EM23956AL
DLP-126
SDHACC (2-Port OC-3) Replacement
PURPOSE
This procedure describes how to replace a SDHACC card.
PREREQUISITES
GENERAL
The OC-3 SDHACC card can be installed in any of the universal MSS-8 slots (3 through 8) and
MSS-4 slots (3 through 4).
The MSS-8 can be configured with a maximum of six optional SDHACC cards; three protected pairs,
six unprotected cards, or a combination of protected pairs and unprotected cards.
The MSS-4 can be configured with a maximum of two optional SDHACC cards; one protected pair or
two unprotected cards.
In protected OC-3 configurations, the main SDHACC is resident in slots 3, 5, and/or 7. The spare
SDHACC is resident in slots 4, 6, and/or 8 respectively. The main and spare cards must be plugged
in side-by-side.
In unprotected OC-3 configurations, performing the SDHACC removal and replacement procedure
causes loss of traffic. In a protected system the procedure is an in-service but not a disruptionless
procedure.
STEP PROCEDURE

SDHACC (2-Port OC-3) Replacement 5-119

3EM23956AL
DLP-126
3 CAUTION: Possibility of service interruption. In protected OC-3 configurations, the

Main SDHACC cards reside in slots 3, 5, and/or 7. The Spare SDHACC cards reside
in slots 4, 6, and/or 8.





SDHACC Replacement Procedures
9 Is the SDHACC to be replaced in a protected system?


11 Is the SDHACC to be replaced the main or spare?

13 Go to step 15.
5-120 SDHACC (2-Port OC-3) Replacement

DLP-126 3EM23956AL
15 Verify that the SDHACC to be replaced status is Standby.

17 Verify that all cable connections to the SDHACC card to be replaced are properly
labeled.
18 Remove the SDHACC to be replaced. See DLP-100 for information about how to
remove the card.
19 Disconnect the OC-3 input and output cables.
20 Install the replacement SDHACC into the shelf, but do not seat the card at this time.
See DLP-100 for information about how to install card.
21 Connect the OC-3 input and output cables.

23 Install the replacement SDHACC into the shelf.
25 Verify the replacement SDHACC alarms, that the status is normal, and capable of
26 Is the replacement SDHACC status normal and capable of carrying traffic?

27 Is the replacement SDHACC in a protected system?


30 Go to step 32.
SDHACC (2-Port OC-3) Replacement 5-121

3EM23956AL
DLP-126
5-122 SDHACC (2-Port OC-3) Replacement

DLP-127 3EM23956AL
DLP-127
Software package rollback
Purpose
This procedure describes how to rollback to the previous software package version on a 9500 MPR-A
system.
General
The system supports software package rollback to the previous committed software version.
Software package rollback is supported when the software package and the MSS database for the
previous committed software version are both still present on the Core-E flash card.
All configuration changes applied to the NE after the software version upgrade will be lost during
the software package rollback operation.
Caution: Possibility of service interruption: The software package rollback operation

WILL impact traffic including a possible long out-of service period. For this reason
software package rollback should be considered as a critical operation to be performed
as a last resort only after all other alternatives have been explored.
Software package rollback functionality was added in R4.0.0 and is available for software upgrades
from R4.0.0 and greater. Table 127-A provides a list of supported software package rollbacks:
Table 127-A. Releases supporting software package rollback

Initial software Upgrade software Software package
release version release version rollback support
(Current Status: ‘Stand by’) (Current Status: ‘Committed’)
R3.2.0, R3.3.0, or R3.4.0 R4.0.0 No
R3.4.0 R4.1.0 No
R4.0.0 R4.1.0 Yes
For a full description of the software package rollback feature, see the 9500 MPR-A Product
Information (PN 3EM23952AL).
STEP PROCEDURE
1 CAUTION: Possibility of service interruption. The software package rollback operation

Software package rollback 5-123

3EM23956AL
DLP-127
2 Have all alternative been explored to resolve the system problem?
3 Have all appropriate levels of support been notified and all are in agreement that a
software package rollback is the appropriate next step?
4 Contact ALL appropriate levels of support and obtain all appropriate approvals as
required per local practices and procedures.
5 Have all appropriate levels of support been notified and are in agreement that a
software package rollback is the appropriate next step?
Software package rollback procedure
6 CAUTION: Possibility of service interruption. The software package rollback operation

7 Open the NE Software Status Detail window.
From the Main Menu Bar select, SW Download>SW Status.
8 On the software bank with the Current Status Committed, verify the software version
matches that of the upgraded software package. See figure 127-2
5-124 Software package rollback

DLP-127 3EM23956AL
Figure 127-2. Software bank with upgrade software version Committed status
9 On the software bank with the Current Status Standby, verify the software version
matches that of the initial software package. See figure 127-3
Figure 127-3. Software bank with Initial software version Standby status

3EM23956AL
DLP-127
10 Are the committed (upgrade) and standby (initial) software version verified and
correct as expected?

11 On the software bank for the standby software version, select from the Software
Management Action drop-down menu Forced Activation. See figure 127-4
Figure 127-4. Software Management Action - Forced Activation
12 Select the Apply Action button. See figure 127-4
13 Communication with the NE will be lost. Wait until the Core-E card status LED is
solid green before proceeding to step 14.
14 Log in to the NE.
15 Open the NE Software Status Detail window.
From the Main Menu Bar select, SW Download>SW Status.
16 On the software bank with the Current Status Committed, verify the software version
matches that of the initial software package. See figure 127-5

DLP-127 3EM23956AL
Figure 127-5. Software bank with initial software version Committed status
17 On the software bank with the Current Status Standby, verify the software version
matches that of the upgrade software package. See figure 127-6
Figure 127-6. Software bank with upgrade software version Standby status

3EM23956AL
DLP-127
18 Are the committed (initial) and standby (upgrade) software version verified and
correct as expected?

19 Contact the next level of support for assistance.

DLP-128 3EM23956AL
DLP-128
MSS-1 shelf replacement
Purpose
This procedure describes how to replace a MSS-1 shelf.
Prerequisites
General
The MSS-1 shelf is a stand-alone unit.
The MSS-1 shelf provides power for up to two MPT-HC/MPT-XP/9558HC (MPT ODU) based radio
channels.
The MSS-1 shelf supports up to four electrical Ethernet ports and up to two optical Ethernet ports.
Each Ethernet port (electrical or optical) may support an MPT ODU radio channel.
The MSS-1 shelf supports up to sixteen DS1 ports.
MSS-1 shelf replacement affects traffic on ALL Ethernet ports, radio channels, and DS1 ports that
are associated with the MSS-1 shelf. Fully understand the ramifications to ALL Ethernet and DS1
ports, and radio channels before beginning the MSS-1 shelf Replacement Procedure. Verify that an
appropriate maintenance window is scheduled per local practices and procedures.
The MSS-1 shelf must be powered down during the replacement procedure.
See the 9500 MPR-A Product Information (PN 3EM23952AL) to determine port location and type.
STEP PROCEDURE
1 CAUTION: Possibility of service interruption. Replacing an in-service MSS-1 shelf

causes loss of traffic on ALL radio channels, Ethernet Ports, and DS1 ports that are
associated with the MSS-1 shelf.

equipment. MSS-1 shelf contain static-sensitive devices. These devices can be
damaged by static discharge. See the Introduction for special handling
instructions.
MSS-1 shelf replacement 5-129

3EM23956AL
DLP-128
MSS-1 shelf replacement procedure
3 Determine the MSS-1 shelf configuration.
a. Does the MSS-1 support one or more radio channels?
b. Are DS1 ports configured and carrying traffic?
c. Are Ethernet ports configured and carrying traffic?
procedures.
5 Is it appropriate to proceed with Power Unit replacement procedure?
6 CAUTION: Possibility of service interruption. Replacing an in-service MSS-1 shelf

causes loss of traffic on ALL radio channels, Ethernet Ports, and DS1 ports
associated with the MSS-1 shelf.
7 Verify that all cable connections to the MSS-1 shelf to be replaced are properly labeled.
8 Locate the fuses protecting the A and B battery feeds to the MSS-1 shelf and remove.
9 Disconnect all of the cables that are connected to the front of the MSS-1 shelf.
10 Remove the MSS-1 shelf to be replaced from the bracket.
11 Install the MSS-1 shelf onto the bracket.
12 Connect all of the cables to the front of the MSS-1 shelf that you disconnected in step 9.
15 Verify the MPT ODUs that are associated with the replacement MSS-1 shelf are free
of alarms using Alarm Monitor.
16 Verify the radio channels that are supported by the MSS-1 shelf are error free.
5-130 MSS-1 shelf replacement

DLP-128 3EM23956AL
17 Are ALL the MPT ODUs that are associated with the replacement MSS-1 shelf error
free and free of alarms?

18 Troubleshoot the MSS-1 shelf MPT ODU alarms.
20 Are the MSS-1 shelf MPT ODU alarms clear?

21 Are ALL the Ethernet ports that are associated with the replacement MSS-1 shelf
error free and free of alarms?

22 Troubleshoot the MSS-1 shelf Ethernet port alarms.
24 Are the MSS-1 shelf Ethernet port alarms clear?

25 Are ALL the MSS-1 shelf DS1 ports that are associated with the replacement MSS-1
shelf error free and free of alarms?

26 Troubleshoot the MSS-1 shelf DS1 port alarms.
28 Are the MSS-1 shelf DS1 port alarms clear?

MSS-1 shelf replacement 5-131

3EM23956AL
DLP-128
5-132 MSS-1 shelf replacement

Customer documentation and product
support
Customer documentation
http://www.alcatel-lucent.com/myaccess
Product manuals and documentation updates are available at alcatel-lucent.com. If you
are a new user and require access to this service, please contact your Alcatel-Lucent sales
representative.
Technical support
http://support.alcatel-lucent.com
Documentation feedback
documentation.feedback@alcatel-lucent.com
© 2012-2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All rights reserved.
3EM23956ALAA Edition 02

3EM23956ALAATQZZA02 - V1 - 9500 MPR-A R4.1.0 Maintenance and Trouble Clearing

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

3EM23956ALAATQZZA02 - V1 - 9500 MPR-A R4.1.0 Maintenance and Trouble Clearing

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Main Documentation

Maintenance and Trouble Clearing

Maintenance and Trouble Clearing

Copyright 2012-2013 Alcatel-Lucent.

All rights reserved.

© Alcatel-Lucent 2012-2013 - All Rights Reserved

1. 9500 MPR-A unlicensed radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1

3. Maintenance philosophy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7

4. Safety awareness. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17

5. Electrostatic-sensitive devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-31

6. Product support information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-33

© Alcatel-Lucent 2012-2013 - All Rights Reserved i

Index Task Lists (IXLs)

IXL-100 Task index list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1

IXL-101 Alarm and abnormal condition clearing procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3

IXL-102 Support procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-41

IXL-103 Equipment replacement procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-43

IXL-104 Supporting information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-45

Routine Task Lists (RTLs)

RTL-100 Preventive maintenance procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1

Trouble Analysis Procedures (TAPs)

TAP-100 Facility alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1

TAP-101 Abnormal conditions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23

TAP-102 Power alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31

TAP-103 Equipment alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-39

TAP-106 License/software mismatch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-77

TAP-107 Internal loss of communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-81

TAP-108 Threshold crossing alarms (MOD300, MPT-HC, MPT-HL, MPT-XP,

TAP-109 Synchronization alarms (Core-E, MOD300, MPT-HC, MPT-HL, MPT-XP,

TAP-111 Cable LOS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-119

TAP-112 Loss of alignment (MOD300, MPT-HC, MPT-HL, MPT-XP, 9558HC) . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-125

TAP-113 Loss of frame (MOD300, MPT-HC, MPT-HL, MPT-XP, 9558HC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-131

TAP-114 RPS path fail (MPT-HC, MPT-HL, MPT-XP, 9558HC). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-143

TAP-115 Rx fail (MOD300) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-147

TAP-116 Housekeeping alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-153

TAP-117 LAG alarms (Core-E, MPT-HC, MPT-HL, MPT-XP, ODU300, 9558HC,

TAP-118 Ethernet connectivity fault management alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-157

TAP-119 Clock failure (MPT-HC, MPT-HL, MPT-XP, 9558HC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-161

Detailed Level Procedures (DLPs)

DLP-100 Mechanical card removal and installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1

DLP-101 MPT-HL transceiver air filter replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3

DLP-102 SFP replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5

DLP-103 Core switching module (Core-E) replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7

DLP-104 Core switching module (Core-E) flash card replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13

DLP-105 Ethernet access switch (P8ETH) replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21

DLP-106 MSS-4/8 shelf FAN replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27

DLP-107 MOD300 (radio modem) replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-29

DLP-108 MPT-HL transceiver replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-33

DLP-109 ODU300 replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-37

DLP-110 P2E3DS3 (2-Port DS3) replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-41

DLP-111 P32E1DS1 (32-Port DS1) replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-45

DLP-112 Clean fiber-optic connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-49

DLP-113 System power down and power up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-55

DLP-114 MPTACC (MPT Access) replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-59

DLP-115 MPT ODU replacement (MPT-HC, MPT-XP, 9558HC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-65

Table of Contents iii

DLP-116 Auxiliary (AUX) replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-71

DLP-117 Protection upgrade and downgrade procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-73

DLP-118 Upgrade and downgrade radio profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-83

DLP-119 Upgrade unlicensed MPT-HL radio to lower 6 GHz radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-87

DLP-120 +24/-48 volt converter replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-91

DLP-121 Power injector replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-95

DLP-122 RPS/XPIC module replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-99